C-ITOH 500e 1000e Users Manual

CI-5OOe,/Cl-lOOOe
MATRIX Lr'NE PRlN TER
U S E R ' S SllillANCrAL
America, inc,
P.N. 093-100 Rev. A June 1995
USER'S MANUAL FOR MODEL CI-500e/CI-1000e MATRIX LINE PRINTER
America, inc.
(PI 995 CIE Amerlca, Inc.
DECLARATION O CONFORMITY F
We, ITOCHU ELECTRONICSCO.,LTD. 26-28WorpleRoad Wimbledon, London, SW19, 4EE, UK
declareunder our soleresponsibilitythat theproduct: Product Type: Dot Matrix Printer Model Name: CI-500e/CI-1000e manufacturedat: Citizen Watch Co., Ltd. 1-12,6-chome,Honcho Tanashi-shi,Tokyo 188,Japan in '95,towhichthisdeclarationrelatesisinconformitywith the followingstandards: Safety: EN60950/1992 DC : ! : EN55022/1987 EN50082-1/1992 following the provisions of EMC (89/336/EEC)and LVD (73/ 23/EEC) , based on the following documents: 1. GS-mark Safety Certificate/Test Report issued by TUV Rheinland. 2. EMC Certificate of Conformity/Test Report issued by EMC KashirnaCorp. 3.technical document including information on production control keptatwhichwill bemadeavailableupon request.
FCC COMPLIANCE S A E E T F R AMERICAN USERS TTMN O

..This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device. pursuant to Pan IS of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide resonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
--
Trademark Acknowledgement
Epson and Epson LQ: Seiko Epson Corporation IBM. Proprimer: International Business Machines Corporation Microsofc Microsoft Corporation
As an Energy Star Partner. CIE America has determined that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy sufficiency.
EM1 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT FOR CANADIAN USERS

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
This equipment is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no g u m t e e that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to comct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radioflV technician for help. CAUTION: Use shielded cables to connect this device to computers. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
ETAT DE CONFORMITE EM1 A L'USAGE DES UTILISATEURS CANADIENS

Cef apparcil numtrique de la classe A respecre toutes les exigences du Rkglement sur le mattriel brouilleur du Canada.
Cet tquipement est c o n ~ u pour foumir une protection satisfaisante contn de telles interftrences dans une installation rCsidentielle. Cependant. il n'y a pas de garantie contre les interftrences avec les dceptions radio ou ttltvision, provoqutes par la mise en et hors circuit de I'tquipernent: aussi, il est demand6 1I'utilisateur d'essayer de comger I'interftrence par I'une ou plus des mesurcs suivantes: Rtorienter I'antenne de dception. Installer I'tquipernent autre pan. par Cgard pour le rtcepteur. Brancher I'Cquipement dans une prise de courant diffirente de f a ~ o n ce que I'ordinateur et le 1 dcepteur soient branchts sur des circuits diffCrents.
ATTENTION: Utiliser des cPbles blindts pour la c o ~ e x i o n cet Cquipement A I'ordinateur. de

Toute modification non expresdment approuvCe par I'autoritt comptente pour cet apparcil pourrait annulcr I'autorisation de I'utilisateur d'utiliser I'appareil.
Safety Marking and EMC

Europe:
CE marking and m v - G S m u k *CEmarking shows conformity to the following criteria and provisions:
EN60950 (73R3EEC) EN55022 (891336EEC) EN50082-1 (89/336/EEC) Nonh America: UL (UL1950) c-UL(CSA No.950 by UL) FCC PART 15 (class B)
~CI-500elCI-1oooe
Important Safely lnsfructions
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
I I.
12.
13.
14.
Read all of these instructions and save them for later reference. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product. Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Do not use this product near water. Do not place this product on an unstable can. stand or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product. Slots and openings on the cabinet and the back or bottom arc provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. do not block or cover these openings. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa. rug or other similar surface. This product should never be palced near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be palced in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. This product should be operated from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you arc not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company. This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug. Do not allow anythiig to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be walked on. If an extension cord is used with this product, make s u n that the total of the ampere ratings on the products plugged into the extension cord do not exceed the extension cord ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total of all products plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed 15 amperes. Never push objects of any kind into this product though cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or shon out pans that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Except as explained elsewhere in this manual. don't attempt to service this product yourself. Opening and removing those covers that are marked "Do Not Remove" may expose you to dangerous voltage points or Mher risks. Refer all servicing on those companments to service personnel. The mains plug on this equipment must be used to disconnect mains power. Please ensure that the socket outlet is installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: A. When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed. B. If liquid has been spilled into the product. C. If the product has been exposed to rain or water. D. If t h e product does not operate normally when the operating insutructions arc followed. e Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating insturctions s i ~ improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require exlensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation. E. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
---
ITOCHU (C-ITOH) SALES NETWORK
U.S.A.
CIE AMERICA, INC. 2701 Dow Avenue P.O. Box 2096 Tustin, CA 92681-2096 Phone: 800-877-1421 Fax: 714-757-4488 ITOCHU TECHNOLOGY, INC . Canada Branch 2120 Matheson Boulevard East Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 5E1 Canada Phone: 416-602-4743 Fax: 416-602-7702 ITOCHU ELECTRONICS CO. LTD. 26-28 Worple Road, Wimbledon, London, SW19, 4EE, England Phone: 181-946-4960 Fax: 181-879-0836 ITOCHU ELECTRONICS GMBH Immermann-Hof. Imrnermanstrasse 65D D-4000 Dusseldorf 1, . Federal Republic of German!? Phone: 0211-3685-0 Fax: 0211/358713 Telex: 8584102
Canada
Europe
Southeast/west Asia, Middle East, Africa, Oceania, South/Central America
ITOCHU ELECTRONICS CORP. Sun-Towers Center Building 2-11-22,Sangenjaya,Setagaya-ku, Tokyo 154, Japan Phone: 03-3419-9493 Fax: 03-3419-9361
CI-500eICI-1000e
DISCLAIMER
C.ITOH, Inc. has made every effort to ensure that the contents of this document are complete and accurate. However, because of continual product improvement, we are unable to guarantee the accuracy of this document after it has been published. C.ITOH, Inc. disclaims any liability for any omissions, changes, or errors and reserves the right to make changes to this manual and related equipment without notice.
PROPRIETARY NOTICE
All rights reserved. This documentation may not be reproduced in part or in whole, by mechanical or electronic means, without the written permission of C.ITOH, Inc.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
CI-500eandCI-1000eareequipmentdesignationof C.IMH, Inc. Dataproductsm tion. is a trademark of Dataproducts Corpora-
DEC@ is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, LA75m , LA50m , LAIOOm and VAXm are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation. IBM@, Proprinter@, and Proprinter XL are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Printronixo is a registered trademark of Printronix Corporation. IGP@ is a trademark of Printronix.
QMS@
is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual describes CI-500e/1000e printer functionality based on set-up with the factory default control settings. These settings are found in Chapter 4. Each factory default setting is marked by an asterisk signifying the origina1,menu item selection.
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
CI-500e11000e Major Features.. ......................... . , ..........................1-3 Accessories .................................................................................................. - 4 Basic Principles of Operation ..................................................... 1-5 Print Densities ..................................................................................... 1-6
CHAPTER 2 .INSTALLATION
Quick Set Up Guide ........................................ ............................................. 2-1 Tips on Printer Installation........................................................... 2-2 Unpacking ....................... "................................................................................. 2-4 Quick Reference to Printer Parts ............................... .-.......-.. .2-9 Descriptions of Major Parts ........................................................... 2-10 2-14 Upper Case .................................................................................................... Power Cord and Power Switch .......................................................... 2-15 Ribbon Loading Procedure .................................................................... 2- 17 Paper Loading ............................................................................................. 2-21 ....,........ 2-29 Adjusting the Print Start Position ................................Setting Top of Form ........................................................................................2-31 . .....................................................2- 32 Paper Tear Off ................................ ,, Quick Test of Printer .................................................................. 2-33
CHAPTER 3 .USING THE PRINTER

Emulation Modes and Graphics Modes ......................................... . 3-2 User Numbers and Printer Attribute Settings ....................... 3-3 Working With User Numbers .................................. ".-.................. 3 -7 Configuring the Printer .......................... .......-................................ 3-8 Introdvction to the Control Panel ................................................. 3-9 Quick Guide to Printer Operating Modes .................................... 3 -11 On Line Functions .................................................................................... 3-12 Off Line Functions ...................................................................................... 3-13 Set-Up Mode and Configuration Mode ............................... .............. 3-15 . ................................................... ....3-23 Configuration Mode ............................... Operating Guide ................................................................................................ 3-25 The Printer Attribute Groups ........................ ...................................... 3 -29
. 1
CHAPTER 4 .PRINTER ATTRIBUTES How to Select an Emulation Mode "........4-2 Format for Descriptions ............................................................................ 4-3 Set-Up and Configuration Mode Functions ................................... 4-4 000 - Emulation Mode ..................................................................... 4-4 001 - Graphic Mode ................................................................................ 4-4 002 - Setting Memory Control ....................................................... 4-5 003 - DP Font ................................................................................................ 4-6 004 - LQ Font ............................................................................................... 4-7 005 - HSD Font ..,....-.-..........-. - ....-.......-........................................................ 4-8 4-8 006 - Uppercase Select ..................................................................... 010 - Form Length .................................................................. -.......-.......-..4-9 011 - Line Spacing .................................................................................. 4-9 012 - Character Pitch ...................................................................... 4-10 013 - Print Quality ............................................................................. 4-11 014 - Character Set ....................................................................... 4-12 015 - Font for Zero ............................................................................. 4-13 016 - Print Width ..................................................................................... 4-14 017 - Compressed Print Width ..-.-.-........................................... 4-15 018 - Graphics Font /Code Page .................................................. 4-16 019 - Wraparound ................................ .-................................................. 4- 17 021 - Skip Perforation ...................................................... ....-..4-18 025 . - Auto CR on LF ................................................................... 4-18 026 - Print Start ...................................... .......-....-....-....-." .......-.......-.. 4-19 027 - VFU Selection ........................................................................... 4-20 , 028 - Bottom of Form Control ............................... .....-.......-....-..4-21 031 - Off line Changeover While Receiving Data ..-.-.-.. -22 4 034 - Row Feed Pitch for LQ Plot Mode ................................ 4-22 035 - Change TOF by Form Length ................................................ 4-23 040 - Response to ESC Sequence.................................................. 4-23 041 - Code System ................................................................................. 4-24 042 - Enable Graphics Font Codes ............................ ....-....4-24 043 - Undefined Control Code Handling ............................... 4-25 044 - Undefined Character Code Handling .......................... 4-25 045 - CR Code Handling ............................................................... 4-26 046 - DEL Code Handling .................................................................. 4-27 047 - DCl/DC3 Code Handling ....................................................... 4-27 048 - Data Bits ..................................................................................... 4-28 . ............................. 4-28 049 - CAN Code Handling ................................... ,, ................................. 4-29 050 - Vertical Tab Handling ....................... .-.051 - Horizontal Tab Handling ................................................. 4-29 052 - SI/SO Code Handling ..-.-.-.-....,.,.... .-.................................. 4-30 4-31 053 - Handling of Control Codes in Columns 8/9 ..-.-.. 054 - BS Code Handling ................................................................... 4-32 055 - Plot Mode Exit Print Position ............................... 4-32 056 - Unit of Form Length ............................................................. 4-33 : -.-.-.-.-.-.- 4-34 .. 061 - Busy Control ......................................................... 080 - Shift Out Reset ...................................................................... 4-34 081 - 8 LPI Reset ........................................................................... 4-35 ..... 082 - Horizontal Enlargement Reset ............................... -.- 4-35
CHAPTER 4 .PRINTER ATTRIBUTES (Continued)

083 084 100 103 104 108 109 110 11 1 112 113 114 115 117 118 120 121 122 123 125 126 127 130 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 4-36 4-36 - Hex Dump/Download......................................... ...................... 4-37 - Copy from User Number Set-Up...................................... 4-38 - Copy Set-Up to User Number ..-............-.-.-.... ..... .-.....4-39 .-.- Field Number Selection ................................................... 4-39 - Select Maintenance Mode ......................................... . .4-40 - Tear Form Mode ................................................................. 4-40 - Top Margin Adjustment .................................................... 4-40 - Tear Form Adjustment ....................................................... 4-41 - Shuttle Run-On Delay ..................................................... 4-41 - Paper Slew Speed ........................ , ......... ......-.-......-.- .......... 4 - 4 1 . , - Online Use of FF/LF Keys ............................................. 4-42 ............ - Paper Near End .................................... , 4-42 . ...... .-............ 4-42 ..... - On/Offline During Alarm ...................... - Alarm Display Duration ..................................................... 4-43 - Paper Jam Alarm ....................... ..-...- .................................... 4-43 . . - Head Coil Alarm ............................. ....... ............................... 4-43 - Impact Force ........................................................................... 4-44 - Ribbon Fault Alarm ....-.........-...... ......-...... ... ............-......... 4-44 - Ribbon Usage .......................................................................... 4-45 - LCD Message Language ....................................................... 4-4 5 - Print Direction ...................................................................... 4-46 - A u t o Interface S e l e c t ............................................................. 4-46 - Interface Type ...................................................................... - 4 6 - Receive Buffer ................................... ........................................ 4-47 - Dataline Inverting Option ............................................ 4-47 - Select Signal at Offline .......................... . ...........-........ 4-47 - Data Latch Timing ............................................................. 4-48 - ACK Timing .............................................................................. 4-48 - ACK Pulse Width .............................. .................................... 4-49 - Fault Signal Control ....................................................... 4-49 - Fault Signal at Off line .............. .-..................... 4-50 - Line Feed Count .................................................................. 4-50 - PowerLUp State ......................................................................... 4-50 - Paper Instruction......................... ..... .............................. 4 - 5 1 - Buffer Clear ............................................................................. 1 - Data Line 8 ................................................................................... 4-52 - Baud Rate ........................................................................................ 4-52 - Data Bit Length ..................................................................... 4-52 - Parity Bit ...................................................................................... 4-53 - Stop Bits ....................................................................................... 4-53 - Serial Interface Protocol ............................................. 4-53 - Overrun Buffer Size ............................................................. 4-54 - X-OFF Control ............................................................................ 4-54 - Data Error ........................ ............................................................. 4-54 - Modem Control ........................ .. ................................................ 4-55 - Polling Character for ACK/NAK ..................................... 4-55 - Set Signalling Interval for Idling State .... 4-56 GAP4 Functions ............................................................... ................... 4-57 - International Character Set ......................................... 4-57 - Print Direction .......................................................................... 4-57 - GAP-4 Wake-Up Command Character ............................... 4-58 - Terminate Code .............................................................................. 4-58 xi
. Vertical Enlargement Reset ..........................................
- Plot Mode Reset .................................................................
....
C . ITOH
214 220 237 245
CHAPTER 5 .DLP EMULATION MODE

A
How to Set Up the CI-DLP Emulation Mode ..................................... 5-2 Quick Review of ASCII Codes ............................................................. 5-3 CI-DLP Control Codes ........-..........- ............................................................ 5-4 Introduction to Escape Sequences .."................................................. 5-11 Print Style/Attribute Commands .............................-.......................... 5-18 Character Pitch ....................... ...... .......-.................................................5-18 Emphasized Printing .....-.......-....... .............................................. 5-19 Under1ining ..-.......-....-..................................................................................... 5-20 Horizontally Enlarged Print ..................................................... ".....5-21 Horizontal Enlargement Reset .....-.......-.......-....-.......-................... 5-21 Vertically Enlarged Print ..-."....................................................... 5-22 Vertical Enlargement Reset ........-....".-.... .......-. ".- .......................... 5-23 Print Quality .._._.-.-...._.......-. "........................................................... 5-23 Character Set Commands ......................................................................... 5-24 Font for Zero ..-....-.......-. ............................................................... 5-24 Character Set ............................ ".... ."............................................. 5-25 "..5-26 Select Font ........................................................................... ".".".".Graphics Font ........-.......-.-. ............................................................. 5-26 ". Enable Graphics Font Codes ..... -................................................... 5-27 Character and Control Code Settings ............................................. 5-28 5-28 Code System ..-.......-."....................................................................................... 5-29 Data Bits ............................................................................................... BS Code Handling ..-.......-....... .......-........................................................... 5- 30 ................................... 5-30 CAN Code Handling ................................... -." ....-....-. -.CR Code Handling ..-....".-.... ............................................... ".-.......-........ 5-31 DC1 /DC3 Code Handling ..-................................................................... 5-32 DEL Code Handling ................................ -......................................... 5-32 Response to Escape Sequence ..-....-....-. ........................................ 5-33 SI/SO Code Handling ......................... ".-.-................................. 5-34 Shift Out Reset ..-........................................................................... 5-35 Undefined Character Code Handling .....-....-.......-....-.-....-.......-..5-35 Undefined Control Code Handling .......................................... ".....5-36 Handling of Control Codes in Columns 8/9 .....-.".- -....-..5-37 .... Line Feed/Pitch Commands .................................. -..................................... 5-38 ".".-....-.......................................... 5-38 Line Spacing ........................................ 8 LPI Reset .......................... "..........................................5-38 Line Count Feeding ..-....-.-....-.-.-.-.-........-.-. - ..................................... 5-39 Dataproducts B-300 Line Counter Feeding ..-....-.".-........-..5-41 Dot Row Feeding ..-.............. - ................................................................ 5-42 Form and Vertical Tab Commands ........-.-.-.... ....-.-....-.-.-. ".".-....".-.....5-43 .".Form Length ............................ ".-.-." .......................... ........................... 5-44 5-45 Unit of Form Length .....-.-.-.-.,....-. "..............................."....-."...."."....-.. Skip Perforation ........................................................... ...."..5-46 Bottom of Form Control .....-.-....-.-.... ....-.-....".-.".-. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 -............................. 5-48 Vertical Tab Handling .................................... .VFU Selection ..... ....-.... ".-.- ................................................................ 5-48 2-Channel VFU Loading ..-.-.-.-....... -......................................... 5-49 . Resetting the 2-Channel VFU ..-....-.-.,.-.,.-....-.-. ....-..... 5-50 .... . 12-Channel DAVFU Loading ..,.,.,.,.-.,.,.-.-. .- , ........5-51 -.-.-.DAVFU Channel Selection .....-....-. -.-.-.....................................5-56 Resetting 12-Channel DAVFU .. .......-.......-.-.-.-. ".,.".".".-.-...... 5-57
CHAPTER 5 .DLP EMULATION MODE (Continued)

Dataproducts B-300 DAVFU Loading .......... , .... . .... , 5-58 Dataproducts B-300 DAVFU Channel Selection .... .... 5-60 Resetting the B-300 DAVFU ............................. 5-61 Loading Printronix 14-Channel EVEU .................. 5-62 Printronix EVFU Channel Selection .................. 5-65 Resetting the Printronix EVFU ....................... 5-66 Horizontal Positioning/Format Commands ................. 5-67 Print Width ................................................................................................ 5-67 Compressed Print Width .................................................................... 5-68 Horizontal Tab Handling ................................................................... 5-69 Set Horizontal Tabs and Margins ..................... 5-70 Graphics-Related Commands ..................................................................... 5-72 Normal Density (DP) Plot Mode ....................... 5-72 High Density (LQ) Plot Mode ............ , ........................... . , 5-73 Reset Plot Mode ......................................................................................... 5-74 Normal Density (DP) Printronix Plot Mode ...................... 5-75 High Density (LQ) Printronix Plot Mode ............. 5-76 Plot Mode Exit. Print Position ..................................... .......... 5-77 Row Feed Pitch for LQ Plot Mode ............................................. 5-77 Plot Mode Reset ................................................................................. 5-78 Postal Bar Codes ........................................................................................... 5-79 Miscellaneous Commands ....................................................................... 5-87 . , 5-87 Print Start ..................... , ........................................................................... 5-88 Reset/Save Configuration 2 Settings ................ Select User Number ...................................... 5-88
CHAPTER 6 .PRINTRONIX EMULATION MODES

How to Set Up the Printronix Emulation Mode ..... ..... 15-2 A Quick Review of ASCII Codes ............................................................ 15-3 Printronix P6000-P/P6000-S Control Codes .............. 15-4 Introduction to Control Sequences................................................ 6-12 P6000-P/S Control Sequences ............................................................... 6-14 Print Style/Attribute Commands ......................................................... 6-15 Set Bold Printing .................................................................................... 6-15 Cancel Bold Printing .......................................................................... 6-15 Set Shadow Printing ..................................... 6-16 Reset Shadow Printing .......................................................................... -16 Set Condensed Printing ....................................................................... 6-16 Reset Condensed Printing ................................................................. 1 7 Set Elite Printing ........................ ........................ 6-17 Reset Elite Printing .............................................................................. 6-17 Set Double-Height Printing ...................................... h i - 1 8 Double-Width Printing ........................................................................... 6-18 Set Double-Width Printing for One Line .............. 6-19 Set Mixed Print Modes ............................................................................ 6-20 Select Print Quality and Pitch .................................................. -21 Set Superscript/Subscript Printing ........................................ 6-22 Reset Super/Subscript Printing .................................................... 6-22 Under1ining .......................................................................................................... 6-23 Overscoring ........................................................................................................ 6. 23
CHAPTER 6 .PRINTRONIX EMULATION MODES (Continued)

Set Commands ................................................................................................................ 6-24 Select Alternate Character Set ................................6-24 Cancel Alternate Character Set ..................................................... 6-24 Select International Character Set ....................................... 6-25 Select Font ................................................................ "....................................... 6-26 Line Feed/Pitch Commands .............................................................................. 6-27 Line Feed N/216 Inch .............................................................................. 6-27 Set 1/6" Line Spacing ............................................................................ 6-27 Set 1/8" Line Spacing .................................. .-................................ .6-28 Set 7/72" Line Spacing ....................................................................... 6-28 Set N/72" Line Spacing ..................................................................... 6-29 Set N/216" Line Spacing ...................................................................... 6-29 Form and Vertical Tab Commands ........................................................... 6-30 Form Length Set (Inches) ................................................................ 6-30 Form Length Set (Lines) ............................................................... 6-30 Set Perforation Skip ..................................................................... 6-31 Cancel Perforation Skip ...................................................................... 6-31 Vertical Tab Set ................................................................. 6-32 6-32 VFU Set ..................................... ......................................... ........................... VFU Channel Select .............................................................................. 6-33 EVFU .Set .................................................................................................. 6-34 EVFU Channel Selection ....................................................................... 6-37 Resetting the EVFU ................................................................. -.......-........6-38 EVFU Line Count Feeding ................................................................... 6-39 12-Chamel DAVFU Loading ............................................................. 6-40 DAVFU Channel Selection ....................................................................... 6-44 Resetting 12-Channel DAVFU ........................................................ 6-44 DAVFU Line Count Feeding ...................... -.-.................................... 6-45 Horizontal Positioning/Format Commands .................................... 6-46 Horizontal Tab Set ........................ .-............................................... 6-46 Horizontal Tab Clear ........................................................................... 6-47 Left Margin Set ....................................................... ".................................. 6-47 Right Margin Set ................................................................................... 6-48 Graphics Commands .....-.......-....-. -.-.-.-.-.-.-.................................................... 6-49 Bit Image Mode Code Reassignment ......................................... 6-49 Single Density Bit Image Mode ................................................ 6-50 Double Density Bit Image Mode .............................................. 6-52 Double Density/Double Speed Bit Image Mode ..-.-.,.-....-.. 6-53 , 6-54 . .... Quadruple Density Bit Image Mode ...................................... Bit Image Mode Selection ........................................................... 6-55 Odd Dot Plot ........................ -.-....................................................... .6-55 Even Dot Plot ............................................................................. 6-57 Postal Bar Codes .....-.-....-.-....-.... ................................................................ .-.6-58 Miscellaneous Commands ......................................................................... 6-66 6-66 Reset Printer ................................................................................... Select User Number ......................................., ..6-66 . .-.-.-.-
'
xiv
CHAPTER 7 .IBM EMULATION MODE

How to Set Up the IBM Emulation Mode ... ., . , ... .. . . , 7-2 A Quick Review of ASCII Codes ......... ......... , ... .. . . , 7-3 ASCII Control Codes ....................................... 7-4 Introduction to Escape Sequences........... .......... 7-9 Vertical Positioning/Activity Commands ..... ..... 7-12 Set Top of Form ......................................... 7-12 7-12 Set Page Length (Inches) .............................. ............... 7-12 Set Page Length (Li~es)............. Set/Clear Skip Perforation Mode ..... ;............. .. 7-13 Set/Clear Vertical Tabs ............................... 7-14 Line Spacing Commands .................... , ......................... . , 7-15 Select 1/8" Line Feed Spacing .................................... , . . . 7-15 .. . , Select 7/72" Line Feed Spacing ...................... 7-15 Select N/216" Line Feed Spacing .................... 7-15 Set N/72' Line Feed Spacing ........................................................ 7-16 Start N/72" Line Spacing ............................................................... 7-16 Self-Cancelling LF Pitch ............. , ....... ........ , 7-17 Select/Cancel Auto LF Upon Carriage Return ........ 7-17 Horizontal Positioning/Activity Commands .............. 7-18 Set Left/Right Margins ................................ 7-18 Set/Clear Horizontal Tabs ........................................................... 7-19 Select/Cancel Proportional Spacing Mode ............ 7-20 Print Style/Attribute Commands ..................... ,, . ................................. 7-21 Select Print Quality .......................... ,,................... .. . 7-21 Select 10 CPI Printing Mode ..................................... 2.................. 7-22 Select 12 CPI Printing Mode ........................................................ 7-22 Select 15 CPI Printing Mode ..................... ................................ 7-22 Select 17.14 CPI Condensed Pitch Printing Mode .... 7-23 Select/Cancel Emphasized Print Mode .................................... 7-23 Select/Cancel Near Letter Quality Print Mode ...... 7-24 Select/Cancel Underlining Print Mode ............... 7-24 Select/Cancel Super/Subscript Printing Mode ....... 7 -25 Select/Cancel Double-Width Printing Mode ...................... 7-26 Select Double-Width for One Line ..................... 7-26 Select/Cancel Double-Height/Width Printing ................. 7-27 Select/Cancel Overscoring ............................................................... 7-28 Graphics Commands .............................................................................................. 7-29 Select Normal Density Bit Image Graphic Mode ...... 7-29 Select 120 DPI Bit Image Graphic Mode .............................. 7-31 Select 120 (Half) DPI Bit Image Graphic Mode ...... 7-31 Select 240 DPI Bit Image Graphic Mode ............... 7-32 Character Set Commands ................... ,, . .......................................................... 7-33 Basics of Character Generation ................................................. 7-33 Define Download Character Code ....................... ,, ,, . ......... ........... 7-39 Select Character Set 1 ....................................................................... 7-45 Select Character Set 2 ................................................... .................... 7-45 Select "All Characters" Print Mode 1 .................................. 7-45 Select "All Characters' Print Mode 2 ................................. 7-46 Select Font ........................................................................................................... 7-46
^, .
CHAPTER 7 .IBM EMULATION MODE (Continued)

Select Code Page ........-......."................................................................................. 7-47 . Miscellaneous Commands ................................................................................. 7-48 Select User Number ........................- ........................................................... 7-48 ............................. 7-48 Initialize Tabs ..-..........- .................................................... Deselect Printer ................................................................................... "........ 7-49
CHAPTER 8 .ALARMS AND MAINTENANCE

Alarm List .................................................................................................... Preventive Maintenance .....-....... .................................................................. Daily Inspection ......................... .............................................................. Weekly Inspection and Cleaning .. ............................................... Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................
_ _
8-3 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-11
APPENDIX A . CHARACTER SETS SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX B . INTERFACING WITH THE HOST COMPUTER APPENDIX C . INDEX
xvi
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for selecting the CI-500e and CI-1000e printer! These heavy-duty, high speed dot matrix line printers oiifer high performance combined with flexibility and ease of use. Quality construction assures high productivity and long, trouble-free lifes.
QUALITY AND SPEED
The CI-500e and CI-1000e are heavy-duty industrial-quality ,printers built for many years of service. Fast, tough, and reliable, the CI-500e/CI-1000eexcel in high volume applications such as invoice, check, or bar code label printing. The CI-500e prints up to 540 lines per minute (LPM) , the CI-1000e handle continuous forms up to 16 inches wide, with one original plus up to five carbon or carbonless copies.
Figure 1-1. The CI-500e/1000e Printer
Figure 1-2. The CI-500e/1000e Printer: Rear View
CAPABILITIES
The CI-5OOe and CI-1000e provides a variety of print densities, speeds, character fonts, spacings, forms control, and other attributes. Printer attributes may be altered by 'eitheran operator or a host computer, allowing considerable flexibility in word processing, small business document and record processing, data communications, and other applications. Connection versatility is provided through support for a variety of interfaces.
EASE OF USE
CI-500e and CI-1000e characteristics are easily set using its compact but powerful multifunction control panel. The panel's display window guides users by showing choices of operating characteristics. The User Number system provides five memorized lists of printer attributes for instant selection. Four lists are stored for immediate use on power-up; the fifth (number 4) is a "scratch" list for temporary use and is not saved. List choices can be altered as desired.
CI-500e/1000e MAJOR FEATURES
Standard features of the CI-500e/CI-1000eprinter include:

b
Multimode printing - data processing, letter quality, high-speed draft mode, and graphics Versatile character attributes - compressed, bold, slanted, under1ined, enlarged A standard character set which includes ASCII, international, math/scientific (engineering) block , graphics, and line drawing characters. The selected emulation mode determines the available character sets. USER NUMBER control of printer makes it easy to set up printer for four different printing applicat:.ons simply by selecting one of the USER NUMBER lists. Available interfaces include: RS-232C/RS-423A Centronics parallel Dataproducts parallel IBM-Coax IBM-Twinax
Emulations selectable Eromthecontrolpanel are: CI-IILP, IBM, P6000-P,P6000-S,Auto. When set to Auto the CI-500e/ CI-1000e select the appropriate emulation based on an analysis of incoming data. Under IBM emulation, up to 256 DP character patterns and 256 LQ character patterns may be downloaded.
CI-GAP4 graphics programming language interpreter is included as standard hardware feature. Fcrnts specifically designed for GAP mode are used in t.his mode.
ACCESSORIES
The CI-500e and CI-1000e are supplied with the following standard accessories:
b
b b
Power Cord Ribbon Cleaning Brush for print head
The following are optional CI-500e/CI-1000eaccessories: Quick-Access Cover Provides top outlet for paper; supports page cut capability. Cutter in cover allows clean and easy tearoff of single pages, short forms, and so on. Paper Stacker Dataproducts Interface IBM-Coax Interface IBM-Winax Interface QMS Emulation b IGP Emulation ROM Font Modules RAM Font Module (user-defined download fonts are available for all emulations.) Enclosed Cabinet
Figure 1-3. CI-500e/CI-1000eWith Enclosed Cabinet
CI-500e/cI-1000e
BASIC PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

HOW A DOT IS PRINTED
Printing is performed by a series of coils and hammers mounted together in a sideways-moveable pr:~nthammer assembly. To print a dot at a selected posit:-on, that position's coil/hammer assembly is energized ty a current pulse. This generates a magnetic field, propelling the hammer toward the platen. The hanuner force impacts the ribbon onto the paper, printing the dot.
HOW A LINE OF CHARACTERS IS PRINTED
The printer forms characters by printing all required dots in a horizontal dot-row through all characters in that line simultaneously, immediately advancing the paper one dot row and printing another line of dot:; in the opposite direction, and repeating these operations until the character is formed. The printed image can be formed using character patterns stored in programmable ROM (Read Only Memory), or from data bytes individually controlling each dot posit ion.
CI-500elCI-1000e
PRINT DENSITIES
The chart below displays the various CI-500e/CI-1000e density/mode relationships, based upon a horizontal printable area of 13.6 inches. Columns = Maximum number of printable columns per line = Characters per inch CPI DPI = Dots per inch CI-DLP EMULATION COLUMNS DP/HSD Modes 10 11.67 12.08 13.33 15 16.67 10 11.67
LQ Mode
IBM EMULATION CPI DP Mode 10 12 15 17.14 10 12 15

17.14
COLUMNS
NW/LQ
Mode
P6000/P,P6000/SEMULATION
CPI
DP Mode
10 12 13.33 15 17.14 10 12 13.33 15 17.14
COLUMNS
DP I
LQ
Mode
136 163 180 204 233 136 163 180 204 233
--
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION
The two major steps in getting started with your new printer are: 1) physical installation, and 2) learning control panel use and operating characteristic selection. This chapter covers physical installation and tells how to load paper, change ribbons, and perform other physical operations. Chapter 3, on the other tiand, provides information on printer operation and describes control panel use. It shows how to select printer characteristics, enter User Numbers, and perform many other actions. Please familiarize yourself with the general contents of this chapter before following the quick set-up guide.
QUICK SET-UP GUIDE
---
These steps set up the printer for operations:

ACTIVITY STEP 1 . STEP 2. REFHZENCE PAGE
Unpack printer; move it to usage location. Remove shipping restraints. Connect interface to host computer. Install ribbon. Connect power cord. Load paper.
Run printing check.
Pg. 2-4 Pg. 2-4, 7
--
STEP 3. STEP 4. STEP 5. STEP 6. STEP 7.
Pg. 2-17 Pg. 2-15
Pg. 2-21
Pg. 2-33 Chapter 3.
STEP 8.
Select operating characteristics.
CI-5OOeICI-1000e TIPS ON PRINTER INSTALLATION LOCATION

The CI-1000e weighs 106 pounds; the CI-500e weighs 104 pounds. Provide adequate, stable support.
b Plan to allocate space for paper supply and printer output.
lifting printer cover. Also leave room f o ~ place printer in a well-ventilated area. Note: Ventilation openings are provided in the printer cabinet to ensure reliable operation and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blockedor covered. Do not install printer in a rack or other built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. If the printer is locatednearawall,maintain theseminimum spacings (see Figure 2-1):
80 cm (32 inches) between the back of the printer and the wall; 30 a n (12 inches) between the sides of the printer and the wall.
Figure 2-1. Minimum Installation Distances
(Location considerations continued)

b
Do not expose the printer to damaging heat (such as
from direct sunlight), excessive cold, condensing moisture, solvents, or fluid spills.
b
Do not use in overly dusty locations. Abrasive dust, such as that from manufacturing operations, can reduce the printer's lifetime.
.-.
ELECTRICAL CONSIDERATIONS
b
Use an electrically stable 110-120V power source for printers in the United States. European printers require a stable 220-240V power source. A suitably "clean" source of power is one not sub~~ect to electrical transients or "spikes" due to heavy power consumption equipment on the line. For this reason, do not put the printer on the same out.let as a large copier or other heavy consumer of power. POWER-CORD SAFETY: Route power cords so they are not likely to be walked on or tripped over, or be pinched by doors or the weight of objects.
GROUNDING - For safety, the printer is equipped with a 3-wire ground plug. This plug only fits into a grounded power receptacle. Do not remove the ground pin.
POWER SURGES - For added protection from pcwer surges, unplug the printer when it will not be r.sed for long periods or use a surge protector.
CI-500elCI-1000e
UNPACKING
The printer is shipped in a two-piece cardboard shipping container. The following steps describe how to unpack the container, remove the accessory box, and remove the printer. Note: The printer is very heavy and at least two people will
be needed to move it. Always support it firmly and avoid
carrying it at extreme angles. Keep the printer level when lifting, unloading, or moving it. Unnecessary or extreme
jarringside-to-sidemotionmaydamagetheprintheadassembly.
UNPACKING PROCEDURE
STsP 1.
DETACH FMTENERS ( A )
Remove the six plastic fasteners holding the printer to the box (see Figure 2-2 below): a). Grip left and right fastener fins with your thumb and forefinger.
b). Squeeze the fins together and pull downward
and outward until the fastener comes out.
Figure 2-2. Fastener Removal
2-4
STEP 2. STEP 3.
REMOVE CARTON Lift and remove carton cover from base.

LOCATE AND REMOVE ACCESSORY BOX Find the accessory box, which is located on tap of the internal packingmaterials. Remove the accessory box and the top foam shipping blocks. (Figure 2 - 3 )
Figure 2-3. Accessory Box Removal (continued)
STEP 4 .
LIFT PRINTER FROM PACKING BOX
CAUTION: TO ENSURE SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING COMPLETELY THROUGH BEFORE LIFTING PRINTER:
1. At least two people are needed to safely lift the printer; DO NOT ATTEMPT THIS STEP ALONE.
2. D O N O T LIFT PRINTER BY GRIPPING THE FRONT: the top cover may suddenly release, possibly resulting in personal injury and/or printer damage.
3. (Refer to Figure 2-4) Each person should support the printer with one hand on the bottom under the left or right side near the front edge and one hand under the back edge of the printer. Do not lift until all grips are secure. Lift the printer, keeping it reasonably level and place it on the floor.
Figure 2-4. How to Safely Lift Printer (continued)
STEP 5.
REMOVE REMAINING PROTECTIVE MATERIALS; CHECK FOR DAMAGE OR LOSS Cut the packing bands and remove protective materif als. Check printer for damage; verify presence o: all accessories (see Figure 2 - 5 ) . The accessory box contains:
AC cord Brush Ribbon
(1)
(1)
(1)
Also included in the shipping box are the warranty card, this User ' s Manual, and the Graphics Programming Manual.
..
Figure 2-5. Standard Accessories

STEP 6.
PLACE P R I N T E R ON PEDESTAL
Using two people as detailed in Step 4, caref~llly place the printer on the pedestal stand. Do not drop i t in place. (continued)
STEP 7.
LOOSEN THE FRONT COVER SCREWS As shown in Figure 2-6, loosen the thumbscrews which secure the front cover. These screws prevent the front cover fromopening i f the cover isgraspedwhile lifting the printer. To prevent damage to the front cover, retighten the thumbscrews before repacking for shipment.
Figure 2-6. Loosening the Front Cover Screws
OUICK REFERENCE TO PRINTER PARTS

This section shows and names the major printer parts and describes their functions. Items numbered in Figure 2-7 are identified below and described in alphabetical order on the next few pages. Details of their use are given later in this chapter.
MAJOR PRINTER PARTS
1 - Print Head Cap Adjustment Lever 2 - Print Head Character Adjustment Knob 3 - Ribbon Guide 4 - Ribbon Running Sensor 5 - Upper Tractor 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
- Tractor Lock Lever - Tractor drive Shaft - Tractor Shift Cable
-
Cover, Upper Tractor Paper Guide Wheel Print Head Ribbon Mask Platen Paper Upper Guide Transparent Cover
- Upper Case - Interface Cartridge Cover - Control Panel
- Lower Tractor
-
- Cover, Lower Tractor
Paper End Sensor Front Cover Switch Front Cover
- Paper Guide Wheel - Ribbon

Ribbon Core Paper Feed Knob - Interface Connectors - Front Cover Set Screw - Circuit Breaker
31 - Power Switch 32 - Power Connector Socket
Figure 2-7. CI-500e/CI-1000eComponents Locations
CI-500e/CI-1000e
DESCRIPTIONS OF MAJOR PARTS

The parts are listed here in alphabetical order with brief descriptions. For details of their use, refer to the rest of this chapter.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
A protection device against elect-rical surges.
CONTROL PANEL
The printer is manually controlled from this panel. See Chapter 3 for instructions.
COVER, LOWER TRACTOR

The covers lift to allow easy threading of paper through the tractors. When threading is finished, the covers must be closed for proper paper tension, otherwise the paper may misfeed.
COVER, UPPER TRACTOR

See above.
FRONT COVER
Allows access to lower tractors.

FRONT COVER S E T SCREW
Prevents the front cover from opening accidentally w h e n the printer is carried.
INTERFACE CARTRIDGE COVER

Protects interface cartridge. To access the option module slot, this cover must be removed.
INTERFACE CONNECTORS
Allows attachment of an interface cable to the host computer. Both a Centronics parallel interface connector and an RS-232C/RS-423A interface connector is provided.
INTERFACE MODULE
A component that adapts the printer for a particular type of data communications; it provides an interfacts to the host computer. The module plugs into the printer's main circuit board in a connector found under the piiper chute/circuit board cover.
LOWER TRACTOR
Moves and guides paper through the printer.

PAPER END SENSOR
Sensor which detects when paper has run out.

PAPER FEED KNOB
Allows manual paper position adjustment.

PAPER GUIDE WHEEL
Supports area of paper between tractors.

PAPER UPPER GUIDE
Provides guidance for paper movement.

PLATEN
Steel bar supporting the back of the paper during printing.

POWER CONNECTOR SOCKET
Point of attachment for power to printer.

POWER SWITCH
Means of turning printer power on and off

PRINT HEAD
Contains the pins a i drivers that form characters. rd
PRINT HEAD CHARACTER ADJUSTMENT KNOB

Adjusts the position of the paper horizontally, allowing the left-most print position to be set. Refer to page 2 - 2 9 for more information.
PRINT HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT LEVER

Users may change the gap between the print head and the platen to allow ,handling of various thicknesses of paper.
RIBBON
A fabric loop containing ink.
RIBBON CORE
A support and alignment device for a ribbon spool.
RIBBON RUNNING SENSOR

A device which detects when the end of the ribbon has been reached. The ribbon motors then reverse their rotation, allowing the ribbon to be reused.
RIBBON GUIDE
Aligns the ribbon for printing.
RIBBON MASK
Separates the paper and the ribbon.
TRACTOR DRIVE SHAFT

Metal bar tractors. providing mechanical force to turn
TRACTOR LOCK LEVER

The tractors can be different paper sizes. they are locked in place provide stable paper printing. slid sideways to accommodate When in the desired position, with the tractor lock levers to positioning and tension for
,--
TRACTOR SHIFT CABLE
Ct
Maintains alignment between the top-right and bottom-right tractors. Once the tractor lock lever on the top-right tractor has been released, the tractor width may be adjusted by moving either tractor.
TRANSPARENT COVER
Panel in the top cover which allows the paper and print head area to be viewed.
UPPER TRACTOR
Moves and guides paper through the printer.

UPPER CASE
The large structure protecting the print area f.rom accidental contact by users during operation.
CI-500e/CI-1000e
UPPER CASE
T h e p r i n t e r ' s u p p e r c a s e is o p e n e d a n d c l o s e d a s shownbelow. Two p n e u m a t i c c y l i n d e r s c o u n t e r a c t t h e w e i g h t of t h e c a s e , making i t e a s y t o l i f t .
Figure 2 - 8 .
U p p e r Case Handling
CI-500e/CI-1000e
QUICK ACCESS COVER

The optional Quick Access Cover accessory provides top exit for paper and has a built-in sharp-edged cutter.
Figure 2-9. Quick Access Cover Installed
POWER CORD AND POWER SWITCH

Attach the AC power cord as follows:
STEP 1.
!
-
TURN THE POWER SWITCH OFF Confirm that the power switch, located on the ieft side of the printer, is in the OFF position as shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10. Power Switch in OFF Position
STEP 2 .
Plug t h e A c c o r d i n t o t h e r e c e p t a c l e a t t h e r i g h t r e a r of t h e p r i n t e r (see F i g u r e 2 - 1 1 ) . Connect t h e A c o r d C t o a power o u t l e t .
F i g u r e 2-11. C o n n e c t i n g A Power Cord C
STEP 3.
P r i n t e r power i s t u r n e d o n b y p r e s s i n g i n t h e s i d e o f t h e s w i t c h marked " I " .
F i g u r e 2-12.
Power S w i t c h
2-16
,,*-
RIBBON LOADING PROCEDURE

STEP 1 . STEP 2. STEP 3.
Remove ribbon from the accessory package. Open printer's upper case (see Figure 2--7, page
2'14)
I f it has not been already removed, cut the fastener which holds the Print Head Adjustment Lever.
Set Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever (see Figure 213 below) to OPEN position (as far to the rear as it will go).
-...
STEP 4.
Figure 2-13. Setting Gap Lever to Open Position
STEP 5 .
Place ribbon into position between the ri:sbon mask and the print head. (See Figure 2-14). Do this by holding the ribbon taut between the spools and then lowering it into place wit:nout twistiny . Note: The ribbon mask is extremely thin; be very careful not to bend or damage it.
Figure 2-14. Lowering Ribbon Into Place

STEP 6.
Align the ribbon in the ribbon guides on both sides of the printer (see Figure 2-15). Make sure that the ribbon does not go between the ribbon guides (see Figure 2-16)
Figure 2-15. Ribbon Aligned with Guides
2-18
Figure 2-16. Incorrect Placement of Ribbon

STEP 7 .
(Figure 2-17) Fit each ribbon spool on the corresponding ribbon core. The pawl on each core must be aligned with one of the slots in the ribbon spool (see arrow in figure). Push both ribbon spools down onto the ribbon cores until they are held in place by the pawls.
I
Figure 2-17. Placement of Ribbon Spool onto Core
_I
STEP 8 . STEP 9 .
Verify that the ribbon runs smoothly along the four ribbon guides. Turn the spools by hand to eliminate slack in the ribbon (see Figure 2-18). Ribbon spools automatically reverse direction when end-of ribbon is reached.
Figure 2-18. Eliminating Slack in Ribbon Spool STEP 10. For single-part word processing and computer paper, set the Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever to position "1"; for multipart paper or thick single-part paper, set the lever to appropriate posit ion.
STEP 1 . Close the Upper Case. 1
RIBBON CARE
Note: To maintain print quality and prevent excessive wear on the print heads, periodically monitor ribbon wear. The duration of use of a ribbon can be extended by exchanging the left and right spools at regular intervals. Replace worn ribbons by opening the Upper Case and following Steps 3 through 10 above.
CI-500e/CI-1oooe
"-
PAPER LOADING
b
Use only paper matching the specifications given in Appendix B. Note that the paper carton or stack of paper must be positioned so that the paper feeds smoothly and straightly into the printer.
INSERTING PAPER
."-
A total of four tractors move paper through the printer. The upper left and right tractors pull the paper upward through the printer, while the lower left and right tractors push the paper upward. Load the paper as follows:
..
STEP 1.
Turn printer power switch ON. The switch is located on the right rear of the printer, as seen from the back. The Power Indicator on the control panel should light, the ONLINE indicator should be off , the Alarm Indicator will flash and the display window will show message: AL02: Paper Out. Note: When alarm conditions 02 or 03 (paper adjustment lever is open) occur, the printer automatically goes OFFLINE.
STEP 2.
*-
STEP 3. STEP 4.
Open the upper case to the fully open position. Set the Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever to its rear-most position (OPEN position - see Figure 2-13). Release the upper right tractor locking :Lever as shown in Figure 2-19.
STEP 5.
-.. .
(continued)
Figure 2-19. Releasing the Right Upper Tractor
STEP 6.
Lift up the front cover until it stops as shown in Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20. Opening the Front Cover

2-22
STEP 7.
Open the lower left and right tractor gates as shown in Figure 2 - 2 1 below.
Figure 2-21. Opening the Lower Tractor Gates

STEP 8 .
a)Insert paper through the printer's bottom entry slot.

b )Position paper on the lower left traztor sprocket pins so that the perforazions on the left side of the paper fit onto the tractor sprocket pins. Close the lower left gate.
.STEP 9.
Shift the lower right tractor until the perforations on the right side of the paper fit onto the tractor sprocket pins (see Figure 2 22).
Note: If there is difficulty in moving the lower right tractor, make sure that the upper right tractor locking lever is released. Make sure that the paper is aligned properly on both tractor sprockets and that the paper is slightly taut. Under-tension produces irregular print 1 ines; over-tension causes torn paper holes and paper. jamming.
Figure 2-22. Clamping Paper in Lower Right Tractor
STEP 10. Rotate Paper Feed Knob so top of paper slides into upper tractors and its edge perforations engage in the sprockets. If paper fails to insert properly in upper tractors, open the tractor gates and position paper on sprocket pins; close tractor gates.
STEP 11. Raise upper right tractor locking lever to lock tractor securely. See Figure 2-23. (continued)
Figure 2-23.
Locking Tractor
STEP 12. Rotate Paper Feed Knob (right side of carriage) so
that the perforation line between the first and second pages aligns with the Top of Form index mark (triang1.e)located in the middle of the upper right ei tractor. See Figures 2-24 and 2-25. If the top t x t is used (the printer has the quick access cover option), align the top edge of the first page with the index mark on the right tractor. STEP 13. Set the Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever to the posit ion appropriate for the thickness of the paper being used. Generally, the thicker the paper, the higher the setting. For single-part word proces:sing and computer paper, set to position "1" (fully forward-narrowest gap). See Figure 2-26. For other thicknesses such as multi-part paper, set the lever to the appropriate position. The markings on the scale do not correspond to number of pa.rts, but are instead a relative thickness gauge. NOTE: I f multi-part forms are printing too light, you can increase the printing force by setting Field 123 to IMPACT HI. Refer to the Field 123 description in Chapter 4 and the Configuration Mode description in Chapter 3 .
STEP 14. Close the front cover. (See Figure 2 - 2 7 . ) STEP 15. Close the upper case
Figure 2-24. Aligning Page Perforation
Figure 2-25. Using Paper Feed Knob For Top Exit
-J
Figure 2-26. Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever
Figure 2-27. Closing Front Cover
CI-SOOe/CI- loooe
ADJUSTING THE PRINT START POSITION

To adjust the print start position:
STEP 1. STEP 2. STEP 3.
Place printer OFFLINE and open upper case Set Print Head Gap Adjustment lever to OPEN (forward). Rotate the Print Character Adjusting Knob (located on left of carriage - see Figure 2-28) to move the paper horizontally until the desired first printing position on the paper is set. Use the column scale - location shown Figure 2-29 - for alignment. Turning the knob clockwise moves the paper to the left; counterclockwise moves the paper to the right. The adjustment range is 1.4 inches (35 mm).
STEP 4.
When further fine adjustment is needed, return to Step 3.
Figure 2-28. Using Print Character Adjusting Knob
Figure 2 - 2 9 .
Location of the Column Scale
CI-5WCI- LOOOe
SETTING TOP OF FORM

Set top of form position as follows: STEP 1. STEP 2. Place printer OFFLINE and open the upper case. Set Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever to 3PEN ( forward).
STEP 3. Rotate Paper Feed Knob (right side of carriage) so perforation line between first and second pages aligns with Top of Form index [nark (triangle) located in the middle of the upper right tractor. When using Quick Access Cover, position top of paper at triangle mark. STEP 4. Set Print Head Gap Adjustment Lever to position '1" (see Figure 2-30). STEP 5. Press and hold the RESET key, then press the TEAR FORM key. The paper will retract automatically to the starting position. If the page cut mode is used, printing will start from the top of the first page. Otherwise, printing will start from the top of second page.
STEP 6. Close the top cover and press the ONLINE key.
"I-
Figure 2-30. Position of Print. Head Gap Lever
PAPER TEAR OFF

TheCI-500e/CI-1000ePaper Tear-Off feature allows you to tear off a page without pressing the form feed key and wasting one or more sheets of paper. Pressing TEAR FORM key while printer is OFFLINE advances the paper, allowing it to be torn off. To enable the printer's Paper Tear-Off capability:
STEP 1 .
Press the ONLINE key to put OFFLINE.
the printer
STEP 2.
Activate Configuration mode by pressing and holding the RESET key, then pressing SET-UP key. Release both keys. Press either the FWD LN FEED or REV LN FEED key until the display shows "llO/DISABLEn. Press the FORM FEED key as required to enable the Page Cut function. To return to the ONLINE state, press SET-UP, then ONLINE.
STEP 3. STEP 4. STEP 5.
To tear off a newly printed page:

STEP 1. STEP 2.
Press the ONLINE key to put the printer OFFLINE. Press the TEAR FORM key to advance the lower perforation of the last page printed. (If the paper perforations do not engage properly with upper tractor sprocket pins, or if there are torn paper holes and paper jamming, move print head gap adjustment lever slightly toward printer rear, increasing the paper gap so that paper advances smoothly between the ribbon masks.)
STEP 3. STEP 4 .
Tear off the paper Press the ONLINE KEY. The paper will be retracted to the printing position and the printer will return online.
QUICK TEST OF PRINTER

TO TEST PRINTER FUNCTIONALITY:
STEP 1.
..-
Turn on the power. Make sure there is a ribbon installed and paper is loaded. Cover must be closed.
Put the printer OFFLINE. (Press the ONLINE key; display will show: OFFLINE.)
STEP 2 . STEP 3 . STEP 4 .
Press and hold the RESET key; press the ONLINE key to start the test. Release the keys. To stop the test, press ONLINE again.
CHAPTER 3
USING THE PRINTER
ORIENTATION This chapter provides background and instructions; for operating the CI-500e and CI-1000e. Please take the time to become familiar with the main topics. The CI-500e/CI-1000e's various operating modes allow printing, paper movement, or control panel editing of User Number attribute list values. This chapter explains the :nodes anddescribes howattribute lists allowquicksetupof printing characteristics. BASIC OPERATING CONCEPTS CI-500e and CI-1000e operating characteristics are controlled
by internally stored lists of printer attributes. The wcbrking
values for attributes can be set using the control panel; some parameters can also be set by host computer-originated escape sequences. Once values are set, a list may be used to control the printer by e n t e r i n g t h e U s e r N u m b e r i d e n t i f y i n g t h e list. Any one of the five available lists can be selected from the control panel or by the host camputer using an escape s-ence.
QUICK GUIDE TO TOPICS

b
mulation and Graphics Modes - - - - - -
page 3 - 2
Operating Modes of Control Panel - Paper Moven~ent - - - --- - - - - - - - . - - - - - User Numbers
page 3-11 page 3 - 1 3 page 3-3, also 3 - 1 5 page 3 - 17 and following
Changing Attribute Settings
CI-500eICI- 1OOOe
EMULATION MODES AND GRAPHICS MODES

EMULATION MODES
Emulations are selectable from the control panel or by escape sequences. Graphics modes are chosen through control-panel setting of Printer Attribute Field 001. The following emulation modes and graphics modes are available: CI-400/800 DLP EMULATION Emulates the CI-400/800 series printers. These graphics capabilities can be selected:
b b
b
C.ITOH GAP4 (standard feature) QMS MAGNUM emulation (option) IGP emulation (option)
P6000 SERIES P-MODE EMULATION Emulates the Printronix P6040 and P6080 printers. These graphics capabilities can be used:
b b b
C.ITOH GAP4 (standard feature) QMS MAGNUM emulation (option) IGP emulation (option)
P6000 SERIES S-MODE EMULATION Emulates the serial matrix printer capability of Printronix printers. These graphics capabilities can be used:
b
b b
C-ITOH GAP4 (standard feature) QMS MAGNUM emulation (option) IGP emulation (option)
IBM PROPRINTER II/XL EMULATION Emulates the IBM Proprinter II/XL. Chapter 5 of this manual provides details of CI-400/ 800 Data Line Printer emulation mode; Chapter 6 covers the Printronix P6000-P and P6000-S emulations; Chapter 7 describes the IBM Proprinter II/XL emulation. Graphics programming capabilities are described in separate manuals. The C.ITOH GAP4 programming language is described in a separate manual. The QMS Magnum emulation and the IGP emulation are covered in separate manuals .
CI-500e/CI~~1000e
.-
USER NUMBERS AND PRINTER ATTRIBUTE SETTIhlGS

THE PURPOSE OF USER NUMBERS
User Numbers provide fast, easy set-up for applications. This section explains User Number operation.
--
HOW USER NUMBERS SELECT CHARACTERISTICS

The CI-500e/CI-1000e has four memorizable, presettable lists of printer attributes, and one "scratch" list whose values are not retained when power is turned off. Choosincr the User Number identifying a list activates the list's characteristics. Once a list is chosen, if its values do not suiz an application, appropriate settings can be quickly selected with a few control panel keystrokes. For example, emulation choices of CI-400/800 DLP , Printronix P6000 P-mode or S-mode, or IBM Proprinter are available by selecting the appropriate menu item for Field 000 of the current list. When editing is done, selections are automatically stored for later recall.
HOW USER NUMBERS SELECT EMULATIONS

Ari emulation is selected like any other attribute by choosing it from among the choices in a field. Any list may be assigned any printer emulation by choosing the appropriate menu item of its Field 000.
An emulation is activated when a list is selected. For example, if User Number 1's list has the emulalrion mode (Field 000) set to CI-DLP, whenever User Number 1 is selected, the printer emulates the CI-400/800 printer.
Each emulation has its own basic set of attributes. The range of fields and functions under CI-400/800 DLP emulation are shown in Figure 3-1.
Selecting a User Number and then picking a particular emulation in Field 000 will copy that emulation's group of attributes to the User Number's attributes list. Once that is done, the user may select working values for the attributes. Figure 3 - 1 ' s sample printout shows the attributes given User Number 2 under CI-DLP (400/ 800) emulation. The rightmost column (labeled "menu") shows the working value for each attribute.
000: /Hgl
001: 002: 003:
00.:
t-
OM: La F m T 00J: m o mm
010: 011: 012: 011: 0. 1: OlJI 011: 017: 0: 1 . 021: Olb: 027: 0%: 031: 0. 3 :
rmr
.......................................... .......................................... ......................................... .................................
om:
on:
-0:
osz: 04,:
o*a: 0. 4 : 04s:
a*.:
047: 04(l: -7:
030:
0111 0321 osa: 034: 00: 0%:
Obi:
080: 00,: 002: ow: 0. 0 : 1 to: 1188 113: 114: 1331 117: 110: 120: 121: 122: H rmcz ~ I = I : I : R a m f l U T LW( = 127: LCD WRDI l J Q L PRINT D I m T I P 1NTERU lR 'L 1: 0 . 141: 1*2: P T L C I N I-rlhe O-llm 143: S5LEcr n 1 e . U AT mLIN I. P T A <LTPI 1I"Irn .: I , u z d Tl"I).0 *: 1%: 4 K P U S C WIDTH r L S l P P C LT FE U 1 1: . 7 1: . 8 r-1 0 1 0 1 9 LT 5nIH 1: 1 . 1%: 1511 :=a8 VTDI PI S I ~ I U C I 1.0: DWO M I L 1611 P T A 1 1 1 L v m T H 162: nurw mrrr 163: T W BITS 9 ~ ~ 1*1~lrnc~ 1 9 1 :. 6 I : OVDPm M L R SIIC -
..................................... ............................... ...................................... .................................. ................................... Mn ................................... r ........................ ......................... ................................ ....................................... m r v .................................. ............................... ..........................
* FI L O I)
WEE1
167: 10.1 16T: 170: 2. 1: 2w1 *a7I 2: . 5
..................................... ................................... ........................................ .................................. ...................................... ........................................ ........................ .............................. w n c n la: I-wr m m .................................... E R R ....................................... E mm m@m .................................... nmmr:. ,n o .................... n n a v a for lala srrrc ......... m
Baa:
-1ORC n u * " F a r DIsaeu 1-19 L I N OrrLIlY
a? ,-
CIlULCtD
EWRC P I LINL VbOO 6 S .IT
MM 1 .IT
PTL
I M I l W f 2% RWUI 7
m O m r
-1m
-4-
ET
m%*r DI~CTIP
m s v r c t m INIEIWTID.Y W
O*C. Y W E V CP.YWD r r m l l ~ DDDE ~c
...................... .................................. m e z m m .................. ................................... m

acnI
9ZT
u.1-
MI 4 Ln -11
S I W L
BIDIR~T. W - L
pi .*
Figure 3-1. Printout of Attribute Settings for User Number 2 With CI-400/800 DLP Emulation Selected
CI-500e/cI-~1oooe
Figure 3-2 illustrates attribute list usage:
STEP 1.
U s e r S e l e c t s U s e r Number 1 V i a C o n t r o l Palael and P i c k s an -lation Mode...
USER NUMBER 1 ATTRIBUTES LIST 000: xxxxxxxx 001: xxxxxxxx

STEP 2 .
USER selects Emulation Mode
USER NUMBER 1 ATTRIBUTES LIST
U s e r S e l e c t s mode to be u8e.d for G r a p h i c s...
USER selects
001: xxxxxxxx
001: CI-GAP4
STEP 3 .
P r i n t e r R e a d s f r o m Memory a L i s t of P r i n t e r A t t r i b u t e s for S e l e c t e d E m u l a t i o n . .
1 000
EMULATION MODE
002: SETTING MEMORY

003: DP FONT
and so on Figure 3-2. How User Numbers are Assigned Emulatioins and Lists of Printer Attributes
(continued)
STEP 4. Next, User Selects Attribute and Exits from CONFIGURATION mode...
Values
CI-DLP
---
CI -GAP4
ENABLE
XXXXXXXXX
and so on
Once all changes have been made, values are stored upon exit from FIELD mode. From here on, selecting the User Number activates the chosen emulation and its characteristics.
STEP 5. Now, Selecting a User Number Activates Its List of Printer Attributes:
If User selects U/N 1
If User selects U/N 2
I
USER NUMBER 1 LIST
4
USER NUMBER 2 LIST
and so on
and so on
Figure 3-2. (Continued from previous page).
WORKING WITH USER NUMBERS

SELECTION VIA SETUPICONFIGURATION, NUMBER MODE
Upon power-up, the User Number employed is the last selected. To select a different one, first activate the control panel's SET-UP mode or CONFIGURPdION mode. The printer then enters NUMBER mode where it waits for a User Number to be entered. (Instructions page 3-15.)
WORKING VALUE ACCESS THROUGH FIELD MODE
Once a User Number is selected, the FIELD mode allows reading/changing the working values on the attributes list. (Procedures: page 3-17 and following.) Some attributes are protected and can only be reached by starting from the CONFIGURP.TION MODE. (See page 3-23.)
WORKING VALUE MEMORIZATION
The working values for attributes under User Numbers 0 through 3 are kept in non-volatile meniory. They are available for use immediately on printer power-up. However, values on User Number 4's list are retained only while printer power is on; they are lost when power is shut off.
USER NUMBER BAR GRAPH
The bar graph in the display's right edge shows the current User Number. User Number 0 selection is shown by no bars present; one bar is User Number 1, two is 2, and so on. In NUMBER mode, the display also shows the message: USER NUMBER followed 5y a digit showing the User Number.
EFFECT O F ESCAPE SEQUENCES ON ATTRIBUTES
Some escape sequences can set values for attribute fields. For these items, the working value of that characteristic on the current User Number list temporarily changes to match the value set by the sequence. The new value then can be read at the control panel. Whether this value is saved in nonvolatile memory depends on the Printer Attribut-e Field 002 of the current User Number.
CONFIGURING THE PRINTER

On installation, communications parameter values appropriate for the type of host and interface used should be entered in appropriate fields. All data communication attributes are ~rotected fields accessible only via CONFIGURATION mode. See page 3-23 for information on using this mode. For example, if a serial (RS-232C) interface is installed, CONFIGURATION mode should be used to set serial communications parameters such as data rate, protocol and so on. Configuration upon installation is generally done by the system operator or manager; once set and tested, communications parameter values should not need frequent alteration. Other attributes such as C P I , Line Spacing, and so on, are subject to frequent alteration by users. They are generally set as required during normal operation by users. Instructions for setting printer attributes appear later in this chapter. Chapter 4 lists and describes the attributes and the available working values for the emulation modes. In the lists, asterisks mark factory default selections for values of attributes.
CI-SOOe/CI-1OOOe
INTRODUCTION TO THE CONTROL PANEL

The control panel provides manual printer control and allows selections of working values for printer attributes. This section describes its parts and genltral functions.
All manual printer control is done using the control panel. These actions can be performed: Selecting the operating mode Moving the paper Entering User Numbers Examining and changing working values for pri:?ter attributes on User Number lists
THE PARTS OF THE CONTROL PANEL

Figure 3-3 shows the control panel's three main Eeatures: 1) Indicator Lights, 2) a Display Window, a t 3) ni the Control Keys.
POWER 0
ON LINE
ALARM 0
PRINT
RELO A
I
I
SET-UP 0
0E l 0
ONLINE LN FEED SET-UP
SAVE
LN FEED
FIELD
FORM
MENU
Figure 3-3. The CI-500e/CI-1000eControl Panel
INDICATOR LIGHTS SHOW STATUS AND OPERATING MODE

The four indicators (small black rectangles in Figure 3-3) show the printer's operating state as follows:
INDICATOR CONDITION
POWER - - - - GREEN when printer power is on. ON LINE - - GREEN: printer ONLINE (ready to print) Off : printer OFFLINE; Blinking: when buffer has data left but the printer is OFFLINE. ALARM - - - - YELLOW (steady or blinking) signals an alarm condition, such as Paper Out. SET-UP - - - YELLOW when printer is in the SET-UP mode or the CONFIGURATION mode.
DISPLAY WINDOW SHOWS STATUS AND CHOICES

The large rectangle in Figure 3-3 shows the position of the display window. This window shows:
a
Printer mode or state Alarm conditions.
a User Numbers, attributes, working values.

b
When optional RAM font module rechargeable battery runs low, display shows message: WARNING. If the printer is turned off while this message shows, any downloaded font will be lost. Keeping power on will recharge the battery (clearing the message). When the printer is out of paper, it will display the "Paper Out" message.
If the print pressed, the the "DATA IN two seconds.
buffer still data when the SET-UP key is User Number will not be alterable and BUFFER" message will be displayed for The RESET key clears buffer.
CONTROL KEYS PROVIDE MANUAL CONTROL
The seven multifunction control keys, shown in Figure 3-3, select operating modes, move paper, allow User Number entry, and select printer characteristics. Usage instructions appear in the following pages.
, -
QUICK GUIDE TO PRINTER OPERATING MODES

Rectangles in Figure 3-4 show the messages appearing in the display window identifying each operating state or mode.
ONLINE
CNLINE: Used for printing.
See pg. 3-12.
OFFLINE
OFFLINE: For manual control of paper movement, entry to SET-UP or CONFIGURATION MODE. ( pg .3- 13)
SET-UP MODE
SET-UP node (pg. 3-15] starts with these two mdes :

NUMBER mode is used to
select a User Number. (pg. 3-15)
tmessage
may vary)
FIELD mde: Used to select printer operating characteristics. ( W . 3-17)

CONFIGURATION mode: for
CONFIG MODE
system manager or operators. (pg. 3-23)
N[IMBER
mode is used to select a User Number. ( w . 3-15)
(message may vary)
(pg.
3-17 onward)
Figure 3-4. Identifying the CI-500e/CI-1000e's Operating States
ONLINE FUNCTIONS
The CI-500e/CI-1000e must be ONLINE to print (display showing:ONLINE). If any other stateormode isactive,pressing the ONLINE key once (or twice, depending on the current mode) places the printer back ONLINE.
POWER 0 ONLINE ALARM
0 0
D
b_l
Figure 3-5. Online Functions
p]
SET-UP El
I ) I )
1(
When the printer is ONLINE, only the ONLINE control panel key is normally enabled. Printer attribute Field 115 controls whether the FWD LN FEED, REV LN FEED, and FORM FEED keys are active/disabled during ON LINE state.
KEX
ONLINE FUNCTION
ONLINE
Places the printer OFFLINE.
All other keys are inactive when printer is ONLINE, except as noted above.
-"-
OFFLINE FUNCTIONS
To move paper using control panel keys, the printer must be OFFLINE. This state also provides entry to further operating modes. When printer is OFFLINE (display shows: OFFLINE), the legend printed on a key describes its action. For example, pressing FWD LN FEED key advances paper one line. The chart on page 3-14 shows the OFFLINE actions of the control panel keys. The diagram below shows OFFLINE key' functions; all other key labelling is deleted for clarity .
E E l l
SET-UP
LN FEED
Figure 3-6. Offline Functions
KEY
OFFLINE FUNCTION
ONLINE
Places the printer ONLINE (Ready for printing) and retracts the printing position i f it has been advanced to the paper tear-off position. See fields 110 and 111. Advances the paper one line. The line size depends on the menu item selected. Advances the paper to the next top of form. Clears the alarm display if the alarm condition has been corrected, and puts printer OFFLINE. Activates the SET-UP mode. See chart, Figure 3 -4. Backs the paper up one line. Note: use with caution with multipart forms . Advances the paper to allow it to be torn off if the tear form mode has been enabled (Field 110).
FWD LN FEED
FORM FEED RESET
SET-UP
REV LN FEED
TEAR FORM
----------------- KEY COMBINATIONS ================= ----------------FORWARD MICRO LINE FEED
Hold RESET down, press FWD LN FEED. Performs a micro line feed: Advances the paper one dot row. Hold RESET down, press REV LN FEED. Performs a reverse micro line feed: Backs the paper up one dot row. Align perforation with triangle on right tractor; hold RESET down, press TEAR FORM. Hold RESET down, press the SET-UP key; activates CONFIGURATION mode.
REVERSE MICRO LINE FEED

RETRACT PAPER TO TOP OF FORM POSITION
SELECT
CONFIGURATION MODE
SET TOP OF FORM Hold RESET, the press FORM FEED key.
CI-500e/cI-1oooe
,-."
SET-UP MODE AND CONFIGURATION MODE

To select a User Number, or to read/change the working value of a printer attribute, begin by selecting a mode as follows: SET-UP mode: CONFIGURATION mode :
1. Place the printer OFFLINE. 2. Press the SET-UP key.
1. Place the printer OFFLINIS. 2. Press and hold the RESET key, and press the SET-UP key.
In either case, after a moment the display will change to read: USER NUMBER .and the current User Ntunber will appear. Printer is now in the NUMBER mode.
NUMBER MODE OPERATION

The NUMBER mode is used for User Number selection. In the NUMBER mode the control keys assume new functions. They may be used to select any of three choices of action:
1. SELECT
A
USER NUMBER
Press FORM FEED to advance one User Number.

b
Press TEAR FORM to back up one User Number. If neither key is pressed before exiting the NUMBER mode to the FIELD mode, the User Number presently shown in the display .is kept.
Once the desired User Number is selected, cont.inue with option 2 or 3 given below:
2. GO BACK TO THE OFFLINE STATE
b
Press the SET-UP key to place the printer back OFFLINE.
3. GO TO THE FIELD MODE
Press either the FWD LN FEED key or the REV LN FEED key to activate the FIELD mode. (See page 3 17)
ALARM 0
FIELD
MENU A
SAVE
FIELO V
MENU V
Figure 3-7. Number Mode In the NUMBER mode, the display shows message: USER NUMBER and the current User Number. In this mode, all keys are active; their functions are explained below.
KEY ONLINE
NUMBER MODE FUNCTION
Prints the list of unprotected attribute values and then puts the printer OFFLINE. Activates FIELD mode - allows reviewing/changing working values for printer attributes. Scrolls to (selects) the next higher User Number. Selects the previously saved User Number . Exits the NUMBER mode, saves the User Number selection, and puts working values for printing. Activates the FIELD mode. Scrolls back to (selects) the next lower User Number.
FWD LN FEED
FORM FEED
RESET
SET-UP
REV LN FEED TEAR FORM
FIELD MODE
The FIELD mode provides access to the working villues of the printer attributes for the current User Nunber. This mode is reached through either the SET-UP mode or the CONFIGURATION mode. (See instructions, page 3-15.] In both cases, the same procedures are used to change attribute values. However: General users should always use the SET-UP mode t c ~ access attributes.
arotected attributes such as communications parameters, the CONFIGURATION mode must be used to access the FIELD mode. (The SET-UP mode does not provide access to protected attributes. See the descripticn of protected and unprotected attributes, page 3-23.)
SELECTING THE FIELD MODE
When system managers or operators need to change
Once in the NUMBER mode, press either the FWD LN FEED key or the REV LN FEED key to activate the FIELD mode. If this is the first time that the SET-UP or CONFIGURATION mode has been entered since the printer has been powered up, the display will change to show attribute . Field 000 (the currently selected printer emulati~n) Otherwise, the display will show the last attrisute field accessed.
If the SET-UP mode was used for entry, only

unprotected attribute fields may be examined or
changed. If the CONFIGURATION mode was used for entry, & fields (unprotected and protected) may be examined or changed. (The two kinds of fields are described later in chis chapter.)
.--
POWER 0
ONLINE
MARM
MY.O
1 1
,,, , ,,
0
p
FIELDA,
MENUA,
SAVE
FIELD l
MENU l
Figure 3-8. The Field Mode
above a below
KEY
ONLINE
In the FIELD mode, the control panel legends printed 8 describe the key's function. This is shown in the a h v e illustration.
FIELD MODE FUNCTION
(PRINT ATTRIBUTES) Prints the list of unprotected attribute values, then puts printer OFFLINE. (FIELD SCROLL FORWARD) Advances to the next field.
(MENU SCROLL, FORWARD) Selects the next menu choice for current field.
FWD W FEED
FORM PEED
REG=
(CLEAR) Resets this User Number attribute list to its last-saved working values. (SAVE) Exits the FIELD mode, saves choices, and puts the printer OFFLINE. (FIELD SCROLL BACKWARD) Backs up one field. (MENU SCROLL BACKWARD) Moves to lower number menu choice.
SET-UP
REV LN FEED
TEAR FORM
,--
TO EXAMINE AN ATTRIBUTE SETTING
Once the FIELD mode is active, scroll to the desired attribute field by pressing FWD LN FEED or REV W FEED until the field appears, showing the present working value.
TO CHANGE AN ATTRIBUTE SETTING
STEP 1.
Select the desired described above.
attribute
field, as
...
STEP 2 .
Scroll to the desired menu item by pressing FORM FEED or TEAR FORM until the menu item appears in the display window.
The last menu item which appears in the display window before the user moves to another field or exits SET-UP is used as the working value for the attribute. Exiting the FIELD mode by pressing the SET-UP key memorizes all new attribute values changed during this session. Until SET-UP is pressed, pressing the RESET key at any time clears all changes and restores the previous menu selection values.
TO LEAVE THE FIELD MODE AND EXIT SETUP MODE
.--
Pressing the SET-UP key exits the FIELD mode, saves all working values to non-volatile memory, and returns the printer to the OFFLINE state.
STORED ATTRIBUTE VALUES
.
---.
For User Numbers 0 through 3, when the SET-UP key is pressed to exit from the SET-UP mode, all working values are saved in non-volatile memory. This means that all choices are retained even if the printer power is turned off. They are available immediately on power -up simply by selecting the desired User Number.
SELF CHECK After the power is turned on, the CI-500e/CI-1000e performs a brief self-test. While doing this, the message "SELF CHECK" appears on the display. On successful completion, the message "Pass" will appear for one second. Normally, the printer will then go OFFLINE, ready to print using the characteristics of the last selected User Number. Field 150 determines whether the printer goes OFFLINE or ONLINE when it is powered up. ATTRIBUTE FIELDS AND MENU ITEMS Each attribute is represented by a field. For example, there is a Character Pitch field for the character width attribute. The choices for working values for a field are called the For Character Pitch, the menu items are 10 CPI, 11.67 CPI, 12.08 CPI, and so on.
u.
The display shows one field and menu item at a time. Figure 3-9 presents a sample FIELD mode display; entered through the CONFIGURATION mode, it shows attribute field 012 of the CI-DLP DLP emulation with current menu item (working value) 10 CPI. USER NUMBER shown on bar graph as three bars 3-012/10 CPI
MENU ITEM: working value = 10 C P I
ATTRIBUTE FIELD: Field 012 is: Character Pitch USER NUMBER: IS 3 Figure 3-9. Display Window Fields and Menu Items Within a given emulation, all User Numbers have the same attribute types available. For example, all User Numbers have the field C b , r . r r . Pitch, but User Number 0 might have the working value of 10 CPI while User Number 1 may be set to 12 CPI, and so on. Fields and menu items available for an emulated printer are listed in Chapter 4.
EXAMPLES
This example shows how to select an attribute field. It assumes that CI-DLP emulation mode is active and that the printer is ONLINE:
STEP 1. STEP 2.
(Printer is on). Press the ONLINE key to place printer OFFLINE. Press the SET-UP key once to select the SET-UP mode. Select User Number 3 by pressing the FORM FEED key until message: User Number 3 appears in the display window. Select the Character Pitch attribute field by pressing the FWD W FEED key until the display window shows the following:
STEP 3.
STEP 4.
STEP 5.
3-012/10 CPI
I
MENU ITEM: working value = 10 CPI
ATTRIBUTE FIELD: Field 012 is: Character Pitch USER NUMBER: IS 3

STEP 6.
Select the next menu item by pressing FORM FEED once. The display will now show the next menu item: 3-013/DP
I
MENU ITEM: DP Print Quality
The choice of DP print quality will be kept as the working value once you move on to another field, o.r it can be changed. When you press the SET-UP key to exit the SET-UP mode, the choice will be saved. Here's an example using the CONFIGURATION mode to set
up some communications interface parameters. ' t assumes I
a serial interface is installed:
Again, starting from the ONLINE state:

STEP 1. STEP 2 .
Press the ONLINE key to place printer OFFLINE. Press and hold the RESET key; press SET-UP key once, placing the printer in the CONFIGURATION mode. Select User Number 1 by pressing the FORM FEED button once; the display window shows: USER NUMBER 1. Select Field 161 - DATA BIT LENGTH, by pressing the FWD LN FEED button until the display shows the following:
STEP 3 .
STEP 4 .
1-161/8 BITS
I ISTEP 5 .
MENU ITEM: 8 bits ATTRIBUTE FIELD: Field 161 is: Data Bit Length
I User Number is 1
Select menu item: 7 BITS by pressing the FORM FEED button once. The display will show:
1-161/7 BITS
I II
STEP 6 .
MENU ITEM: 7 bits ATTRIBUTE FIELD: Field 161 is: Data Bit Length User Number is 1
Finally, press SET-UP to exit the CONFIGURATION mode, and press the ONLINE, returning the printer to the ONLINE state.
5 -
CI-500elCI-1000e
-".
CONFIGURATION MODE
The CONFIGURATION mode, for use by system operat:ors, provides access to the full set of attributes (protcxted and unprotected), whereas SET-UP mode provides access only to unprotected attributes. The CONFIGURATION mode also supports maintenance and test activities with attribute fields controlling operations such as Test Print and Hex Dump.
ENTERINGIEXITING THE CONFIGURATION MODE
To activate CONFIGURATION mode from the OFFLINE state:

,-
STEP 1.
Press and hold the RESET key; press the SE,T-UP key. The display will briefly show: CONFIG MODE. Next the message USER NUMBER appears as the printer enters the NUMBER mode. A User Number may be selected, and any of its attribute values changed as described previously. Initially, Field 000 is displayed when the FIELD mode is entered via the CONFIGURATION mode. However, any other field may be selected. On complet.ion, exit by pressing SET-UP once. Finally, press ONLINE printing. to go ONLINE for
.-
STEP 2.
--
STEP 3. STEP 4.
PROTECTED AND UNPROTECTED ATTRIBUTES

.
Each User Number list of printer characteristics has two types of fields: protected attribute fields, and unprotected attribute fields.
F PROTECTED ATTRIBUTES include such items as cornmuni~:a-
tions data rate, protocols to use, and so on. These parameters are usually selected or altered only during printer installation. To protect settings from accidental changes by casual users, the fields for protected attributes can be read or changed only by entering the FIELD mode through the CONFIGURATION mode. (This path also provides access to all unprotected attribute fields.) (more)
dw.
UNPROTECTED ATTRIBUTES iriclude such often-changed items as Lines Per Inch, Characters Per Inch, Print Quality, and so on. The SET-UP mode allows access only to unprotected attributes. It is provided so that general users can make necessary changes without the risk of accidentally altering vital settings. access protection: The following chart s ~ m a r i z e s MODE ATTRIBUTE TYPE PROTECTED SET-UP CONFIGiJRATION NO ACCESS ACCESS UNPROTECTED ACCESS ACCESS
ATTRIBUTE TYPES
Under a given emulation mode, all User Numbers have available the same Lvnes of attributes. The workins valugs of those attributes may differ, of course. For example, every User Number with the CI-DLP emulation selected has attributes such as Form Length, Character Pitch, and so on. However, User Number 1 may have 10 CPI selected, while User Number 2 may have 12 CPI, and so on.
CI-5OoelCI-1oooe
OPERATING GUIDE
b
TO PRINT:
The printer must be ONLINE. (Display window rnust show: ONLINE) If it is not, press ONLINE key to place it ONLINE.
b
ALARMS AFFECT PRINPING:
An alarm, such as PAPER OUT or TOP automatically places the printer OFFLINE.
COVER,
The alarm condition will prevent the printer from going ONLINE for printing until the alarm condition is corrected. See instructions in Chapter 8 for handling alarms.
b
TO MOVE PAPER USING THE COKPROL PANEL:
1.
Press the ONLINE key See instructions for OFFLINE paper movement control actions, starting on page 3-13. Press the ONLINE key
Places printer OFFLINE. Display shows: OFFLIPE.
2.
3.
Puts printer back ONLINE for printing. Display shows: ONLINE.
TO SELECT A USER NUMBER
When the printer is first turned on, it activates the last selected User Number and its list of attributes. To select a different User Number list: (Starting from the ONLINE state)
STEP -
- - - - - - - ACTION
-------
NOTES
1.
Press the ONLINE key. Press SET-UP
Places printer OFFLINE. Display shows: OFFLINE. Activates SET-UP mode; then the printer enters the NUMBER mode. Selects a User Number from the choices 0 through 4. The display window will show User Number. Ends the NUMBER mode, places the printer OFFLINE. The display shows: OFFLINE. Places the printer ONLINE for printing. The display window shows : ONLINE.
3.
Press FORM FEED or TZAR FORM.
4.
Press SET-UP or ONLINE.
5.
Press ONLINE.
The printer will now use the characteristics of the selected User Number list.
TO CHMiOE ATTRIBUTE VAGUES
To alter printer characteristics such as Print Quality, Lines Per Inch, Character Pitch, and so on: (Starting from the ONLINE state)
STEP -
- - - - - - - ACTION -------
NOTES
1.
2.
Press ONLINE. Press SET-UP.
The display shows: OFFLINE Activates the SET-UP then mode; printer enters the NUMBER mode. For CONFIGURATION mode, press and hold the RXSET key and press the SE'r-UP key. Activates FIELD mode The Field appears in the display. See descriptions of fields in Chapter 4.
3.
Press FWD LN FEED. Use the FWD LN FEED or REV LN FEED key to select a field. Use the FORM FEED or TEAR FORM key to select the desired menu item. Press SET-UP.
4.
5.
6.
Ends the FIELD mode. The yellow SET-UP lamp goes out; the display shows: OFFLINE. Places the printer ONLINE for printing. The display window shows: ONLINE.
7.
Press ONLINE.
The printer is now ready to use the newly selected characteristics. They will be activated whenever this User Number is re-selected.
PRINTING A COPY OF ATTRIBUTE VALUES
To get a printed copy of settings of the unprotected attribute settings:

STEP - - - - - - - ACTION - - - - - - -
NOTES
1.
Press ONLINE. Press SET--UP.
The display shows: OFFLINE. Activates the SET-UP mode; the printer automatically enters the NUMBER mode. Use to select Number from the 0 through 4. The window will show User Number. a User choices display the
3.
Press the FORM FEED or TEAR FORM key.
4.
5.
Press FWD LN FEED. Press ONLINE key.
Activates the FIELD mode. Causes the printer to list the settings, then enter the OFFLINE state.
To get a printed copy of all (protected and unprotected) attribute values: follow the previous procedure but in step 2, select the CONFIGURATION mode instead of the SET-UP mode, by pressing and holding the RESET key and then pressing SET-UP. A sample printout is shown in Figure 3-1, page 3-4. THE EXECUTE MESSAGE When the User Number, Emulation Mode (Field O O O ) , or Graphic Mode (Field 001) is changed, the printer displays the EXECUTE message for a few seconds. During this time, the following operations are performed:
1. The printer advances the paper to the top of fonn position, if it is not already there.
2. All field settings which have been changed by control codes will be reset to the values stored in nonvolatile memory.
3. Any characters downloaded in the IBM emulation mode are cleared if a graphic mode (CI-GAP4, QMS, or IGP) has been enabled, either directly (via Field 001) or indirectly (by selecting an emulation mode or User Number which has a graphic mode enabled).
CI-500e/c1I-1oooe
THE PRINTER ATTRIBUTE GROUPS

Each emulation has its own group of attribute filelds. This section lists numeric ranges for the groups;. An emulation's fields are displayable only when the emulation is selected in Field 000. Similarly, graphics emulation fields appear only if the graphic emulation is selected in Field 001. (option) In addition, protected fields will not appear unless CONFIGURATION mode was used to enter FIELD mode,
FIELDNUMBER
CATEGORY
EMULATION MODE: Selects the emulation (CI-400/800 DLP, IBM Proprinter I L/XL, Printronix P6000-P, or P6000-S) . 001 to 099 EMULATION-DEPENDENT FIELDS: The field settings available vary according to the selected emulation. UNIVERSAL FIELDS: Group of printer attributes that are active regardless of which emulation is selected: CI-GAP4 EMULATION SETTINGS QMS/PRINTRONIX IGP EMULATION SETTINGS Reserved
100 to 199
200 to 299 300 to 399 400 to 499
RIBBON USAGE
When the printer goes to off-line mode, LCD on the control panel displays the total number of ribbon passes (reversals) for 3 seconds.
AUTO-SELECT INTERFACE FUNCTION

The Auto-Select interface function (~ield140) operates automatically when the printer is powered on. The first interface to receive data is the active interface. When data is stopped for 10 seconds the active interface is reselected after continuation of data.
AUTO PRINTHEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT

When the gap adjustment lever is set between 1 through 3, the hammer impact force is reduced. When set between 4 through 10, the impact force is increased.
CHAPTER 4 PRINTER ATTRIBUTES

This chapter lists and describes printer attributes alterable through the control panel. Chapter 3 explains control panel use.
HOW TO SELECT AN EMULATION MODE

A printer emulation is selected by changing the setting of printer attribute Field 000. The choices are:
CI-400/800 printer (Data Line Printer, or DLP) mode Printronix P6000 series - P mode Printronix P6000 series - Serial emulation mode IBM Proprinter Once the appropriate menu item of field 000 has been set, theCI-SOOeandCI-1000econtrol panel displays only attributes relevant to the selected emulation mode. Thus, once you've selectedthe JBMProprinteremulation,for example, UserNumber 1, only Proprinter-specific fields will appear. (Many fields cover characteristics present in all emulations, and those fields always appear.) A newly selected emulation becomes active upon return to the ONLINE state from the Field mode. Additionally, when different User Numbers have different emulations assigned, the emulation chosen for a User Number becomes active when that User Number is selected. Example: if User Number 1's Field 000 has the CI-DLP emulation selected, and User Number 2 has the Printronix P6000 P-mode emulation selected,when User 1 is active, the CI-500e/CI-1000e emulates the CI-400/800 printer. Selecting User Number 2 invokes the P6000-P emulation. In addition, the printer displays only the attributes permitted under the currently active access protection mode (either the Set-Up mode, Configuration mode, or Maintenance mode). This protects items that are critical to proper operation, such as communications parameters, from being accidently changed. See the Configuration Mode operation section in Chapter 3 for more information.
FORMAT FOR DESCRIPTIONS

The format for the attributes descriptions j s as . follows: FIELD NUMBER
-
l2JxaUG
ATTRIBUTE FUNCTION PROTECTION TYPE NOTES
DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
FIELD NUMBER
ITEM DESCRIPTION
A
three-digit number appearing in the display window. Identifies field.
FIELD NAME ATTRIBUTE FUNCTION PROTECTION TYPE
The name of the attribute field. The purpose of the field. protected (readable/changeable only through the CONFIGURP,TION mode) or unprotected (acces:;ible through the SET-UP or C0NFI:GURA TION mode 1 .
- Tells whether the attribute is
, .
NOTES
- Comments.
MENU IT:
,-.
DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
What the display shows for this item. An asterisk ( * ) next to a menu item denotes a default value: the choice initially supplied by the factory as the stored setting in User Number memory. (These selections are subject to being overridde:~by subsequent user choices.) Description or value of menu item.
CI-500eICI-1000e
SET-UP AND CONFIGURATION MODE FUNCTIONS

000 - EMULATION MODE
FUNCTION: Selects the type of printer emulated. PROTECTION TYPE: PISPLAY SHOWS:
Unprotected
DESCRIPTION
C.ITOH CI-400/800 emulation IBM Proprinter II/XL Printronix P6000 P Series Printronix P6000 S Series
000/CI-DLP 000/IBM PRO OOO/P6000-P OOO/P6000-S 000/AUTO

. "
Selects emulation based analysis of input data.
on
In AUTO mode, if printer cannot detect characteristic commands, emulation is selected in the following order. CI-DLP>'IBM PRO>P6000-P>P6000-S When paper is not at Top of Form position, the printer feeds the paper to Top of Form, then starts printing after 10 seconds.
001 - GRAPHIC MODE

FUNCTION: Selects the type of graphics capability available. PROTECTION TYPE:
Unprotected
NOTES: This field is not available in the IBM emulation mode.
001/DISABLE 001/CI-GAP4
No graphics. CIE GAP-4 QMS Magnum compatible graphics (option)
001/IGP
IGP compatible graphics (option)
a -
002 SETTING MEMORY CONTROL

FUNCTION: Controls access for writing to non-volatile memory (printer attribute setting storage). PROTECTION TYPE: LAY
Protected
SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
When the SET-UP key is pressed, attribute settings are saved in EEPROM (non-volatile memory) . Changes made by control codes or escape sequences are also saved. Only changes made by cor.ltro1 codes or escape sequences are saved. Only changes made via the front panel are saved; escape sequence changes are not saved.
OO2/ENABLE
002/PANEL
002/DISABLE
No changes are saved. No changes are made or saved via the front panel. To unlock the front panel, select Field 002, then press and hold the RESET key and press the SETUP key. LCD panel will show ENABLE. All keys can be operated in the OFFLINE state.
003 - DP FONT
FUNCTION: Selects the font used Processing) mode printing. PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWSL
for DP
(Data
Protected
pESCRIPTIOq
* 003/IBM_DP
Use resident font for DP and NLQ mode printing [ I B M Proprinter emulation). Use resident font for DP mode printing ( C . I T O H CI-400/800 emulation). Use resident font for DP mode printing (Printronix P6000.P or P60000-S emulations).
* 003/DLP_DP
003/P6000_DP
004
- LQ FONT
Protected
FUNCTION: Selects the font used for LQ (letter quality) mode printing.
PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES: If 17.14 CPI is selected in the IBM mode, the DP font is used, regardless of this field selection.
* 003/IBM_LQ
Use resident font for LQ mode printing ( IBM Propri nter emulation). Use resident font for LQ mode (C.ITOH CI-40Cl/800 printing emulation) . Use resident font for DP mode printing (Printronix P6000-P or P60000-S emulations).
* 003/DLP_LQ
* 003/P60OO_LQ
005
- HSD FONT
PUNCTION: Selects the font used for HSD (high-speed draft) mode printing. PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOyySr
Protected
DESCRIPTION
* 005/DLP_HSD
Use resident font for HSD mode ( C . I T O H CI-400/800 printing emulation). Use resident font for HSD mode printing (Printronix P6000-P or P6000-S emulations).
* 005/P6000_HSD
006 - UPPERCASE SELECT

PUNCTION: Selects whether the printer uses all uppercase or uppercase and lowercase. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field only affects characters printed in the high speed draft mode. This field is unavailable in the IBM emulation mode.
Prints upper- and lowercase characters in high speed draft mode. Only uppercase characters are printed in high speed draft mode.
010
- FORM LENGTH
Unprotected
FUNCTION: Sets the form length in units of lines. PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES: The form length is expressed as the number of
lines per page, ranging from 1 to 198 lines. In the IBM, P6000-P, and P6000-S emulation modes, the form length is set using the current line pitch setting (Field 011). For example, to set an 11" fiorm, set this field to 66 (form length = 1 1 " x 6 lines/inch = 66 lines). If Field 011 is then used to change the line pitch (LPI), the physical form length does not change.
-
In the CI-DLP emulation mode, the line size used by the form length depends upon the Field 056 selection. The default selection for this field (6 L P I ) causes the form length to be set using 1/6" line:; - regardless of the Field 011 selection. Refer to the Field 056 description for more information.
010/001 LINES
*
Form length = 1 line.

. . a
010/066 LINES 010/198 LINES
Form length = 66 lines.
...
Form length = 198 lines.
.. .
011
- LINE SPACING
Unprotected
FUNCTION: Sets the number of lines printed per vertical inch. PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES: If n/216" line spacing is selected in the IBM
emulation mode, the display will indicate "Oll/nnn/216" (where nnn = the current spacing).
SHOW
DESCRIPTION
3 4 6 8
011/ 011/ * 011/ 011/
3 LPI 4 LPI
lines per inch ( L P I )

LPI LPI LPI
6 LPI 8 LPI
012 - CHARACTER PITCH

FUNCTION: Sets the Character Pitch (CPI): the number of characters printed per inch. PROTECTION TYPE:
Unprotected
NOTES: In the IBM emulation mode, 17.14 CPI characters are printed using the DP print quality or font, regardless. of the Field 013 or Field 004 settings.
-
ITEHS FOR THE CI-DLP MODE DISPLAY SHOWS: - D
* 012/10 CPI
012/11.67 CPI 012/12.08 CPI 012/13.33 CPI 012/15 CPI 012/16.67 CPI
10 CPI (136 columns max.) 11.67 CPI (158 columns max.) 12.08 CPI (164 columns max.) 13.33 CPI (181 columns max.) 15 CPI (204 columns max.) 16.67 CPI (226 columns .max.)
MENU ITEMS FOR THE P6000-P/S MODES
012/10 CPI 012/12 CPI 012/13.33 CPI 012/15 CPI 012/17.14 CPI
10 CPI (136 columns max. 12 CPI ( 163 columns max. ) 13.33 CPI (180 columns max.) 15 CPI (204 columns max.) 17.14 CPI (233 columns max. 1
MENU ITEMS FOR IBM MODE
DISPLAY SHOWS;
DESCRIPTION
* 012/10 CPI
012/12 CPI 012/15 CPI 012/17.14 CPI 012/PROP
10 CPI (136 columns max. 1 12 CPI (163 columns max. 1 15 CPI (204 columns max. 1 17.14 CPI (233 columns max. Uses proportional spacing.
013
,. -
- PRINT QUALITY
Unprotected
FUNCTION: Selects the print density (print quality). PROTECTION TYPE:
MENU ITEMS FOR TH6 CI-DLP AND P6000-P/S MODES

DESCRIPTIQN
013/DP 013/LQ 013/HSD
Data Processing (Draft) mode. Letter Quality mode. High Speed Draft mode (the CI-1000e prints up to 940 lines per minute; the CI500e prints up to 540 lines per minute.)
.-
013/DP 013/NLQ 013/LQ
Data Processing (Draft) mode. Near Letter Quality mode. Letter Quality mode.
014 - CHARACTER SET

FUNCTION: printing.
Selects
the character Unprotected
set
used
for
PROTECTION TYPE:
MENU ITEMS FOR THE CI-DLP AND P6000-P/S MODES DISPLAY SHOWS L DESCRIPTION
014/US ASCII 014/JAPAN 014/U.K. 014/FRANCE 014/GERMANY 014/SWEDEN 014/NORWAY 014/ DENMARK 014/NETHERLND O14/ITALY 014/SPAIN OlI/FINLAND 014/FRNCH CAN
MENU
Selects standard US ASCII set. Japanese national set. British (U.K.) national set. French national set. German national set. Swedish national set. Norwegian national set. Danish national set. Netherlands national set. Italian national set. Spanish national set. Finnish national set. French Canadian national set.
ITEMS FOR THE IBM MODE DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY SHOWS:
* 014lCG SET 1
014/CG SET 2
IBM Character Set 1 IBM Character Set 2
~-.*
015 - FONT FOR ZERO

FUNCTION:
Selects font used for digit 0 and the Unprotected
letter 0.
PROTECTION TYPE:
MENU
ITEMS FOR THE CI-DLP AND P6000-P/S MODES

DgSCRIPTTON
DISPLAY SHOWS:
* 015/NO SLASH
Zero is round, does not have slash. The letter 0 is rectangular. Zero is rectangular. Letter 0 is round. Zero has round and has slash. Letter 0 is round.
015/RECTANG OlS/SLASH ZER
* 015/NO SLASH
MENU IT=
WmiS
Zero is round, does not h13ve slash. Zero is round, has slash.
OlS/SLASH ZER
016 - PRINT WIDTH FUNCTION: Selects print width in terms of columns. PROTECTION TYPE:
---
Unprotected
-
MENU ITEMS FOR TH6 CI-DLP MODE

DISPLAY SHOWS L
*
DESCRZPTION
016/136 COL 016/132 COL 016/80 COL
13.6 inches if 10 CPI used. 13.2 inches if 10 CPI used. 8 inches if 10 CPI used.
MENU ITEMS FOR P6000-P/S MODES
DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTIOH
* 016/136 COL 016/132 COL 016/80 COL
13.6 inches 13.2 inches 8 inches

DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
* 016/136 COL
016/80 COL
13.6 inches 8.0 inches
NOTES: In the IBM and P6000-P/S emulation modes, the column width used when setting the print width is 1/10" (corresponding to a 10 CPI character pitch). The maximum physical printing width in inches equals the Print Width Value in columns divided by the Character Pitch setting value:
Max physical width (inches) =
Print- Width- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (columns) 10 CPI
In the CI-DLP emulation mode, the column width used to set the print width is either 1/10" or the current character pitch, depending upon the Field 017 selection. If Field 017 is set to COLUMN (the default), the maximum physical printing width is calculated as follows:
Max physical width (inches) =
Print .Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (columns) Current character pitch
017 - COMPRESSED PRINT WIDTH
FUNCTION: Determines whether or not the print width setting depends upon the current character pitch setting.
PROTECTION TYPE:
Unprotected
NOTES: This field appears only in the CI-DLP emulation mode. The IBM and P6000-P/S emulation modes are not affected by this field setting.
DESCRIPTION
* 017/COLUMN
The print width is calculzted using the current character pitch setting. The print width setting is calculated using 1/10" columns
017/POSITION
For example, if this field is set to COLUMN, the print width has been set to 136 columns, and the character pitch is 16.67 CPI, the physical printping width will be calculated as follows:
136 columns Max physical width (in.) = - - - - - - - - - - - = 8.16 in. 16.67 CPI
If this field is set to POSITION and the print width has been set to 136 columns, the physical printing width would always be 13.6 inches, regardless of the character pitch setting.
018 - GRAPHICS FONTJCODE PAGE

FUNCTION: In the CT-DLP mode, this field selects whether the line drawing or block characters reside in character set table columns 14 and 15. In the IBM mode, this field selects between the various TBM Code Page character sets. PROTECTION TYPE:
Unprotected
NOTES: This field is valid for the CT-DLF and IBM
Proprinter emulation modes only. Code Page 990 is not a standard IBM character set. Selecting Code 990 will select the IBM Character Set 1' or Character Set 2', depending upon whether Field 014 is set to Set 1 or Set 2.
MENU ITEMS FOR THE CI-DLP MODE
DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
* 018/LINE DRAW
018/BLOCK
Selects line drawing characters. Selects block characters.

MENU ITEMS FOR W IBM MODE
DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
* 018/CODE 437 018/CODE 850 018/CODE 860 018/CODE 863 018/CODE 865 018/CODE 990
U.S.A. Multilingual Portugal Canada- French Norway C.ITOH Special (Set 1'/2')
*-.
019 - WRAPAROUND
FUNCTION: Selects processing of characters at the right margin.

PR(3TECTIONTYPE:
Unprotected
NOTES:
If set to T R U N C A T E , the printer ignores characters received when the print position is at. the right margin. When set to WRAP, after the print head reaches the right margin, the print position moves to the left margin on the next line. This field setting is ignored in the CI-DLP emulation mode: data received after the right margin is always ignored.
019/TRUNCATE
Data received after the right margin has been reached is ignored.
If data is received after the right margin has been reached, the print position moves to the left margin on the next line. (Performs a CR and LF when the right margin is reached.)
021 - SKIP PERFORATION

FUNCTION: Determines whether to print on a continuous basis with no allowance made for the perforation line, or to skip the selected distance past. the perforation line before resuming printing. PROTECTION TYPE:
Unprotected
MENU ITEMS FOR THE CI-DLP AND IBM MODES

DISPLAY SHOWS: DESCRIPTION
* 021/NONE 021/1/4 INCH 021/1/3 INCH 021/1/2 INCH 021/2/3 INCH 021/3/4 INCH 021/1 INCH 021/2 INCHES
Disable perforation skip. Skip 1/4 inch Skip 1/3 inch Skip 1/2 inch Skip 2/3 inch Skip 3/4 inch Skip 1 inch Skip 2 inches
MENU ITEMS FOR THE P6000-P/S MODES
DISPLAY SHOWS t
DESCRIPTION
* 021IDISABLE
021/1 INCH 021/1/2 INCH 021/2/3 INCH 021/5/6 INCH
025 - AUTO CR ON LF
Disable perforation skip. Skip 1 inch Skip 1/2 inch Skip 2/3 inch Skip 5/6 inch
FUNCTION: Selects whether the printer automatically follows each carriage return with a line feed. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field works only in the P6000-S and IBM emulation modes. DISPLAY S H W h
DESCRIPTION
On LF code, performs LF then CR On LF code, performs LF only.
* 025/LF + CR
025/LF ONLY
, -
026
- PRINT START
FUNCTION: Selects the print start method. The two methods are: (11 print start by control code, and (2) print start by control code or on buffer-full f condition. If method 2 is selected, either oi two alternate buffer-limit conditions may be employed: (a1 print start if buffer.full, or (b) print start if (buffer full + one byte). Print start control codes include the CR, LF, FF, and VT codes. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
Protected in the CI-DLP
This field appears only emulation mode.

32waEuw
pISPLAY SHOWS ;
Serial/Centronics interfaces: Print start on either control code or buffer-full condition. Dataproducts interface: Print start on control code only. 026/CTL CODE 026/BUF FULL 026/BUFFER+l Print start on control code only. Print start only on buffer-full. Print start only on buffer-full plus one byte.
027 - VFU SELECTION
FUNCTION: Selects the method of electronic format control (Vertical Format Unit) used by the printer. Vertical Format Unit settings control the top margin, bottom margin, vertical tab stops, and form length. VFU, DAVFU, and EVFU controls are discussed in Chapters 5 and 6. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field does not appear in the IBM or P6000-S emulation modes.
MENU ITEMS FOR THE CI-DLP MODE

DISPLAY SHOWS r
DEscRIpTI0N
027/2 CHN VFU 027/12 CHNL 027/DPC B300 027/ PRINTRONX
2-channel VFU used. 12-channel DAVFU. Dataproducts B-300 12-channel DAVFU
Printronix 14--channel EVFU.

MENU ITEMS FOR P6000-P MODE
DISPLAY SHOWS r
DESCRIPTION Disable format coritrol 12-channel DAVFU 14-channel EVFU
027/DISABLE 027/DAVFU 027/EVFU
028 - BOTTOM OF FORM CONTROL

FUNCTION: Enables the Bottom of Form DAVFU/VFU vertical tab/forms setting. If 12-channel DAVI?U is used, this field selects which channel is used for the Bottom of Form (BOF) setting. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected in the C:[-DLP
NOTES; This field appears only emu1ation mode.

DESCRIPTION
* 028/NO BOF
Disables the BOF setting Use the last channel (11 DAVFU, 12 for B-300 DAVFU) the BOF setting. If 2-channel is used, this item enables BOF setting. for for VFU the
028/CHAN. 11
028/FNL LINE
Enables the BOF setting fox VFU, DAVFU setting. The BOF is sat if (1) a line has both channels 0 and 1 set, (2) there are no vertical tab settings after that line, and ( 3 ) no other channels have vertical tab settings on that line. The B-300 DAVFU uses channels 1 and 2 for this purpose.
031-OFFLINE CHANGEOVER WHILE RECEIVING DATA

E'UNCTION: Selects whether data in the receive buffer
is printed out or not when the printer is taken offline. The exact function performed depends upon whether the data is terminated (followed by a CR, LF, VT or FF code) or unterminated.
PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
Protected
This field appears only in the CI--DLParid P6000-P/S emulation modes.
031/PRINT/BUF
Any data in the buffer will be printed out, the printer will go offline, and all front panel functions will be made available. If data is received after the printer goes offline, the data will be stored in the buffer and the Set-Up/Configuration modes will be disabled. Data remains in the receive buffer, the ONLINE front panel LED blinks, and the Set-Up/Configuration modes are disabled. To clear the buffer and enable the Set-Up/Configuration modes, press the RESET key for more than 10 seconds.
034 - ROW FEED PITCH FOR LQ PLOT MODE

FUNCTION: Selects the amount of paper feed for LQ plot mode. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:

PLAY S
IEcIT0 lsRpIN
* 034/1/144 IN.
034/1/288 IN.
Feed 1/144" for each dot row. Feed 1/288" for each dot row.
035
- CHANGE TOF BY FORM LENGTH

FUNCTION:
Determines whether or not the set form length escape sequence also sets the top of form.
* 035/KEEP TOF
Keep the current top of form position if set form length escape sequence is received. If the set form length escape sequence is received, the tap of form is set at the current position.
035/CHANGE
040
- RESPONSE TO ESC SEQUENCE

Protected
FUNCTION:
Determines how the printer responds to escape sequences.
PROTErnION TYPE: NOTES:
in the CI-DLP
* 040/ALL ESC
040/NO FIELD
Responds to all escape sequences. Responds to all sequences but those affecting field/menu settings. Disables all escape sequences.
040/DISABLE
041 - CODE SYSTEM

FUNCTION: Selects which code systems are recognized by the printer. The choices include the C. ITOH standard code system, or the Printronix code system plus either the C.ITOH standard escape sequences or SOH codes. Refer to Chapter 5 for more information. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
Protected in the CI--DL,P

DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY SHOWS:
* 041/CI STD 041/P+CI ESC 041/P+CI SOH
C.IlO standard. ''H Printronix plus C.ITOH standard ESC . Printronix plus C.ITOH standard SOH.
042 - ENABLE GRAPHICS FONT CODES

FUNCTION: Af fects the action taken when characters in
columns 14 and 15 (hexadecimal EO to FF) are received. If ENABLE is selected (default case), the characters printed depend on whether Field 018 (Graphics Font) is set for line drawing or block characters. When DISABLE is selected, a received data code in the range hex EO to FF is treated as an undefined character code. (The response is then affected by the setting for Field 044.)

* 042/ENABLE
Characters EO to FF cause a graphics font character to be printed. Characters EO-FF are undefined
042/DISABLE
-...
043
- UNDEFINED CONTROL CODE HANDLING

Protected
FUNCTIONI Selects whether the printer ignores an undefined control code or substitutes a space for it. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
This field appears only in the CI-DLP emulation mode.

LAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
* 043/IGNORE
Do nothing in response to an undefined code. Print a space in response to an undefined code.
044
- UNDEFINED CHARACTER CODE HANDLING
FUNCTION:
Selects whether the printer ignores an undefined character code or substitutes a space for it. Protected in the C I - D L P

DESCRIPTION
Print a space in response to an undefined code.

044IIGNORE
Do nothing in response to an undefined code.
045 - CR CODE HANDLING

FUNCTION: Determines the response to a CR code PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
MENU ITEMS FOR TM: CI-DLP MODE
PISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
* 045/PRINT+LF
Prints the current line and then performs a line feed. If no data is in buffer, only a line feed is performed. Prints the current line and then performs a line feed. If no data is in the buffer, the CR code is ignored.
045/ IGNORE 045/LF
CR codes are ignored. Prints the current line and then performs a line feed. If no data is in buffer, only a line feed is performed. Used for underlining. Prints the current line and then performs a line feed. The first paper feeding code (such as an LF code) received after a CR is ignored.
FOR THE IBM AND P6000-P/S MODES DESCRIPTION
045/UNDERLINE 045/CR IGNORE
ME~J IT-
DISPLAY
SHOPIS;
045/CR ONLY
The CR code causes the current line to be printed; no line feed is performed. Prints the current line and then performs a line feed.
045/CR+LF
,, -
046
- DEL CODE HANDLING

Protected
FUNCTION: Determines how the DEL (7F hexadecimal) code is treated. PROTgCTION m P E :
.-..
NOTES: This field appears only emulation mode.
in the CI-DLP
046/PRINT 046/IGNORE 046/SPACE 046/1-CHARAC.
Print the delete character The DEL code is ignored. Print a space when a delete code is received. Deletes the previous character (performs the same function as the BS code). If the BS code is disabled via Field 054, the printer will ignore the delete code. Deletes the current line.
046/1-LINE
047 - DCllDC3 CODE HANDLING FUNCTION: Determines the response to the DCllDC3 (XON/XOFF) codes. PROTECTION TYPE:
*-
*,-
* 047/ENABLED
C1 and DC3 cause ONLINE/OFFLINE response.

C1
047/DISABLED
*-
and DC3 are undefined (see Field 043).
048 - DATA BITS

FUNCTION: Disables/enables characters which reside in the 8-bit (codes 80 to FF hexadecimal) section of the
code table and determines how these codes are accessed. These characters are shown in Appendix A.
PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field is valid only when the Centronics
or Dataproducts interfaces are used. This field appears only in the CI-DLP and P6000-P/S emulation modes.
PISPLAY SHOWS: PESCRIPTION
* 048/8 BITS
8-bit character codes can be used to access characters in the range of 80 to FF hexadecimal. Ignore the eighth bit. Use 7-bit codes with the SI/SO control codes to access characters 80 to FF . Ignore the eighth bit; characters 80 to FF are inaccessible.
048/7+SI/SO
048/7 BITS
-
049 - CAN CODE HANDLING

FUNCTION: Selects the printer's response to the CAN code. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:

DEscRIpTIOw
BISPIAY SHOWS r
* 049/CAN ENABL
049/CAN DISAB
CAN code deletes current line. CAN code is undefined (see Field 043).
050 - VERTICAL TAB HANDLING

FUNCTION: Selects whether the Vertical Tab
(VT)
control code is enabled or ignored.

Protected in the C1.-DLP
* 050/VT IGNORE
The VT control code is undefined (see Field 043). Performs a Vertical Tab Chapter 5) . (.see
050/VT ENABLE
051 - HORIZONTAL TAB HANDLING
Determines whether or not the HT (:ode causes the printer to perform a horizontal tab. Xlso determines whether initial tab stops are defined at power up or when the CI-DLP emulation mode is selected.
FUNCTION: PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
* 051/IGNORE
051/ENABLE 051/10 COL TA 051/8 COL TAB
The HT control code is undef:.ned (see Field 043).

HT code enabled; no initial tab stops.
HT code is enabled; tab stops are defined at every 10th column HT code is enabled; tab stops are defined at every 8th column
052
- SIISC9 CODE HANDLING
FUNCTION: Selects the function performed by the S I (hexadecimal OF) and SO (hexadecimal OE) control codes. PROTECTION TYPE:
If SI is selected, Field 048 should be set to 7+SI/SO.

LAY SHOWS :
DESCRIPTION
SO code shifts out to 8-bit character code area; SI code shifts in to 7-bit code area. SO code sets double-width printing; SI code resets doublewidth printing.
052/1 LINE
SO code sets double-width printing for one line only. After one line is printed, double-width printing is reset.
053
.-
- HANDLING OF CONTROL CODES IN COLUMNS 819
FUNCTION: Specifies how the printer responds to the control codes in code table columns 8 artd 9 (hexadecimal 80 through 9F). PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:

053/AUTOMATIC
If the Centronics or RS-.232C interface is selected, codes 809F perform the same functions as control codes 00 through 1F: if the Dataproducts interface is selected, codes 809F are undefined (see Field 043). Undefined (see Field 043) Perform the same functions as control codes 001F. Print characters EO-EF (see Field 018).
053/UNDEFINED 053/HEX 00-1F 053/HEX EO-FF
Selecting the HEX 00-1F setting has the same effect as subtracting 80 hexadecimal (128 decimal) from any code ranging from 80-9F received by the printer. For example, if HEX 00-1F is selected and the control code sent is 8A hex (138 decimal), the printer treats the code as if i t were an LF code (OA hexadecimal, 10 decimal ) . Selecting the HEX EO-FF setting has the same effect as adding 60 hexadecimal (96 decimal) to any code ranging from 80-9F received by the printer. If the Graphics Font (Field 018) is set to Block and the control code sent is 9C hexadecimal (156 decimal), a bullet character (FC hexadecimal, 252 decimal) will be printed. Appendix
A
shows the code tables.
054 - BS CODE HANDLING

FUNCTION: Determines whether the BS code performs a backspace or is treated as an undefined control code. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
BISPJAY SHOWS:
* 054/BS DISABL 054/ BS ENABLE
Protected Protected
PESCRIPTIOY
in
the C I - D L P
Treated as an undefined code. Performs a backspace.
055 - PLOT MODE EXIT PRINT POSITION

FUNCTION: Specifies whether or not the print position advances to the next text line after the plot
(graphics) mode is exited.

This field appears only in the CI-DLP and P6000-P/S emulation modes.
This field performs the same function as the "MOD PLOT SELECT" configuration parameter in the P6000 series printers.
DISPLAY SHOWS L
* 055/ADVANCE
055/NO ADV
Advances to the next print line. Resumes printing immediately after the last dot row.
If NO ADV is selected, text printed after exiting the plot mode can be superimposed on the graphic image.
056 - UNIT OF FORM

FCJNCTION:
LENGTH
Selects the line height used to calce.late the form length setting (Field 010) in the CI-DLP emulation mode. Protected in the CI-DLP
PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES:
DISPLAY SHOWS:
I2uxmxN
Form length unit = 6 LPI Form length unit = 3 LPI Form length unit = current line height (Field 011). Form length unit = 2 X current line height (2ILPI setting). Page length is calculated' relative to Field 11 (lines per inch). Page length is calculated relative to twice Field 11 (lines per inch)
056/6 LPI 056/3 LPI 056/LN X LPI 056/2LN X LPI 056/LN*LPI/R
056/2LN*LPI/R
For example, suppose that this field is set to 2 ; X 1N LPI, the Line Spacing is set to 8 LPI (Field Oil), and the desired form length is 11 inches. The Form Length setting (Field 010) would be calculateci as follows: Current Line Height
=
1/8" = .125"
Form Length Setting =
----------------------2
Form Length
X Current Line Height
061 - BUSY CONTROL
FUNCTION: Determines whether the BUSY line goes high for each character or for each line. PROTECTION TYPE: Protected
NOTES: This field is valid only when the Centronics parallel interface is used in the CI-DLP emulation mode. DISPLAY SHOWS: DESCRIPTION BUSY active for each character BUSY active for each line.
* 061/DISABLE 061/LINE BUSY

080 - SHIFT OUT RESET
F'UNCTION: Selects whether the printer remains shifted out after one line has been printed in the shift-out state. Field 052 determines the function of the Shift Out (SO) code. PROTECTION TYPE: Protected in the CI-DLP
NOTES: This field appears only emulation mode. DISPLAY SHOWS: DESCRIPTION
* 080/HOLD SO
OBO/RESET SO
Remain in the shift-out state. Reset the shift-out state after one line has been printed (shift in).
-,
081 - 8 LPI RESET
FUNCTION: Selects whether the printer will remain in the 8 LPI mode after one line has been printed. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
This setting aEects only line pitch settings made by escape sequence. Line pitch settings selected via the control panel are not affected.
SHOWS ;
DESCRIPTION
* 081/HLD 8 LPT
O81/RST 8 LPI
Remain in the 8 LPI mode. Reset to the 6 LPI mode after one line is printed.
082 - HORIZONTAL ENLARGEMENT RESET

Determines whether or not the printer resets the horizontal enlargement after one line has been printed.
Protected in the C1'-DLP
DISPLAY SHOWS:
QEsuuma
Remain in the enlargement mode. horizontal
* 082/HLD HORIZ
082/RST HORIZ
Reset to normal -width printing after one line is printed.
083 - VERTICAL ENLARGEMENT RESET
Determines whether or not the printer remains in the vertical enlargement mode after printing one line.
FUNCTION: PROTECTION TYPE :
Protected appears only in the

CI-DLP
NOTES:
This field emulation mode.
DISPLAY SHOWS:
DESCRIPTION
* 083/HLD VERT.
Hold the vertical enlargement mode. Reset to normal-height printing after printing one line.
083/RST VERT.
084
- PLOT MODE RESET
Specifies whether the printer remains in the plot (graphics) mode or returns to the text print mode after one line is printed.
PISPLAY SHOWS L
DESCRIPTION
Remain in graphics mode. Reset to text mode after one graphics line is printed.
084/HOLD 084/RESET
"
-..
100 - HEX DUMP/DOWNLOAD

FUNCTION: Sets/resets the hex dump mode, allows font data to be loaded into an optional RAM module, and loads field settings data directly into nonvolintile memory. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: On power-up, selection is automatically set to NORMAL. When RAM module option is not installed, the "FONT LOAD" menu item will not appear.
100/NORMAL lOO/HEX DUMP 100/FONT LOAD
Setting for normal printing Print out all data as hex dump. Makes it possible to store downloaded character data into the optional RAM module. Allows Field/Menu settings to be downloaded directly from the host computer to nonvolatile memory.
100/EEPROM LD
103 - COPY FROM USER NUMBER SET-UP

FUNCTION: Copies printer attributes from specified list to the current User Number list. PROTECTION TYPE:
the
Protected
NOTES: The SET-UP key must be pressed before going to another field or the setting for this field will not take effect.
This field is not saved in nonvolatile memory, and does not appear on the Field/Menu printout.
PISPLAY SHOWS: JlESCRIPTION
* 103/DISABLE
103/DEFAULT 103/USER 0 103/USER 1 103/USER 2 103/USER 3 103/USER 4
Disables automatic copying of attributes. Copy factory settings to the currently selected user number. Copy User 0 attributes to the currently selected user number. Copy User 1 attributes to the currently selected user number. Copy User 2 attributes to the currently selected user number. Copy User 3 attributes to the currently selected user number. Copy User 4 attributes to the currently selected user number.
104 COPY SET-UP T O USER NUMBER

FUNCTION: Copies the printer attributes of currently
.-.
selected User Number to another User Number's list.

PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: The SET-UP key must be pressed before goin'g to
another field or the setting for this field will not take effect . This field is not saved in nonvolatile memory, and does not appear on the Field/Menu printout.
DESCRIPTION
...
* 104/DISABLE
Disable copying of attributes to another user number. Copy current set-up to User 0 Copy current set-up to User 1 Copy current set-up to User 2 Copy current set-up to User 3 Copy current set-up to User 4
104/TO USER 0 104/TO USER 1 104/M USER 2 104/M USER 3 104/TO USER 4
108 - FIELD NUMBER SELECTION

"
."
FUNCTION: Determines whether the set-up mode always
returns to the last field selected or to Field 000.

PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
DESCRIPTION
108/FIELD:000
Start scrolling from Field 000. Start scrolling from the last selected field number.
109 - SELECT MAINTENANCE MODE

FUNCTION: Selects maintenance mode. PROTECTION TYPE:
either Protected
normal
operation
or
NOTES: On power up, selection is automatically set to NORMAL. This field is for factory use only.
110 - TEAR FORM MODE

FUNCTION: Controls action of TEAR FORM key. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field is employed only with use of optional Quick Access Cover. In addition, Field 111 must be set as required. DISPLAY SHOWS: DESCRIPTION
* llO/DISABLE
1lO/ENABLE
Disable cut feed mode. TEAR FORM key feeds last printed line to tear bar on cover.
111 - T O P MARGIN ADJUSTMENT

FUNCTION: Sets the tear form margin in 1/72 inch increments. The tear form margin is the distance between the perforation line and the first print line position. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field affects cut feed operation enabled by Field 110.
DESCRIPTION
111/0/72
Tear form margin = 0" Tear form margin Tear form margin
=
* 111/12/72
111/255/72
1/6" 3 39/72'
,*-.
112 - TEAR FORM ADJUSTMENT

FUNCTION: COMPENSATION TO PAPER CUTTING P O S I T I O N PROTECTION: Protected NOTES: This field affected cut feed operation enable by Field 110.
112,'-32/72 112/0/72 112/+64/72
Tear form adjustment
-32/72"
Tear form adjustment = 0/72" Tear form adjustment

=
+64/72"
113 SHUTTLE RUN-ON DELAY

--,..
FUNCTION:
Controls the amount of time that the shuttle continues to move after printing ends. Protected
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTION TYPE:
113/1 SEC
Halt shuttle printing.
second
after
* 113/3 SEC
113/10 SEC
Halt shuttle 3 seconds after printing
~ a l tshuttle 1 0 seconds after printing .
114 - PAPER SLEW SPEED

during highest speed motion.
PROTECTION TYPE:
-.
*
--
FUNCTION: Sets the speed at which the paper is m1>ved
114/15 I P S
1 1 4 / 2 5 IPS
Protected
15 inches per second slew speed.
25 inches per second slew speed.
115 - ONLINE USE OF FFILF KEYS

FUNCTION: Determines whether the Form Feed and Line Feed keys can be used while the printer is online. PROTECTION TYPE: DISPMY SHOWS :
Protected
DESCRIPTION
11S/ENABLE
Keys usable when the printer is on1ine . Keys .disabled when the printer is on1ine . Pressing line feed key while online sets top of form.
* llS/DISABLE
115/FEED + TOP
117 - PAPER NEAR END

i?U?lCTION: Determines the response when the printer
senses the paper-near-end condition.

PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWSL
Protected
DESCRIPTION
FAULT signal sent if Paper Empty alarm occurs. 117/IGNORE
Do not send FAULT signal if Paper Empty alarm occurs.
118
- ONIOFFLINE DURING ALARM

Determines the response to an alarm Protected
FUNCTION:
condition.
PROTECTION TYPE:
* 118/OFFLINE
118 /ONLINE
The printer goes offline if an alarm occurs. The printer stays online if an alarm occurs.
120 - ALARM
DISPLAY DURATiON
F[RJCPION: Sets the amount of time each alarm is shown when multiple alarms exist.
If several alarms occur simultaneously, each alarm is displayed for the duration set by t.his field.
PISPLAY
SHOWS:
120/1 SEC
* 120/2 SEC
120/4 SEC
121
Protected
Protected
Display each alarm for I second
Display each alarm for 2 secontls. Display each alarm for 4 secontls.
- PAPER JAM ALARM
FUNCTION: Controls whether to display the Paper Jam detection alarm.
PROTEXTION TYPE:
* 121/ENABLE
12l/DISABLE
122
Show alarm if paper jams.

Do not show alarm if paper jams;.
- HEAD COIL ALARM
FUNCTION: Controls whether to show an alarm upon detection of an open wire in a print head coil or failure of the coil driver.
PROTECTION TYPE:
SHOyS;
Protected
DESCRIPTION
* 122/ENABLE
122/DISABLE
Show alarm 34 if the head coil is detected open. Do not show alarm if the head coil detected open.
123 - IMPACT FORCE

FUNCTION: Determines the amount of force with which the print head hammers strike the paper. PROTECTION TYPE:
I
Protected
NOTES: The High Impact mode produces darker printing and should be used when the Low Impact mode does not provide printing which is dark enough (for example, when printing some forms with more than 5 parts). The standard C.ITOH line printer ribbon must be used when the High Impact mode is selected. Otherwise, ribbon damage and/or jamming may occur.
The Low Impact mode puts less stress on the ribbon. It produces slightly lighter printing which may not produce dark enough printing on some forms (such as some 6-part forms .
DISPLAY SHOWS:
* 123/IMPACT IX)
Protected
DESCRIPTION
Reduces the amount of force with which the print hammers strike the page. Increases the amount of force with which the print hammers strike the page. Produces darker printing.
123/IMPACT HI
125 - RIBBON FAULT ALARM

FUNCTION: Controls whether to display the ribbon jam detection alarm. PROTECTION TYPE:
* 125/ENABLE
125/DISABLE
Show the alarm if the ribbon jams. Do not show the alarm if the ribbon jams.
-"..
126
- RIBBON USAGE
Protected
FUNCTION: Reset the Ribbon Usage Display on the LCD
panel.
PROTECTION TYPE:
126/NORMAL
When the printer goes to off-:I ine mode, LCD on the control panel displays the total number of ribbon passes (reversals) for 3 seconds. To reset the number, set Field 126 to "CHANGE". Then press RESET and SET-Up while field 126 is displayed. Field 126 will not be printed in the configuration list.
126/CHANGE
127
- LCD MESSAGE LANGUAGE

Protected
PUNCTION: Selects the language used for the front panel display.
,
...
PROTECTION TYPE :
- ..
127/US ASCII 17'.. 2,UK 127/GERMANY 127/SPAIN 127/ FRANCE
Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects
US English UK English German Spanish French
1130 - PRINT DIRECTION

FUNCTION: Selects either unidirectional printing or the faster bidirectional printing. PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWS L
Protected
DESCRIPTION
'
* 130/BIDIRECT.
130/UNIDIR. 130/PLOT-UNI.
Bidirectional printing. Unidirectional printing. Unidirectional printing for plot (graphics) mode; bidirectional printing for text.
139 - AUTO INTERFACE SELECT FUNCTION: AUTO INTERFACE SWITCH-OVER PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWS:
Protected
DESCRIPTION
* 139/AUTO ON
139/AUTO OFF
140 - INTERFACE TYPE
AUTO Interface is enable AUTO Interface is disable.
NOTE: If an optional interface is installed, this field shows the type of data communications interface module . PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY S H O W a
Protected
PEBCRIPTION
NOTES: This field affects auto interface select mode enable by Field 139.
Automaticallyselectsinterfacebased on data transmission.

NOTES: This field affects. Auto interface mode disable by Field 139.
140/CENTOR0 140/RS-232C
CENTORONICS Interface RS-232C Interface

4-46
141- RECEIVE BUFFER

FUNCTION:
Determines whether a receive buffer is Protected
available.
PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES: This field is valid only when the Centronics or Dataproductrs interfaces are used. PISPLAY SHOWS ;
DESCRIPTION
141/ENABLE ~I~/DIS&LE
142
Buffer is available. Buffer is not available.
- DATALINE INVERTING OPTION

Protected
FUNCTION:
Selects the data logic level for the Centronics parallel interface.
PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES: This field is valid only for the Centrcmnics parallel interface.
142/NORMAL 142 / INVERT

143
Data bit is high. Data bit is low.
- SELECT SIGNAL AT OFFLINE

Protected
FUNCTION: Specifies whether the ONLINE but ton toggles
the Centronics SELECT signal.

PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES: This field is valid for the parallel interface on1y .
* 143/SELECT
SELECT signal goes low when the ONLINE button is used to take the printer offline. Pressing the ONLINE button (does not affect the status of the SELECT signal.
143/KEEP-HIGH
144-DATA LATCH TIMING

FUNCTION: Determines how long the printer waits before reading data after the STROBE signal goes low. PROTECTION TYPE:
NOTES:
Protected
This field is valid only when the Centronics interface is used.

DESCRIPTION
PISPLAY SHOWS:
* 144/DELAY
144/NO DELAY 145 - ACK TIMING
Wait 250 nanoseconds reading data.
before
Do not wait before reading data.
FUNCTION: Controls the time-positioning of the BUSY and ACK lines from printer. See Appendix C for diagram. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
interface is used.
DESCRIPTION
* 145/MIDDLE
BUSY output goes low during ACK pulse output. ACK pulse sent after BUSY goes low.
145/BEFORE
ACK pulse before BUSY goes low.
146 - A C K
PULSE WIDTH
FUNCTION: Selects the ACK pulse width. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: This field is valid only when the Centrcnics
interface is used.
* 146/ACK 4 US
ACK pulse width is 4 microseco.nds. ACK pulse width is 8 microseco:nds.
146/ACK 8 US
147 - FAULT SIGNAL CONTROL FUNCTION: Determines whether to send the FAULT signal if the printer detects that it is out of paper. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
interface is used.
Send the FAULT signal if the paper is out. 147/IGNORE Do not send the FAULT signal if the paper is out.
148 - FAULT SIGNAL AT OFFLINE

FWNCTION: Determines whether the FAULT signal is sent
to the host computer i f the printer is taken offline using the OFFLINE control panel button.
Protected
This field is valid only when the Centronics interface is used.

DESCRIPTION
DISPLAY SHOWS:
148/FAULT
Send the FAULT signal.

Do not send the FAULT signal.
-- -
* 148/DISABLE 149 - LINE FEED COUNT

FUNCTION:
Selects the line count feeding range which is available using the Paper Instruction (PI) line. Refer to the Line Count Feeding section in Chapter 5.
PR(YTECTI0N TYPE :
Protected
NOTES: This field is valid only when the Dataproducts
(DPC) interface is used.
149/1-15 LINE 149/1-16 LINE
PI line count feeding ranges from 1 to 15 lines. PI line count feeding ranges from 1 to 16 lines.
150 POWER-UP S T A T E
FUNCTION:
Selects the state the printer will enter on Protected
power -up.
PROTECTION TYPE:
On power-up, the printer goes offline. 15O/ONLINE The printer goes online (ready to print) after power-up.
151
- PAPER INSTRUCTION
FUNCTION: Controls whether the Paper Instruction (PI)
signal is valid and how received data is treated when the PI signal is active.
PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
* 151/PI/VALID
If the PI signal is active, received data is treated as, VFU (Vertical Format Unit) corktrol data. The PI signal is invalid; data received data while the PI signal is active is regarded as reqular print data. The PI signal is invalid; data received while the PI signal is active is ignored.
151/INVALID 1
151/INVALID 2
152 - BUFFER CLEAR

PUNCTION: Controls the CLEAR signal action. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected

LAY
SHOWS;
DESCRIPTIQN
152/ENABLE 152/DISABLE
CLEAR signal is valid. CLEAR signal is not valid.
153 - D A T A LINE 8
FUNCTION: Determines whether the PI line is used for the PI signal. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
NOTES: Valid only when the Dataproducts (DPC) interface is used. If the printer is used with a DEC VAX, set this field to DATA 8. DISPLAY SHOWS:
*
DESCRIPTION
153/PI LINE 153/DATA 8
The PI line is used to transmit the PI signal to the printer. Data line 8 is used to trarisrnit the PI signal to the printer.
160 - B A U D R A T E
FUNCTION: interface.
Sets
the
baud
rate
for
the
serial
PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWSr
Protected
DESCRIPTION
38,400 bits per second. 19,200 bits per second. 9,600 bits per second. 4,800 bits per second. 2,400 bits per second. 1,200 bits per second. 600 bits per second. 300 bits per second.
161 - D A T A BIT LENGTH
--
FUNCTION: Determines whether a 7-bit or 8-bit data word is used. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
DESCRIPTION
* 161/8 BITS
161/7 BITS
Use an 8-bit word. Use a 7-bit word.
162 - PARITY BIT

FUNCTION: Determines what form of parity is used. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected No parity bit. Even parity. Odd parity. No parity check is used; no parity bit is sent with transmitted data.
* 162/NONE
162/EVEN 162/ODD 162/IGNORE
163 - STOP BITS

FUNCTION: Determines how many stop bits to use. PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWS L
Protected
DESCRIPTION
163/2 BITS 163/1 BIT
Use 2 stop bits. Use 1 stop bit.
164 - SERIAL INTERFACE PROTOCOL

FUNCTION: Sets the protocol to use with the ssrial interface. For details, see Appendix C. PROTECTION TYPE:
*
Protected
Use X-ON/X-OFF protocol.
164/X-ON/OFF 164/ETX/ACK 164/ACK/NAK 164/DTR 164/RESTRT-H
Use ETX/ACK protocol. Use ACK/NAK protocol. Use DTR protocol. Use Restraint/BUSY protocol; BUSY condition is indicated when pin 11 is high. Use Restraint/BUSY protocol; BUSY condition is indicated when pin 1 1 is low.
164/RESTRT-L
165 - OVERRUN BUFFER SIZE

FUNCTION: Sets the size of overrun buffer. PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWS:
Protected
PESCRIPTION
* 165/256 BYTE 165/1K BYTE 165/2K BYTE 165/4K BYTE
256 byte buffer. 1024 byte buffer. 2048 byte buffer. 4096 byte buffer.
166 - X-OFF CONTROL

FUNCTION: Determines whether to send one or a series
of X-OFF signals.
PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
PESCRIPTION
DX SPLAY SHOWS;
166/SINGLE 166/REPEAT
Sends a single X-OFF when the receive buffer becomes full. Sends multiple X-OFFs if data is received after the first X-OFF.
167 - DATA ERROR

FUNCTION: Determines how to respond to data errors. PROTECTION TYPE: PISPLAY SHOWSL
Protected
DESCRIPTION
* 167/ERROR ?
Print a reversed question mark i f there is a data error. Print a space if there is a data error. Show message: ERROR on display and stop printing.
168 - MODEM CONTROL

FUNCTION: Determines the conditions for data transfer
through modem.
PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
DESCRIPTION
168/MODEM-ANY
Data transmission is enabled regardless of the level of: DCD and DSR . Data transmission is enabled only if DCD and DSR are high.
* 168/MODEM-HI.
169 - POLLING CHARACTER FOR ACKJNAK

,
,.-.
FUNCTION: Selects the polling character used with the ACK/NAK protocol (selected by Field 164). PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
169/HEX 00 169/HEX 01
Use hex 00 (NUL) .
Use hex 01 (SOH).
Use.hex 1F (US).
170-SET SIGNALLING INTERVAL FOR IDLING STATE

FUNCTION: Sets the interval between signals to the host computer when idling. PROTECTION TYPE: NOTES:
Protected
This is used with XON/XOFF protocol. The signal sent to the host is XON during the ONLINE state and XOFF during the OFFLINE state.
DESCRIPTIOlq
DISPLAY SHOWS:
* 170/NO SIGNAL
170/5-SEC 170/10-SEC 170/20-SEC
No signal sent to host during printer idling. Signal every 5 seconds. Signal every 10 seconds. Signal every 20 seconds.
C1-500e/c1-1oooe
C.ITOH GAP4 FUNCTIONS

The following fields are available if Field 001 is set to "CI-GAP4'. They are used to configure GAP mode functions. 214 - INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SET
FUNCTION; Selects international character set. PROTECTION TYPE:
Protected
* 214/US ASCII
214/JAPAN 214/U.K. 214/FRANCE 214/GERMANY 214/SWEDEN 214/NORWAY 214/DENMARK 214/NETHERLND 214/ITALY 214/SPAIN 214/FINLAND 214/FRNCH CAN
220 - PRINT DIRECTION
Selects standard US ASCII set. Japanese national set. British (U.K) national set. French national set. German national set. Swedish national set. Norwegian national set. Danish national set. Netherlands national set. Italian national set. Spanish national set. Finnish national set. French Canadian national set.
FUNCTION: Selects either unidirectional printing or-
the faster bidirectional printing.

PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWS:
*
Protected
DESCRIPTION
220/BIDIRECT. 220/UNIDIR. 220/BAR-UNI.
Bidirectional printing. Unidirectional printing. Unidirectional printing for bar codes; bidirectional printing for text.
237 - GAP-4 WAKE-UP COMMAND CHARACTER

FUNCTION: S e l e c t s the c h a r a c t e r used t o a c t i v a t e C I GAP4 operat i o n . PROTECTION TYPE: DISPLAY SHOWS ;
Protected
RESCRIPTION
* 237/GAP=&
237/GAP=ESC
ASCII c h a r a c t e r
&
ASCII c o n t r o l character ESC (27 Decimal, 1B Hex) ASCII c h a r a c t e r $ ASCII c h a r a c t e r

A
ASCII character % ASCII c o n t r o l character S H O ( 0 1 Decimal, 01 Hex) ASCII c o n t r o l c h a r a c t e r STX (02 Decimal, 0 2 Hex)
245 - TERMINATE CODE
FUNCTION: Determines how t h e CI-GAP4 mode responds t o t h e CR code. PROTECTION TYPE:

Protected
NOTES: If "CR+LFM i s s e l e c t e d i n t h i s f i e l d and F i e l d 45 has been s e t t o "CR+LFw or "PRINT+LFn, two l i n e feeds w i l l be executed f o r each CR code received. DISPLAY SHOWS: DESCRIPTION
The CR code c a u s e s t h e c u r r e n t l i n e t o be p r i n t e d ; no l i n e feed i s performed. P r i n t s t h e c u r r e n t l i n e and then performs a l i n e feed.
* 245/CR ONLY
245/CR+LF
CHAPTER 5 DLP EMULATION MODE

This chapter provides instructions for using the CI-SOOe/ CI-1000e's CI-400/800 line printer emulation mode. The chapter's three main sections are:
b
CI-DLP EMU1;ISTION MODE SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS
How to select emulation.

b b
the
CI-400/800 line
printer
CI-DLP CONTROL CODES CI-DLP ESCAPE SEQUENCES
The CI-500e/CI-1000emay also be controlled with sof( w r :ae commands. These sections describe for programmers h ~ to w control the CI-DLP emulation mode.
EMULATION M O D E S
Emulations selectable via the control panel are listed ol below. Graphics modes are chosen through c r trol panel setting of Printer Attribute Field 001. CI-400/800 EMULATION Emulates printers. the CIE Ameri.ca CI-400/800 series
These graphics capabilities can be selected:

b b
b
CIE GAP-4 graphics (standard feature) QMS MAGNUM graphics emulation (option) IGP graphics emulation (option)
CI-500elCI-1000e
HOW TO SET UP THE CI-DLP EMULATION MODE

The control panel is used to select emulation modes. This section lists the settings required for CI-400/800 emulation and describes their entry. Once a User Number is set up for CI-400/800 emulation, selecting that User Number activates the emulation. The CI-400/800 line printer emulation is selected via the following attribute setting: Emulation Mode (000) set to CI-400/800 Emulation Mode (the CI-DLP menu item) - see Step 3 below This setting is entered as follows:
STEP 1.
Select the SET-UP mode or the CONFIGURATION mode. See instructions in Chapter 3 for doing this from the control panel.
STEP 2 .
Select a User Number. Note that the attribute values for User Nurnbers 0 through 3 are stored in non-volatile memory whose contents are not lost when the printer is turned off. User Number 4 is a "scratch" list intended for frequent, temporary changes.
STEP 3. STEP 4.
Select attribute Field 000 (Emulation Mode) and the CI-DLP menu item. Other operating characteristics may be selected at this time. Otherwise, exit by pressing the SET-UP key, which stores all values selected in this session.
After Step 4 has been performed, selecting the User Number activates the emulation and any associated characteristics. (Instructions for User Number selection via the set-up mode are given in Chapter 3 . )
CI-500e/CI-Xoooe
A QUICK REVIEW OF ASCII CODES

ASCII - the American Standard Code for Information Interchange - is used for most communication between microcomputers and peripheral devices such as modems, printers, and terminals. When a printer receives a number, it interprets it as a code with a meaning according to the ASCII definition. This section discusses ASCII and its extensions, and how they are used to control a printer.
BACKGROUND: NUMBER REPRESENTATIONS
Numbers may be represented using various number bases. People use decimal, or base ten. Computers commonly use base two, or binary numbering, together with base sixteen, or hexadecimal. Decimal numt8ers between 0 and 1 2 7 , when represented here in other bases, appear as a group of eight binary digits or two hexadecimal digits. For example, 1 2 decimal is the same as 00001100 binary; in hexadecimal form: OCH. The table below shows decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents for the first 1 6 integers:
DEC
HEK
BINARY
DEC
HEX
BINARY
1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
8H
9H
A H B H CH
DH
EH F'H
ASCII CATEGORIES
ASCII defines each number from 0 to 1 2 7 as representing either a control code or a character code. Control codes stand for commands to the receiving device. These include such operations as carriage returns, line feeds, tabs, and so on. Character codes represent something to be printed, such as letters, numerals, punctuation marks, or ot:ler symbols. In ASCII, most code values between 32 and 127 are character codes. Appendix A contains ASCII code tables
CI-DLP CONTROL CODES

This section describes how the CI-500e/CI-1000e responds to ASCII control codes when in the CT-400/800emulation mode. The CI-500e/CI-1000eresponds to single ASCIIcontrol codes and also to an extended command set defined by escape sequences. Both types are covered here. Control codes occupy code table columns 0. 1, 8, and 9, and range from hexadecimal 00 to 1F and 80 to 9F. Codes 80-FF are normally undefined, and treated as specified by Field 043. Field 053 makes it possible to map control codes 00 to 1F into columns 8 and 9, or map character codes EO-FF into columns 8 and 9. Codes not listed here are undefined. Depending upon the Field 169 selection, control codes 00 (NUL) through 1F (US) can be used as a polling character when the ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected (Field 164). See Appendix C for more information. Table 5-1. CI-DLP Code Table
If Fed053 is set lo 'HEX 00.1 F'. If the Centonk or RS-232C interface k selecled, the 'AUTOMATIC' T i il has the same e k l . " FiiM 046 determines the DEL code bnclh.
The format used to list the control codes is: ASCII code name
I
.,"
I I
ESC
I
Name of control function
ESCAPE
Hexadecimal value for the function
1BH
Introduces an ESC command. The validity of the ESC code is selected via Field 040.
Description of function Any item in parentheses following a descript.ion indicates the field number of a printer cont.ro1 setting that may affect this command.
SOH
01H
START OF HEADER
The SOH code is normally undefined. If Field 041 is set to "P+CI SOH", the SOH code performs the same function as the ESC code.
ETX
03H
END OF TEXT
If the ETX/ACK or ACK/NAK serial interface protc~col is selected via Field 164, the ETX code is used to mark the end of a data block sent by the host computer. See Appendix C for more information.
E(YT
04H
END OF TRANSMISSION
The EOT control code is used with the ENQ code to print high density Printronix-style graphics. The EOT command string specifies the even-numbered dots on the dot line, while the ENQ command string specifies the odd numbered dots. Refer to the Graphics Commands section later in this chapter for more information. This command works only if the Printronix code system is enabled (Field 041 is set to "P+CI ESC" or "P+CI SOH"). Otherwise, it is treated as an undefined code.
ENQ 05H ENQUIRY
By itself, this command is used to print normal density Printronix style graphics. The ENQ code is also used with the EOT control code to print high density graphics. Refer to the Graphics Commands section later in this chapter for more information. This command works only if the Printronix code system is enabled (Field 041 is set to "P+CI ESC" or "P+CI SOH"). Otherwise, it is treated as an undefined code.
ACK
06H
ACKNOWLEDGE
When received by the printer while the Printronix code system is enabled, the ACK code sets the line spacing to 8 lines per inch. After one line is printed, the printer resets to the previous line spacing. This use of the ACK code requires that Field 041 be set to "P+CIE ESC" or "P+CI SOH"). Otherwise, the ACK code is treated as an undefined code. The ACK code is transmitted by the printer to the host computer i f ETX/ACK or ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected via Field 050. Refer to Appendix C for more information.
BS
08H
BACKSPACE
Moves the print position one character to the left, until the left margin is reached. The Backspace code is invalid in the double-width character mode. Field 054 or the BS Code Handling escape sequence enables/disables the Backspace code.
09H HORIZONTAL TAB
Advances the print head to the next horizontal tab position. If no tab positions have been set, this code is ignored. Field 051, the Horizontal Tab Handling escape sequence, or the Horizontal Format Control escape sequence controls the tab stop settings. If the left margin is set as a tab position, the printer advances to the margin position. The shifted space is independent of the Horizorltal Enlargement Mode. The HT codes is invalid in the plot mode.
LF
OAH
(graph:~cs)
LINE FEED
Prints the current line and advances the paper one line. In the plot (graphics) mode, the paper advances one dot line.
Vl'
OBH
VERTICAL TAB
Prints the current line and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position. Field 050 or the Vertical Tab Handling escape sequence enables/disables the VT code.
R OCH
FORM FEED
The FF code prints the current line and advances the paper to the top of the next page. The print position moves to the left margin.
CR
ODH
CARRIAGS RETURN
The CR code normally prints the current line and advances the paper one line. Field 045 or the CR Code Handling Escape sequence can modify the function of the CR code so that it is ignored when there is no printable data on the current line, ignored at all times, or is used for underlining. If Field 045 or its equivalent escape sequence is set to "CR IGNORE", the printer ignores any paper feeding command (such as LF) which immediately follows the CR code. If the CR code function is set to "UNDERLINE", the CR code performs a carriage return function only; the line is not printed until an LF code is received. Because data can be sent between the CR and LF codes, this CR code function can be used to overlay one print line on another (as long as characters from the second line do not overprint characters from the previous line). The following examples illustrate this use of the CR code. An "s" indicates a SPACE (20 hexadecimal), a " u " indicates an underline character (SF hexadecimal), and a "d" indicates a DEL control code (7F hexadecimal ) .
1) Underlining First line: Second line: Printed result: The CI-1000e "CR" sssssssuuuuuu"LF" The CI-1000e
2) Addition and Deletion First line: Second line: Printed result:

SO
Dot Matrix PrintersY"CRn sssssssssssLinessssssssddW Dot Matrix Line Printer
om
SHIFT OUT
Depending upon the settings for Fields 048 and 052, the SO code can be used to (1) shift the character set into the 8-bit code section or (2) set the double-width print mode.
,,-
For Case 1 to work, Field 048 must be set: to "7+SI/SOW,Field 052 must be set to 'SI", and the Centronics interface must be selected. 7-bit codes (00-7F hexadecimal) received after the SO code character are treated as if they were 8-bit codes (80-FF hexadecimal). In effect, the printer adds 80 hexadecimal ( 1 2 8 decimal) to all 7-bit codes received. For example, sending an " @ " character (40 (CO hexadecimal, 64 decimal) causes an " @ " hexadecimal, 192 decimal) to be printed. If the Centronics interface is not selected and Field 052 is set to "SI", the SO code is ignored. For Case 2 to work, Field 052 must be set to "RESET" or "1 LINE". If "RESET" is seleciced, double-width characters are printed until an Sl code is received; if "1 LINE" is selected, the printer resets to normal width printing after 1 line. The maximum number of columns while printing double-wide characters is one half the number of columns determined by Field 016, less one column.
SI
OFH
SHIFT I N
"-
Clears the Shift Out function or releases doublewide printing, as determined by Field 052. (See the SO code explanation above.)
DC1
1lH
DEVICE CONTROL 1 (XON)
--
Causes the printer to resume reception of data after reception was halted by the DC3 code. The validity of the DC1 code is selected via Fie1.d 047.
DC3
13H DEVICE CONTROL 3 (XOFF)
. ,. "
After it receives the DC3 code, the printer ignores any data received and displays " [DC3] RECEIVED" on the control panel. Data reception will not resume until a DC1 code is received. The DC3 code validity is selected via Field 047.
CAN
18H
CANCEL
Cancels the preceding data line. The print position moves to the left margin. The validity of the CAN code is selected via Field 049.
ESC 1BH ESCAPE
Introduces an ESC command. The validity of the ESC code is selected via Field 040.
GS
1DH GROUP SEPARATOR
If Field 027 is set to "DPC B30OU, the GS code starts the Dataproducts B-300 DAVFU loading. Refer to the Dataproducts DAVFU Loading escape sequence section for more information.
RS
1EH
RECORD SEPARATOR
Terminates the Dataproducts 8-300 DAVFU Loading if Field 027 is set to "DPC B300g. If Field 027 is set to "PRINTRONX", the RS code starts the 14-Channel EVFU Loading. Refer to the Dataproducts B-300 DAVFU Loading section or the Printronix 14-Channel EVFU Loading section for more information.
US
1FH
UNIT SEPARATOR
If Field 027 is set to "PRINTRONX", the US code terminates the 14-Channel EVFU Loading. Refer to the Printronix 14-Channel EVFU Loading section for more information. If this field is set to "DPC B300n, the US code is used to initiate DAVFU channel selection or line count feeding.
DEL
7F'H
DELETE
As specified by Field 046, the DEL code prints the delete character, prints a space, deletes the previous character, or deletes the current line. The DEL code can also be undefined.
CI-DLP ESCAPE SEQUENCES
The codes introduced in the previous section allow computer control of a limited number of the printer's basic operations, such as a line feed, horizontal tab or a carriage return. An expanded range of command:j is provided through the use of escape sequences.
Rn escape sequence is defined as a succession of one or more ASCII codes preceded by an escape control code. The control code usually used for this purpose is ESC. For example,
ESC 5
is an escape sequence which selects the normal density plot mode.

Many escape sequences include a variable, a v3lue that can be chosen to fit a particular purpose. For example,
ESC ? SP nl
is an escape sequence which sets the form length to the number of lines specified by the value nl. The CI-DLP emulation mode uses two types of escape sequences which have different effects in memory. The validity of both types of ESC sequences is selected through Field 040 (refer to Chapter 4).
CONFIGURATION 1 ESCAPE SEQUENCES
The first type, Configuration 1 escape sequences, can not be written to non-volatile memory. Thus, these functions cannot be saved once the printer's power is turned OFF. Configuration 1 escape sequences are for normal print format controls, such as horizor..tal enlargement, superscripts, boldface, and so on. These escape sequences have the following format: FUNCTION CODE
PARAMETER P I >
All escape sequences begin with the escape code ESC. The function code specifies a specific kind of printer operation, such as horizontal enlargement. The third part of the sequence, PI, is not always required; it indicates the desired operation. For example, to begin printing double-wide characters, the host computer sends:
ESC 0 !
The 0 (zero) represents the horizontal enlargement specifies a function and the exclamation mark ! magnification of 2.
FunctioncodesvalidontheTheCI-500e/CI-1000eprinterare listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Configuration 1 Function Codes P1 (ASCII)

0 1
2
Function Description
-
5 6
7
8 9
<
>
i 1
Horizontal Enlargement Vertical Enlargement Underlining Emphasized Printing Normal Plot Mode High Density Plot Mode Plot Mode Reset Dot Row Feeding 12 Channel DAVFU Loading 2 Chan. VF~/Horiz.Format ~oading DAVFU Channel Skipping Line Count Feeding Save Configuration 2 Settings Select User Number Select Font
CONFIGURATlON 2 ESCAPE SEQUENCES The second type, Configuration 2 escape sequences, can be written to non-volatile memory, and can therefort? be saved when the printer's power is turned OFF. Configlration 2 escape sequences are similar to setting the field and menu functions at the control panel. If the function designated by the ESC sequence requires it to be saved, the contents stored in non-volatile memory are replaced with this function by entering the following command:
ESC > !
This configuration uses the character " ? " (Hex 3F: as the function code, and the 1-byte parameters P1 and P2, as shown in the diagram below:
ESC
I FUNCTION CODE I <PARAMETER PI> I <PARAMETER ~ 2 : 7
The function of parameter P1 is similar to a f:~eld number on the operation panel. Likewise, the functior~of parameter P2 is similar to a menu item. The following table gives the Hex codes and ASCII character codes for parameter PI, and the function description. Table 5-3. Configuration 2 Field Function Codes Related P1 (ASCII)I Field 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 021 026 027 028 034 040 041 Function Description Form Length Line Spacing Character Pitch Print Quality Character Set Font for Zero Print Width Compressed Print Width Graphics Font Skip Perforation Print Start VFU Selection Bottom of Form Control Row Feed Pitch for LQ Plot Mode Response to ESC Sequence Code System
'
C1-500e/CI-1000e
Table 5 3. configuration 2 Field Function Codes P1 Related (ASCII) Field
@
A
Function Description
B C D E
F
G H I J
K L M
N
042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 080 081 082 083 084
f g h i j
Enable Graphics Font Codes Undefined Control Code Handling Undefined Character Code Handling CR Code Handling DEL Code Handling DCl/DC3 Code Handling Data Bits CAN Code Handling vertical Tab Handling Horizontal Tab Handling SI/SO Code Handling Handling of Control Codes in Columns 8/9 BS Code Handling Plot Mode Exit Print Position Unit of Form Length Shift Out Reset 8 LPI Reset Horizontal Enlargement Reset Vertical Enlargement Reset Plot Mode Reset
PRINTRONIX-STYLE CONTROL SEQUENCES
The CI-500e/CI-1000e printers are capable of using the Printronix code system. If Field 041 is set to " P + CIE HSC" or "P + CIE SOH", the operation of the following codes changes as follows:
ENQ
Causes the printer to enter the normal density plot mode. Also is used in the high density plot mode. Prints the even dots in the high density plot mode. Sets the 8 LPI mode for one line. Sets the double-width printing mode for one line. Starts 14-Channel Electronic Vertical Format (EVFU) loading. Ends 14-Channel EVFU loading.
WT )
ACK
BS
RS
US
For more information, refer to previous control code explanations and the Printronix Plot Mode explanations later in this chapter. If Field 041 is set to "P+CIE SOHm, the SOH control code (01 hexadecimal) can be substituted for the ESC code in any escape sequence listed in this section. The ESC code and any escape sequence which uses it will be invalid. For example, to begin printing double-wide characters, the following would be sent instead of ESC 0 ! :
SOH 0 !
Configuration 1 and 2 escape sequences have the following formats under the Printronix Code System: FUNCTION CODE PARAMETER P1>
-
SOH
1 FUNCTION CODE 1 <PARAMETER PI> I <PARAMETER ~ 2 > 1
Parameters P1 and P2 take the same values as they do in normal escape sequences.
NOTATION FOR ESCAPE SEQUENCE DESCRIPTIONS

b
Escape sequences appear on one line unless otherwise noted. In that line, groups of symbols surrounded by spaces should be read as a whole. In the example:
ESC ? H SP
the for the the

b
ESC represents the ASCII code ESC, the ? stands the code for a question mark, the H stands for code for the capital letter H, and SP stands for ASCII SPACE code.
Escape sequences are presented in three equivalent formats: ASCII characters, hexadecimal values, and decimal equivalents. Programmers should choose the appropriate representation for their programming environment. When programmer-supplied values must appear in a sequence, the required parameters are indicated by enclosure in angle brackets: < > . THE ANGLE BRACKETS ARE NOT PART OF THE ESCAPE SEQUENCE. THEY ARE INCLUDED IN THE DESCRIPTION TO SEPARATE AND IDENTIFY VARIABLES. Example: the sequence ESC ? SP <P2> sets the page length. Parameter <P2> is calculated by adding an offset of 31 decimal to th2 number of lines (also in decimal). To set the length at 55 lines, add 31 to 55 and substitute the ASCII equivalent for <P2>. Since 31 + 55 = 86 and the ASCII character equivalent for decimal 86 is an uppercase V, the escape sequence sent to the printer would then be as follows:
ESC ? SP V
Escape sequences may also include a stream of data. In these cases, usually indicated by a series of <D> <D> cD> symbols, each cD> represents one unit (one byte) of required data. For example:
ESC 5 < D l > <D2> <D3>
... <Dn>
where <D3> is followed by more data bytes until the last unit, <Dn>.
ESCAPE SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION FORMAT

The format used in the following descriptions is:
NAME OF COMMAND
FUNCTION
Escape sequence in ASCII Equivalent in Hexadecimal Equivalent in Decimal COMMAND TYPE

NOTES
C1-500elCI-1000e
PRINT STYLEIATTRIBUTE COMMANDS

CHARACTER PITCH
FUNCTION: Sets the character pitch in charact.ers per inch (CPI).
ASCII : HEX :
DECIMAL:
COMMAND
ESC
1B
27
<P2> 22
34
3F 63
<P22 <P2>
TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved
EQUIVALENT FIELD: 012

NOTES: If different character pitch settings are used on one line, the pri-nter will ignore vertical
enlargement commands (ESC 1 <PI>) received in that 1ine .
SP
!
" % #
(Hex201 (Hex 2 1 ) (Hex 24) (Hex 22) (Hex 25) (Hex 23)
10 CPI 11.67 CPI 12.08 CPI 13.33 CPI 15 CPI 16.67 CPI
EMPHASIZED PRINTING
FUNCTION: Selects either bold or slanted printing.
ASCII : HEX :
DECIMAL:
COMMAND
ESC 1B 27
3
33
cP1> <PI> <PI>
51
TYPE: Configuration 1 - Cannot be saved.
NOTES: Characters cannot be both boldfaced and
slanted; neither can there be both bold and slarted characters on the same line. If attempted, only the most recently set print mode will have any effect. The value remains selected until it is replaced by another value. Boldface printing is supported only in the DP and HSD print modes. The boldface attribute will be ignored if selected in the LQ mode. Slanted, horizontally enlarged characters or slanted, vertically enlarged characters printed at the rightmost column may be clipped. The selections for P 1 are:
PARAMETER Pa
FUNCTION
SP
!
"
(Hex201 (Hex21) (Hex 22)
End Emphasized Printing Begin Boldface Printing Begin Slanted Printing
When using slanted printing, to avoid overpr.ir~t:ing when returning to normal print mode, it may be necessary to insert one or two spaces before the first normal print character.
UNDERLINING
FUNCTION: Sets/resets underlined printing.
ASCII :
ESC 1B
27
<PI> <PI> <PI>
HEX :
32
50
DECIMAL:
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 1 - Cannot be saved.
NOTES: If vertically enlarged characters are printed, the location of the underline is adjusted accordingly. Spaces created using the horizontal tab function are underlined.
The selections for P1 are:
FUNCTION
SP
!
(Hex201 (Hex 21
End Underlining Begin Underlining
The CR code may also be used for underlining. See Field 45 in Chapter 4, and the CR control code explanation in this chapter.
HORIZONTALLY ENLARGED PRINT

FUNCTION:
Sets the horizontal enlargement facto:~to ESC

1B 27
2 , 4, or 8 times normal size.
ASCII: HEX : DECIMAL:
0 30 48
<PI> <PI>
<PI>
SP
! # '
The value remains selected until it. is replaced by another value, or resets after one line of printing (refer to Fie.ld 82 in Chapter 4 or the following escape sequence). The selections for P1 are:
NOTES: MAGNIFICATION
(Hex201 (Hex211 (Hex 2 3 ) (Hex 27)
HORIZONTAL ENLARGEMENT RESET

FUNCTION: Determines the state of the Horizo:ntal Enlargement function (ESC 0 <PI>) after one lint? of
printing. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC

1B
?
h
68
<P2> <P2>
3F
63
27
104
<P2>
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved.

EQUIVALENT FIGLD: 082
PARAMETER P2 SP
!
FUNCTION Hold horizontal enlargement mode Reset
(Hex 20) (Hex 21)
VERTICALLY ENLARGED PRINT

FUNCTION: Sets the vertical enlargement factor to 1 , 2, 4, or 8 times normal size. ASCII :
ESC
1B 27
<Plz <PI> <PI>
HEX :
31
49
DECIMAL:
NOTES:
Line spacing is adjusted to accommodate the largest character on the line. Enlarged characters have the same baseline as normal characters. The value remains selected until it is replaced by another value, or resets after one line of printing (refer to Field 83 in Chapter 4 or the following escape sequence). The printer does not support multiple vertical enlargement settings and multiple character pitch settings on the same line. If different character pitch settings are used on one line, the printer will ignore the vertical enlargement escape sequence. The selections for P1 are:
MAGNIFICATION
SP
#
'
(Hex 2 0 ) (Hex 21) (Hex 23) (Hex 27)
VERTICAL ENLARGEMENT RESET

FUNCTION: Determines the state of vertically enlzrged printing (ESC 1 <PI>) after one line is printed. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B 27
?
i 69 105
<P2>
--
3F
<P2> <P2>
SP
!
63
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved. E Q U I V W FIELD: 083
FUNCTION
Hold vertical enlargement mode Reset after 1 line
(Hex 20) (Hex211
PRINT QUALITY
FUNCTION: Selects the print density (print quality).
ESC 1B
27
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
63
23
35
-NOTES:
EQUIVALENT FIELD:
013
LQ (Letter Quality) mode has the hig,lest density, while the HSD (High Speed Draft) mode has the lowest.
SP
!
" #
(Hex20) (Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex 23)
DP Mode DP Mode LQ Mode HSD Mode
C11-500elcI-1000e
CHARACTER SET COMMANDS

FONT FOR ZERO
FUNCTION: Deter-mines the shape of the zero and uppercase ' 0 ' characters and whether the zero has a slash. ASCII :
HEX :
ESC 1B
<P2> <P2>
<P2>
-
3F
25 37
DECIMAL:
27
63
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2
Can be saved
EQUIVALENT FIELD: 01 5
SP
!
"
(Hex20) (Hex21) (Hex22)
Circular zero, rectangular ' 0 ' Rectangular zero, circular ' 0 ' Zero with slash, circular ' 0 '
CHARACTER SET
FUNCTION: Selects one of thirteen character sets residing in the standard character generator built into the printer.
ASCII :
HEX :
DECIMAL:
CO
ESC
1B
27
<P2> <P2>
cP2>
3F
63
24 36
m P E : Configuration 2 - Can be saved.
NOTES: Refer to Appendix A for a complete listing of the character codes.
(Hex 20) (Hex 21) (Hex 2 2 ) (Hex 23) (Hex 24) (Hex 25) (Hex 26) (Hex 27)
(Hex 28) (Hex 29) (Hex 2A) (Hex 2B) (Hex 2C)
US ASCII Japan United Kingdom France Germany Sweden Norway Denmark Netherlands Italy Spain Finland French Canada
GRAPHICS FONT
FUNCTION: Selects either the Line Drawing or Block Character graphics fonts registered in colrms E and F of the printer's character sets.
ASCII :
HEX :
ESC
1B
<P2 >
<P2> <P2>
3F
28
DECIMAL:
27
63
40
SP
!
EQUIVALENT FIELD: 018 NOTES: See Appendix A for an illustration of the
graphics fonts.
PATTERN
Line Drawing Graphics Block Character Graphics
(Hex 20) (Hex 21)
ENABLE GRAPHICS FONT CODES

FlJNCTION: Determines whether o r not codes EO through FF can be used t o p r i n t c h a r a c t e r s from t h e Ruled
Line o r Block characters. ASCII :

HEX :
DECIMAL:
EC S
1B
27
<P2> <P2> cP2>
3F
40
64
63
COHMAND TYPE:
Configuration 2 - Can be saved.
SP
!
EQUIVALblJT FIELD: 042
NOTBS: The graphics font i s s e l e c t e d by the preceding escape sequence o r Field 0 1 8 . Refer t o Appendix A f o r
more on t h e p r i n t e r ' s character s e t s .
FUNCTION
Characters EO-FF a r e v a l i d . Characters EO-FF a r e undefined
(Hex20) (Hex 2 1 )
CI-500elCI-1000e
CHARACTER AND CONTROL CODE SETTINGS

CODE SYSTEM
FUNCTION:
Determines whether the CI-DLP emulation supports Printronix-compatible control codes and/or SOH control sequences. ESC
1B
?
ASCII :
HEX :
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
3F
DECIMAL:
27
63
63
EQUIVALENT FIELD: 04 1
NOTES:
Refer to the preceding Printronix-Style Control Sequences section for more information.
SP
!
(Hex 20) (Hex211
Supports C.ITOH Standard control codes and escape sequences. Supports C.ITOH Standard control codes, Printronix control codes, and C. ITOH standard escape sequences. Supports C.ITOH Standard control codes, Printronix control codes, and SOH control sequences.
"
(Hex 22)
DATA BITS
FUNCTION: Disables/enables character codes 80-FF hexadecimal and determines how these codes are accessed (see Appendix A).
ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL:
ESC
1B
27
F
46
70
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
63
COMMAND TYPE:
SP
!
NOTES: This escape sequence can be used only when the Centronics interface is selected.
FUNCTION
(Hex 20)
8-bit codes (80-FF) can be used to access characters 80-FF. The eighth bit codes control characters bit is ignored. Use 7 (OO-7F) with the SI/SO codes to access 80-FF.
(Hex 2 1 )
"
(Hex 2 2 )
The eighth bit is ignored; characters 80-FF cannot be printed.
BS CODE HANDLING
FUNCTION:
Enables/disables the BS control code. If enabled, the BS code performs a backspace; if disabled, the BS code is treated as an undefined control code (see Field 043). ESC
1B
27
?
L 4C
76
<P2> <P2>
3F
63
SP
!
<P2>

EQUIVALENT FIELD:
054
FUNCTION
Undefined control code Backspace enabled
(Hex 20) (Hex211
CAN CODE HANDLING

FUNCTION:
Selects how a cancel (CAN) code is treated. If enabled, the printer clears the current line in the buffer when this code is received. If disabled, the printer treats the CAN code as an undefined control code, as specified in Field 043. ESC
1B 27
?
ASCII:
HEX :
G
47
71
<P2>
3F
<P2>
<P2>
DECIMAL:
63

EQUIVALENT FIELD:
049
FUNCTION
Delete current line. Undefined control code.
SP
!
(Hex 20) (Hex21)
CR CODE HANDLING
FUNCTION: Selects how a carriage return (CR) code is interpreted.

COMMAND
ESC
1B
27
C 43
67
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
63
TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved.

NOTES: For information on how to use the CR code for
underlining, refer to the CR code explanation in the CI-DLP Control Codes section.
FUNCTION
SP (Hex20) Prints the current line and performs a line feed. Perfornis a line feed only if no data is; in the line buffer. Prints the current line and performs a line feed. If no data is in the line buffer, the CR code is ignored. Ignored Prints the current line and performs a line feed. Performs a line feed only if no data is in the line buffer. Underline printing. Prints the current line and performs a line feed; the following LF code is ignored.
(Hex21)
(Hex 22) (Hex 23)
$
%
(Hex 24) (Hex 25)
DC11DC3 CODE HANDLlNG

FUNCTION: Enables or disables the DC1
(XON) and DC3
(XOFF) control codes. ASCII : HEX :

DECIMAL:
ESC
1B
E
45
69
-
<P2>
3F
63
<P2> <P2> Can be saved.
SP
!
27
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2 WUIVALENT FIELD: 047
FUNCTION
DCl/DC3 codes cause ONLINE/OFFLINE response. Undefined code (see Field 043).
(Hex 20)
(Hex 21)
DEL CODE HANDLING
FUNCTION: Selects the DEL code function.

ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC
1B
?
D 44
68
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
63
SP
!
27
COHHAND TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved.

FUNCTION
Prints a delete character. Undefined code (see Field 043). Prints a space. Delete the previous character (same function as BS code) if Field 054 is enabled. Delete the current line (same function as CAN code).
(Hex 20) (Hex211 (Hex 22) (Hex 23)
"
#
(Hex 24)
RESPONSE TO ESCAPE SEQUENCE

FOHCrION: Enables and disables escape sequences.
ASCII :
cP2> <P2> cP2>
ESC
1B
27
>
HEX : DECIMAL:
3F
3E 62
SP
!
63
FUNCTION
All escape sequences are valid.
(Hex 20)
(Hex211
Escape sequences which affect field menu settings (Configuration 2 sequences) are ignored; all others are executed.
All escape sequences are ignored.
(Hex 22)
SI/SO CODE HANDLING

FUNCTION:
Specifies how the printer responds to Shift In/Shift Out (SI/SO) control codes. ESC 1B 27
?
ASCII :
J
4A 74
<P2>
<P2> <P2>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
3F
63
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved
NOTES:
When the SO code is used to set double-width printing, double-width printing begins immediately after the SO code is received.
FUNCTION
Perform SI/SO (Shift from/to characters 80-FF). Field 0 4 8 must be set to "7+SI/SO". Horizontal Enlargement mode set with magnification of 2 (doublewidth) with SO, and reset with SI. Horizontal Enlargement mode set with magnification of 2 (doublewidth) with SO, and reset after printing one line. SI code is invalid.
SP
(Hex 2 0 )
(Hex 21)
"
(Hex 2 2 )
SHIFT OUT RESET

FUNCTION: Selects whether the printer remains shifted out after one line has been printed in the shift-out state.
ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B 27
?
<P2> <P2> <P2>

--
3F
66
102
63

EQUIVALENT FIELD:
PARAMETER PZ
Can be saved.
080 FUNCTIOU Remain in shift-out state Reset shift-out state after one line has been printed.
SP
(Hex20) (Hex 21)
UNDEFINED CHARACTER CODE HANDLING

FUWCTION:
Specifies whether the printer ignores an undefined character code or substitutes a space for it.
ESC
1B 27
B
42
66
<P2> <P2> cP2>
3F
63
COMMAM) TYPE: Configuration 2

EQUIVALENT FIELD:
- Can be saved.
044
W
SP
!
RESPONSE
Print a space Ignored
(Hex201 (Hex21)
UNDEFINED CONTROL CODE HANDLING

FUNCTION:
Specifies whether the printer ignores an undefined control code or prints a space. ESC
1B
27
ASCII :
HEX :
A
41
<P2>
<P2> <P2>
3F
DECIMAL:
63
65

EQUIVALEWT FIELD: 043
RESPONSE
Ignored Print a space
SP
!
(Hex201 (Hex211
HANDLING OF CONTROL CODES IN COLUMNS 819

FUNCTION: Determines how the printer responds to the control codes 80 through 9F hexadecimal. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B
27
?
<P2> <P2> <P2>

-
3F
4B
75
SP (Hex201
!
63
Can be saved.
EQUIVALEKT FIELD: 053
RESPONSE
The response is determined by the interface. If the Centronics or RS-232C interface is selected, codes 80-9F are equivalent to control codes 00 through lE?; if the optional Dataproducts interface is selected, coder; 809F are undefined. Undefined. Equivalent to control codes OC-IF. Equivalent to character code!s EO through FF.
(Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex 23)
"
#
Setting this function so that control codes 80--9F are equivalent to 00-1F has the same effect as subtracting 80 hexadecimal (128 decimal) from any code ranging from 80-9F which is received by the printer. For example, if control 8A hexadecimal (138 decimal) is sent to the printer, the printer tireats the codes as if it were an LF code (OA hexadecyimal, 10 decimal ) . Setting this function so that codes 80-9F are eqrliva-lent to EO-FF has the same effect as adding 60 hexadecimal (96 decimal) to any code ranging from 80-9F which is received by the printer. For example, i f the graphics font is set to Block and the control code sent is (9C hexadecimal (156 decimal), a bullet character ( F C hexadecimal, 252 decimal) will be printed.
( 0 )
CI-500elCI-1000e
LINE FEEDIPITCH COMMANDS

LINE SPACING
FUNCTION:
(LPI).
Sets the line pitch in lines per ESC

1 B
?
I
inch
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
21
33
27
63
EQUIVALENT FIELD: 017 NOTES: If 8 LPI is selected, it can be held or reset
after one line of printing as per Field 81. PARAMETER P2 SP

!
LINE SPACING
"
#
(Hex20) (Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex 23)
3 LPI 4 LPI 6 LPI 8 LPI
8 LPI RESET
FUNCTION: If the ESC ? ! P2 sequence is used to set
the line spacing to 8 LPI, this sequence determines whether or not the printer resets the line spacing to 6 LPI after one line has been printed. ASCII :
HEX :
ESC
1B
<P2> <P2>
<P2>
3F
63
67
103
DECIMAL:
27
COMM?ND TYPE:
PARAMETER P2 SP
!
FUNCTION
Hold 8 LPI mode Reset after one line
(Hex 20) (Hex211
LINE COUNT FEEDING

FUNCTION: Feeds the paper forward <PI> lines ASCII :
HEX :
ESC 1B
27
<
<PI>
3C
60
cP1> <PI>
DECIMAL:
SP
!
NOTES: The sequence can be used to feed the p.sper forward from 1 to 95 lines. The decimal value : P1 0: can be calculated by adding decimal 31 to the number of lines to be skipped.
FUNCTION
Skip 1 line Skip 2 lines Skip 3 lines Skip 95 lines
.. ...
-
"
(Hex201 (Hex211 (Hex 22)
(Hex 7E)
...
If the Dataproducts (DPC) interface is used, the host computer can initiate line count feeding by pu1:ling the PI (Paper Instruction) signal high and sending a byte which ranges from 10 to 1F hexadecimal. The paper will feed 1-16 lines, as shown in Table '5-4. The exact range of values depends upon the Field 149 setting (1-15 LINE or 1-16 LINE). For example, to feed the paper 15 lines, set the PI signal high and send the byte IF hexadecimal (15 decimal ) . The codes listed in Table 5-4 are also compati.ble with the Printronix EVFU line count feeding codes.
CI-500e/CI-8W
T a b l e 5-4. P I L i n e Count Feeding.
L i n e Count
Hex
Code
10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1 B 1C 1D 1 E 1 F
F i e l d 149 set t o 1 - 1 5 LINE

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F i e l d 1 4 9 set t o 1 - 1 6 LINE
1 Line 2 Lines
Line Line Lines Lines Lines Lines Lines Lines Lines 9 Lines 10 Lines 11 L i n e s 12 L i n e s 13 L i n e s 14 Lines 15 Lines
3 Lines 4 Lines 5 Lines 6 Lines 7 Lines 8 Lines 9 Lines 10 L i n e s 11 L i n e s 12 L i n e s 13 L i n e s 14 L i n e s 15 L i n e s 16 L i n e s
DATAPRODUCTS B-300 LINE COUNT FEEDING

FUWXION:
Feeds the paper forward from 1 to 16 lines. US 1F <PI> <PI> <PI>
ASCII : HEX: DECIMAL:

NOTES:
31
To use Dataproducts B-300 line count feeding, Field 027 must be set to 'DPC 3 0 0 " . The line count feeding range is 1-15 or 1-16 lines, depending upon the Field 149 setting.
FUNCTION
PARAMETER PL DLE (Hex 10) DC1 (Hex 11) DC2 (Hex 12) DC3 (Hex 13) DC4 (Hex 14) NAK (Hex 15) SYN (Hex 16) ETB (Hex 17) CAN (Hex 18) EM (Hex 19) SUB (Hex 1A) ESC (Hex 1B) FS (Hex 1C) GS (Hex ID) RS (Hex 1E) US (Hex 1F) j1-15 L Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip
mTNCTION
Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip
(1-16 1,INES). 1 line 2 lines 3 lines 4 lines 5 lines 6 lines 7 lines 8 lines 9 lines 10 lines 11 lines 12 lines 1 3 lines 1 4 lines 15 1ines 16 1ines
1 line 1 line 2 lines 3 lines 4 lines 5 lines 6 lines 7 lines 8 lines 9 lines 1 0 lines 11 lines 12 lines 13 lines 14 lines 15 lines
If the Dataproducts (DPC) interface is used, the host computer can initiate line count feeding by pulling the PI (Paper Instruction) signal high and sending a byte which ranges from 10 to 1F hexadecimal. The initial US code is omitted. The paper will feed 1-16 lines, as shown in Table 5-4.
DOT ROW FEEDING FUNCTION: Feeds the paper from 1 to 95 dot rows, as designated by the P1 parameter.
ESC
1B
27
<PI> <PI> <PI>
38
56
NOTES: This command is effective only in normal and high density plot modes. The decimal value for P1 can be calculated by adding decimal 31 to the number of dot rows. The dot row feed pitch is 1/72" in the normal plot mode and either 1/144" or 1/288" in the high density plot mode, as selected by Field 034.
SP
!
.. ...
"
(Hex 20) (Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex7E)
CI-J00e/CI-1000e
-."
FORM AND VERTICAL TAB COMMANDS

VERTICAL FORMAT DEFINITIONS
Specifies the length of the paper in lines at the current LPI setting; it is usually the distance between paper perforation lines. The Form Length can also be defined as the distance between Top of Forms, or as the amount of Form Feed (FF) - the amount that the paper advances when the FF code is received.
TOP (TOP O F FORM)
Specifies the first line to be printed on the page. For example, if TOF is set at line 1, then printing begins on line 1. The distance between the top of the page and the Top of Form is defined as the top margin. Note that the top margin cannot be set directly. Its value depends on the relative positions of the TOF and the physical beginning of the page.
VT
(VERTICAL TAB)
Vertical tabs stops are set at one or more 1i;nes using VFU, DAVFU, or EVFU command sequences. Once a vertical tab stop has been set, the printer will skip to the next line which has a tab stop defined when a VT or channel skipping code is received.
BOP ( B O T M M O F FORM)
Specifies the last line to be printed on the page. After printing on this line, the printer automatically skips to the next TOF. The distailce between the last printed line on one page (BOF) and the position at which printing begins on the next page (TOF) is determined by the Bottom of Form setting. The distance between the bottom of the page and the Bottom of Form is defined as the bottom margin. Note that the bottom margin cannot be set directly. Ets value depends on the relative positions of the 130F and the physical end of the page.
PU3 (RIGHT MARGIN)
Defines the column at which printing will end. D a t a beyond the RM is treated as invalid. For example, if the RM = 131, then all data beyond column 130 is invalid and does not print.
FORM LENGTH
FUNCTION: Sets the' form length in lines per page.
ASCII : HEX :
ESC
1B
27
SP
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
63
20
32
DECIMAL:
COMMAND TYPE: Configurat.ion 2 - Can be saved.
NOTES:
Parameter P2 can range from 1 to 95 lines. The form length designated by P2 is set to Channel 1 of the VFU.
SP
!
(Hex 20)
(Hex211 (Hex 22)
.. ... a (Hex 61) .. ...

-
"
(Hex 7E)
UNIT OF FORM LENGTH

FUNCPIONI Selects the line height
(pitch) used to
calculate the form length setting. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B 27

?
<P2> <P2>
-
3F
-
4E
78
SP
!
63
cP2>

FUNCTION
Form length unit = 6 LPI. Form length unit = 3 LPI. Form length unit = current line height (Field 011). Form length unit = 2 X current line height (2/LPI setting).
(Hex20) (Hex 21)
'
#
(Hex 22) (Hex 23)
For example, if the form length unit is set to 2 X the current line height, the line spacing is set to 8 LPI (Field Oil), and the desired form length is 11 inches, the form length setting would be calculated as follows: Current Line Height Form Length Setting
=
=
1/8' = .125" Form Length

2 X Current Line Height
SKIP PERFORATION
FUNCTION: Sets the margin that the printer allows for the perforation line separating two sheets of continuous form paper.
ESC 1B 27
<P22 <P2> <P2>
3F
63
43 2B

NOTES:
The perforation skip command is invalid if 2channel VFU or 12-channel DAVFU is loaded.
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(Hex 20) (Hex211 (Hex 22) (Hex 23) (Hex 2 4 ) (Hex 25) (Hex261 (Hex 27)
No Skipping 1/4 Inch 1/3 Inch 1/2 Inch 2/3 Inch 3/4 Inch 1 Inch 2 Inches
"-
BOTTOM OF FORM CONTROL

Enables the Bottom of Form for 12-channel DAVFU and selects the channels used.
FONCTIOH:
ESC 1B
27
2
32
<P2> cP2>
cP2>
3F
COMMAND
63
50
TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved.
FUNCTION
Disable BOF setting. The last channel (channel 11 for DAVFU, channel 12 for B-300 DAVFU) is used for the BOF setting. If 2-channel VFU is used, this parameter enables the BOF setting. Enables the BOF setting for D.AVFU setting. The BOF is set if a line has both channels 0 and 1 set (channels 1 and 2 when using the B-300 DAVFU)
SP
!
(Hex 20) (Hex 21)
"
(Hex 22)
VERTICAL TAB HANDLING

FUNCTION: Enables/disables the Vertical Tab control code.
(VT)
ASCII : HEX :
DECIMAL:
ESC 1B 27
H
48
72
cP27 <P2>
<P2>
3F 63
SP
!
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved. EQUIVALENT FIELD: 050
FUNCTION
Undefined control code. Performs a Vertical Tab.
(Hex201 (Hex 21)
VFU SELECTION
FUNCTION: Selects the method of electronic format control (Vertical Format Unit) used by the printer to set vertical tabs, margins, and the form length.
ESC 1B 27
1
31
cP2> <P2> <P2>
3F
63
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 2 - can be saved. EQUIVALENT FIELD: 027
IuwmmLu
SP
! "
(Hex201 (Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex 2 3 )
2-Channel VFU
49
12-Channel DAVFU Dataproducts B-300 12-Channel DAVFU Printronix 14-Channel EVFU
2-CHANNEL VFU LOADING
FUNCTION: Loads the 2-Channel VFU (Vertical Format Unit). This method is used to set a single set of vertical tabs, the bottom of form, the top of form, and the form length. The 2-Channel VFU utilizes two channels for vertical format control: channel 0 for form feeding and channel 1 for vertical tabs.
ASCII: HEX :
ESC 1B
33 51
<LO> <LO> <LO>
cL1>
...
<Ln>
-
21
33
cL1> <L1>
DECIMAL: 27
... ...
<Ln>
24
<Ln> 36

NOTES: Field 027 or the preceding escape sequence enables the 2-Channel VFU command.
Each of the LO . . . Ln parameters correspond to one print line on the form. The parameters indicate whether or not a vertical tab stop is to be set on the corresponding line, as well as set the Bottom of Form (BOF) and Top of Form (TOF). A Line Space parameter is used to specify lines without tab stops, BOF, or TOF settings. The parameter settings perform the following functions: LO SP
!
...
Ln VALUE
I3JuauU
Line space (no setting) Set Vertical Tab Stop BOF Set TOF/Form Length Set
'
#
(Hex20) (Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex23)
Note that loading a vertical tab stop at a data line will cause the paper to skip to the corresponding print line + 1 when a VT code is received. For example, if a vertical tab stop is loaded at data line 6, the line skip code will cause the paper to skip to print line 7. The following is an example of the data structure for setting the VFU for a 22 line form, with 20 printable lines and vertical tab stops set at print line 7 2nd 13.
C1-500elCI-1oooe
Table 5-5. VFU Loading
Function performed Start Load Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space VT Set Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space VT Set Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space Line Space BOF Set Line Space TOF/FL Set
Transmitted Characters ESC : ! SP SP SP SP SP

!
Line No.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
10
Comment
TOF set here
Set tab at line 7
SP SP SP SP SP
!
11
12
13
Set tab at line 13
SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
o
14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22
Last print line Sets TOF at line 1 and sets the form length to 22 lines
SP
#
End Load
--
- - --
RESETTING THE 2-CHANNEL VFU

EUNCFION: Clears the 2-channel VFU.
ASCII :
ESC
1B
27
HEX :
DECIMAL:
3A
58
33
51
24
36
COMWND TYPE: Configuration 1
.-
12-CHANNEL DAVFU LOADING

FUNCTION: Loads the 12-Channel DAVFU (Direct Access Vertical Format Unit). This method is used to set up to 10 sets of vertical tabs, the bottom of form, the top of form, and the form length. ASCII: HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B 27
9 <LO-5> <L6-11,. 39 <LO-5>
57 <LO-5>
. . <LO-5> <L6-llz.. . <LO-5> <L6-ll>.. . <LO-5>
<L6-11> ? <L6-ll> 3F cL6-ll> 63
COMMAND TYPE: Configuration 1 - cannot be saved. If Field 151 is set to "PI/VALID" and the optional Dataproducts interface is used, the PI line can be used to initiate DAVFU loading. To load channel d.ata using this method, the PI line must be turned on while the following loading sequence is sent:
ASCII : RS 1E 30 <LO-5> <L6-ll>.. . <LO-5> <LO-5> <L6-ll>.. . <LO-5> <LO-5> <L6-ll>. . <LO-5> . <L6-ll> <L6-11> <L6-112
US
HEX :
DECIMAL:
NOTES:
A
1F 31
maximum of 144 channel entries can be made.
The channel data is organized by line: each line has an LO-5 and an L6-11 code which assigns TOF, VT, BOF, and FF positions for channels 0 to 5 and 6 to 11, respectively.
MSB
BITS
L6-11
6 5 4 3 2 1
LSB
0
HSB
LO-5
LSB
CHANNELS
Figure 5-1. DAVFU Channel Data
These codes are organized in a binary format. The LO5 and L6-11 set codes are composed of one byte each. The most significant digit, bit 7, is always zero. Bit 6, is used to set/reset the DAVFU loading. When it is a 1, loading is possible; when it is 0, the DAVFU channels are cleared. The values of the remaining 6 bits of the LO-5 and L6-11 codes determine which channels are loaded for a particular data line. In the actual loading, the binary values of LO5 and L6-11 codes are converted to their equivalent hex codes or ASCII characters. For example, if tab stops on a particular data line are to be loaded in channels 1 and 8, LO-5 equals 01000010 (hex 42), while L6-11 equals 01000100 (hex 44). Note that bit 0 (channel 0 ) is always equal to zero when tabs are loaded. Channel 0 is reserved for the top of form and form length settings. The 028 the for the Bottom of Form (BOF) setting is' enabled by Field or the equivalent escape sequence. Depending upon Field 028 selection, channel 11 can be reserved the BOF, or channels 0 and 1 can be used to set BOF, provided the following conditions are met:
(1) The line at which the BOF is to be set has both channels 0 and 1 set,
( 2 ) there are no vertical
tab settings after that
line. and
( 3 ) no other channels have vertical tab settings on
that 1ine. The remaining channels can be used for storing tab settings.
DAVFU ESCAPE SEQUENCE LOADING

The loading is performed in the following order: 1. Transfer the Loading Start code. ESC 9
2.
(Hex 1B 3 9 )
Load top of form (TOF) into channel 0.

LO-5 L6-11
= A
= @
(Hex 41) (Hex40)
3.
Load Vertical Tabs (VT) into channels 1 through 10, as desired. Load VT in channel 1: LO-5 = B (Hex 42) L6-11 = @ (Hex 40) Load VT in channel 6: LO-5 = @ (Hex 40) L6-11 = A (Hex 41) [and so on]
4. Set Bottom of Form (BOF) where desired on channel 11 (Field 28 is set to "CHAN. 11"). LO-5 = @ (Hex 401 L6-11 = ' (Hex 60)
5.
Load line spaces (lines without tab settings) to the end of the form. LO-5
L6-11
= @ (Hex 40) = @ (Hex 40)
6. Set the Form Length (FL) on channel 0. LO-5 = A (Hex 41) L6-11 = @ (Hex 40)
7. Transfer the Loading End code.
?
(Hex 3F)
The following example illustrates DAVFU loading for: Top of form on data line 0 loaded in Channel 0 Vertical tabs on data line 3 loaded in Channels
1,2.3
Vertical tabs on data line 6 loaded in Channels

4,5,6
Vertical tabs on data line 9 loaded in Channels 7.8.9 Vertical tabs on data line 12 loaded in Channels
1-10
Vertical tabs on data line 1 5 loaded in Channel 1 0 Vertical tabs on data line 18 loaded in Channel 9 Bottom of Form on data line 2 0 loaded in Channel 11
Form Length = 2 4 lines on data line 24 loaded in Channel 0
Begin
Table 5-6. Sample DAVFU Download

ESC 9
(Hex 1B 39)
...
Binary (by B i t #)
Load
Channel into
TOF LS LS VT
I)
L,2,3 LS LS .VT 4,5,6 LS .LS .VT '7,8,9 LS .. LS .. VT 1-10 LS .LS .VT 1 0 LS .-
j
BOF LS LS LS FL
.. ..
..
:11
... ?
reversed
(Hex
3F) i!nd
Note that in the table above, LO 5 U L6 -11 B E f : in order to show the relationship between the bits and the channels.
DAVFU CHANNEL SELECTION

FUNCTION: Selects a channel in which vertical tab or form settings have been stored and executes a vertical tab. ASCII :
ESC
<PI>
HEX :
1B
3B
59
<PI> <PI>
DECIMAL:
27
COMM?WD TYPE: Configuration 1 NOTE!S:
- Cannot be saved.
The 12-Channel DAVFU Loading escape sequence (ESC 9) must be used to load tabs into the selected channels. Selecting channel 0 causes the printer to execute a Form Feed.
SF
!
# $ %
&
'
(
(Hex201 (Hex211 (Hex 22) (Hex 23) (Hex 24) (Hex 25) (Hex261 (Hex 27) (Hex 28) (Hex 29) (Hex 2 A ) (Hex 2B)
PAPER INSTRUCTION (PI) CHANNEL SELECTION
NUL SOH STX ETX EOT (Hex 00) (Hex 01) (Hex 02) (Hex 03) (Hex 04) FsJQ (Hex 05) ACK (Hex 06) BEL (Hex 07) BS (Hex 08) HT (Hex 09) LF (Hex OA) VT (Hex OBI
With the Dataproducts interface option, the Paper Instruction (PI) signal can be used to select the channel. Paper Instruction DAVFU channel selection is accomplished by turning the PI signal ON and transmitting the following codes.
CHANNEL
Note the Field 151 must be set to 'PI/VALIDn for Paper Instruction channel selection to work.
RESETTING THE 12-CHANNEL DAVFU

FUNCT.ION: Clears the 12-channel DAVFU.

COMMAND
ESC 1B 27 3A 58
0 30 48
TYPE: Configuration 1
DATAPRODUCTS 8-300 DAVFU LOADING

FWNCTION: Loads the 12-Channel B-300 DAVFU (Direct Access Vertical Format Unit) with up to 10 sets of vertical tabs. The bottom of form, the top of form, and the form length settings are also defined using the following commands.
ASCII :
HEX :
GS 1D 29
<L1-6> <L7-12s.. . <L1-6> <L1-6> <L7-12>.. . <L1-6> eL1-6> <L7-12>.. . <L1-6>
<L7-12> <L7-12> <L7-12>
RS
1E
30
DECIMAL:
NOTES: The channel data structure is identical to the 12-Channel DAVFU code structure described in preceding sections, with the exception that the channels are numbered from 1 to 12 instead of 0 to 11. As with the 12-Channel DAVFU Loading parameters, the L1-6 and L7-12 codes are organized in a binary format. The values for the 6 least significant bits of the L1-6 and L7-12 codes determine which channels are loaded for a particular data line. The two most significant bits, bits 6 and 7, can be either 0 or 1. The channel data is organized by line: each line has an L1-6 and an L7-12 code (or character) which assigns TOF, VT, BOF, and FF positions for channels 1 to 6 and 7 to 12, respectively. The maximum number of channel entries is 144. Refer to the 12-Channel DAVFU Loading section for more information.
HSB L7-12 LSB
HSB
L1-6
LSB
Figure 5-2. 8-300 DAVFU Channel Data
For example, if tab stops on a particular data line are to be loaded in channels 2 and 9, L1-6 equals 01000010 (hex 42), while L7-12 equals 01000100 (hex 44). Tabs stops loaded at a given data line cause the paper to skip to the line below the corresponding print line. That is, a tab stop loaded at data line 6 will cause the printer to skip to line 7. The Bottom of Form (BOF) setting is enabled by Field 028 or the equivalent escape sequence. B-300 DAVFU LOADING USING THE PI LINE If Field 151 is set to "PI/VALIDm, the Paper Instruction (PI) Dataproducts interface line may be used to initiate and terminate the DAVFU channel loading process. While the PI line is ON, a command of the following format can be sent to load the DAVFU channels: ASCII : HEX : n 6E <L1-6> <L7-122.. . cL1-6> <L1-6> <L7-12>.. . <L1-61 <L1-6> <L7-12>.. <L1-6> <L7-12> <L7-12>
DECIMAL: 110
6F -
<L7-12> 111
The data format is the same as detailed in the preceding explanations.
DATAPRODUCTS B-300 DAVFU CHANNEL SELECTION

FUNCTION: Selects a channel in which vertical tab or form settings have been stored and executes a vertical tab.
US
cP1> <PI> <PI>
1F 31
NUL (Hex 00)
NOTES: The Dataproducts B-300 DAVFU Loading sequence is used to load the tab stops in the selected channels. If no tabs have been loaded in the selected channel, or channel 1 is selected, the printer skips to the next top of form.
CHANNEL
SOH (Hex 01) STX (Hex 02) ETX (Hex 03) EOT (Hex 04) ENQ (Hex 05) ACK (Hex 06) BEL (Hex 07) BS (Hex 08) HT (Hex 09) LF (Hex OA) w (Hex OB)
If the VT code has been enabled via' Field 050, the VT code will select channel 12 and skip to the next tab stop (if defined). If the VT code is disabled, the printer will skip to the next top of form when the VT code is received. If Field 151 is set to "PI/VALIDm and the optional Dataproducts interface is used, the Paper Instruction (PI) Dataproducts interface line can be used to select the channel and the introductory US code is omitted. After the PI line is turned ON, only parameter P1 is sent to select the channel.
RESETTING THE 8-300 DAVFU

E'UNCTION:
Clears the 12-channel B-300 DAVFU settings.

GS
1D
29
RS
-
1E
30
If Field 151 is set to 'PI/VALID' and the a1 Dataproducts interface is used, the PI line c r be used to reset the B-300 DAVFU. After the PI l n t is ic turned ON, a command of the following format clears the B-300 DAVFU settings:
n 6E
110
o 6F
111
LOADING PRlNTRONlX 14-CHANNEL EVFU FUNCTION: Loads the Printronix compatible 14 Channel EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit) . The EVFIJ load sequence is used to set the top of form and up to 13 sets of vertical tabs.
RS 1E 30
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> <D2> <D2>
... . .. ...
<Dm
cDn>
US 1F
31
<Dn>
If Field 151 is set to "PI/VALIDW and the optional Dataproducts interface is used, the PI line can be used to initiated EVFU loading. The codes used to load the EVFU settings while the PI line is ON use the following format: ASCII : HEX : n <Dl> <Dl> <Dl> <D2> . . . <Dn> <D2> <D2> o
6E
DECIMAL: 110
... . ..
<Dn>
cDn>
6F
111
NOTES: In order to use the 14-Channel EVFU, the following field settings must be made:
1) Field 027 must be set to:"'PRINTRONXW. 2) Field 041 must be set to "PtCI ESC" or "P+CI SOH".
DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS
(Hex 10) (Hex 11) (Hex 12) (Hex 13) (Hex 14) (Hex 15) (Hex 16) (Hex 17) (Hex 18) (Hex 19) (Hex 1A) (Hex 1B) (Hex 1C) (Hex ID)
Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set
top t8b tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab
of on on on on on on on on on on on on on
form on Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel
Channel 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
A maximum of 144 channel entries can be made.
The channel data is organized by a Dl...Dn parameter which stores setting for that line. If the lines, 66 data parameters must be
line: each line has a vertical tab stop form length is 66 sent.
Vertical tab stops are set for a particular line by specifying the chamel code for the Dl.. .Dn parameter which corresponds to that line. For example, to set a vertical tab stop on line 10 and store the vertical tab stop in channel 2, the tenth data parameter ([)lo) must be the code which sets a tab on channel 2. The channel codes are binary numbers which use the 4 least significant bits (bits 0-3) to specify the channel number. If the PI line is not used to initiate EVFU loading, bit 4 must be set to a 1 and bits 5-7 are ignored; if the PI line is used, the printer ignores the 4 most significant bits (bits 47). The Dl. . . Dn parameters 1isted work whether or not the PI line is used. Note that the use of the ESC code for channel selection (see following section) conflicts with normal escape sequence usage. Once the EVFU has been loaded, escape sequences are disabled - - even if Field 41 is set to "P+CIE ESC". If Field 41 is set to "P+CIE ESC", the SOH code must be substituted for the ESC code for escape sequence to work. Escape sequences can be used after the EVFU has been reset.
EVFU CHANNEL LOADlNG

Loading of the 14 -Channel P r i n t r o n ~ x EVFlJ performed in the following manner:
1. Send the Loading Start code:
is
RS (Hex 1 E ) - PI not used. n (Hex 6E) - PI is ON.

2. Load the top of form into Channel 1:
DLE (Hex 1 0 ) - PI not used. Hex xO - PI is ON.
Because the digit represented by x can range from 0 to F hexadecimal, the DLE code could also be used with the PI signal.
3. Load a vertical tab ( V T ) in a channel on each line of your form. If a 66 line form i s used, 65 bytes (in addition to the byte sent in Step 2) must be sent. For example, to set a tab on line 10 and store that tab setting ir~ Channel 5 , send the following:
DC4 (Hex 14) - P I not used. Hex x4 - P I is ON (DC4 is will work) x can be any hexadecimal digit. 4. Send the Loading End Code: US (Hex 1F) - P I not used. o (Hex 6F) - PI is ON.
An example of how to load the EVFU is shown in Table

5-7.
Table 5-7. EVFU Loading Example

Line
:
Start Loading 1 2
3
4
5
6
7 8
PI Not Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex
Used 1E 10 11 11 1B 11
60 61 62 63
64 65
... .. ... .. Hex 11

Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex 11 11 1B 1B 1B 11
1F
Data PI Is Used PI+ Hex 6E xOH xlH xlH xBH xlH xBH 19 xlH 11 xlH 11
Channel No.
1 2
2 12 2 12
2 2
... ... xlH
66 End Loading
xOH xlH xBH xBH xBH xlH PI+ Hex 6F
2 2 2 12 12 12
2
"-
PRINTRONIX EVFU CHANNEL SELECTION

Selects a channel in which vertical tat~or form settings have been stored and execute,s a vertical tab.
FUNC!l!IONr
NOTES: The Printronix 14-Channel Loading sequence is used to load the tab stops in the selected channels. If no tabs have been loaded in the selected chanr.ie1, or channel 1 is selected, the printer skips to the top of form when it receives a VT code.
Two methods exist for selecting EVFU channels, depending upon the whether or not the PI line is used. If the PI line is not used, a channel selection code ranging from 10 to ID hexadecimal is sent to the printer. If the PI line is used, the host computer must pull the PI signal high and send a channel selection code ranging from 00 to OD hexadecimal. PI NOT USED DLE DC1 DC2 DC3
DC4 NAK SYN
PTUSED
PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI
Li& xm
ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS
(Hex 10) (Hex 11) (Hex 12) (Hex 13) (Hex 14) (Hex 15) (Hex 16) (Hex 17) (Hex 18) (Hex19) (Hex 1A) (Hex 1B) (HexlC) (Hex ID)
+ NUL
SOH t STX t ETX + EOT + ENQ t ACK + BEL + BS + HT + LF + VT t FF + CR
t
(Hex 00) (Hex 01) (Hex 02) (Hex 03) (Hex 04) (Hex 05) (Hex 06) (Hex 07) (Hex 08) (Hex 09) (Hex OA) (Hex OB) (Hex OC) (Hex OD)
If Field 151 is set to "PI/VALIDm, the Paper Instruction (PI) Dataproducts interface line can be used for channel selection.
- -
RESETTING THE PRINTRONIX EVFU

FUNCTION: settings.
Clears the 14-channel Printronix EVFU RS US

1F
1E
30
31
If Field 1 5 1 is set to "PI/VALIDn and the optional Dataproducts interface is used, the PI line can be used to reset the EVFU. After the PI line is turned ON, a command of the following format clears the EVFU settings : ASCII:
HEX :
6E
110
6F
111
DECIMAL:
"-
HORIZONTAL POSITIONING/FORMAT COMMANDS

PRINT WIDTH
ESC
1B
?
&
-
FUNCTION: Sets the print width in terms of columns.

CQMCLMlD
<P2>
-
3F 63
26
38
<P2> <P2>
27
m P E r Configuration 2
- Can be saved.
EQUIVALENT FIELDS 016 NOTES: The column width used to set the print width
1' depends upon the Field 017 setting. If Field 0: is set to "POSITION', the column width used is 1/10" and the physical print width is calculated as follows: Print Width (columns) Max. physical width (in.
=
10 CPI If Field 017 is set to 'COLUMN', the column width used is the current character pitch and the physlcal print width is calculated as follows: Print Width (columns) Max. physical width (in.)
=
Current character pitch
SP
!
"
(Hex20) (Hex 21) (Hex 22)
136 Columns 132 Columns 80 C o l ~ s
COMPRESSED PRINT WIDTH

FUNCTION: Selects whether the print width setting depends upon the character pitch selection.
ASCI I :
ESC
1B
- -
<P2> 27
39
-
HEX :
-
3F
<P2>
<P2>
SP
(Hex20)
!
DECIMAL:
27
63
COMM?iND TYPE: Configuration 2
Can be saved.
FUNCTION
The print width setting is calculated using the current character pitch setting. The print width setting is calculated using 1/10" columns.
(Hex 21)
For example, if the current character pitch is used, the print width has been set to 136 columns, and the character pitch is 16.67 CPI, the physical printing width will be calculated as follows: 136 columns
Max. physical width (in.) =

16.67 CPI
= 8.16 in.
If 1/10" columns are used and the print width has been set to 136 columns, the physical printing width would always be 13.6 inches, regardless of the character pitch setting.
# -
HORIZONTAL TAB HANDLING

FUNCTION: Enables/disables the horizontal tab (HT) code and determines whether initial tab stops; are defined.
ASCII :
HEX :
ESC
18
I
49
73
<P2>
<P2s cP22
3F 63
DECIMAL:
CO
27
W E : Configuration 2 - Can be saved.
EQUIVALENT FIELD: 051 NOTES: If initial tab stops at every 10th or ,every 8th columns is selected, the tab stops are defined whenever the CI-DLP emulation mode is selected.
EuimmLu
SP
!
FUNCTION
The HT control code is undefined (see Field 043). The HT code is enabled; no initial tab stops set. The HT code is enabled; tab stops are defined at every 10th c o 1 . m . The HT code is enabled; tab stops are defined at every 8th colcum.
(Hex201 (Hex211 (Hex 22) (Hex 23)
"
#
S E T HORIZONTAL T A B S AND MARGINS

FUNCTION: Sets the left margin, right margin, and horizontal tab stops.
ESC 1B 27
3A
"
<CO> <Cl> . . . <Cn> <CO> <C1> . . . <Cn>

<CO> <C1>
$ 24
22
34
58
...
<Cn>
36
NOTES: Each of the CO . . . Cn parameters correspond to a column on the page. The parameters indicate whether or not a horizontal tab stop is to be set on the corresponding column, as well as set the left and right margins. A column space parameter is used to specify columns without tab or margin settings. The parameter settings perform the following functions:
SP
!
" #
(Hex201 (Hex 21) (Hex 22) (Hex 23)
Column space (no setting) Set horizontal tab stop Set left margin Set right margin
,-
The following is an example of the data structure for setting the left margin at column 4, the right margin at column 76, and tab stops at columns 5, 10, 25, and 62. Table 5-8. Horizontal Format Example Function Performed Loading Start Space Space Space LM Set HT Set Space Space Space Space HT Set Space Space Space Space HT Set Space Space Space Space HT Set Space Space Space Space RM Set Load End ASCII Characters ESC : " SP Data/PrLnt Columri
SP
SP
I)
SP SP SP SP
!
.....
SP SP SP SP
I
..
.....
SP SP SP SP 1 SP SP SP SP #
$
..
..
.....
CI-500elCII-1000e
GRAPHICS-RELATED COMMANDS
NORMAL DENSITY (DP) PLOT MODE
FUNCTION: Sets the low density graphics mode. Data
following this sequence will be treated as graphics data, until the graphics mode is reset. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B 27
5
35
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2>.. .<En>
<D2>.. . <Dn>
53
<D2>.. . <Dn>

NOTES:
Field 084 or the equivalent escape sequence determines whether the graphics mode is reset after one graphics line is printed or when the plot mode reset escape sequence is received (ESC 7). Each byte of graphics data Dl.. .Dn specifies a horizontal row of dots. The least significant bit (bit 0 ) specifies whether or not the first dot is printed, the next bit specifies whether the next dot is printed, and so on. Bit 6 is always a 1, while bit 7 is always 0. The correspondence of the graphics data byte to the graphics dot row is shown below:
Figure 5-3. Normal Plot Mode Graphics Data Each line of graphics consists of a string of graphics data, followed by a line feed (LF) code or a dot row feed code (ESC 8 <PI>). The line feed pitch is 1/72" (1 dot row), not the value specified by the LPI selection. The horizontal dot density and maximum number of dots per line depend upon the Character Pitch setting (Field 12). as follows:
,-
Table 5--9. Normal Plot Mode Dot Densities Character Pitch

Dot Pitch
Number of Dots/Line
60 DPI 70 DPI 72.5 DPI 80 DPI 90 DPI 100 DPI
984 1086 1224 1356
HIGH DENSITY (LQ) PLOT MODE
FUNCTION: Sets the high density graphics mode. Data following this sequence will be treated as graphics data, until the graphics mode is reset.
ASCII :
HEX :
ESC
IB
6
36
54
<Dl> <Dl>
<Dl>
cD2>
...<Dn>
-
<D2>.. .cDn> <D2>... <Dn>
DECIMAL:
27
NOTES: Field 084 or the equivalent escape sequence determine whether the graphics mode is reset after one graphics line is printed or when the plot mode reset escape sequence is received (ESC 7).
Each byte of graphics data Dl.. .Dn specifies a horizontal row of dots. The least significant bit (bit 0) specifies whether or not the first dot is printed, the next bit specifies whether the next dot is printed, and so on. Bit 6 is always a 1, while bit 7 is always 0. The correspondence of the graphics data byte to the graphics dot row is shown below:
Figure 5 4 . LQ Plot Mode Graphics Data
Each line of graphics consists of a string of graphics data, followed by a line feed (LF) code or a dot row feed code (ESC 8 < P I > ) . The line feed pitch is either 1/144" or 1/288", as selected by Field 34. The horizontal dot density and maximum number of dots per line depend upon the Character Pitch setting (Field 121, as follows: Table 5-10. LQ Plot Mode Dot Densities Character Pitch
Dot Pitch
120 140 145 160 180 200
Number of Dots/Line
1632 1896 1968 2172 2448 2712
DPI DPI DPI DPI DPI DPI
RESET PLOT MODE

FUNCTION: Resets the normal and high density plot modes. Data following this sequence will be treated as text data. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC
1B 27
7
37 55
NORMAL DENSITY (DP) PRINTRONIX PLOT MODE

ENQ
05
FUNCTION: Prints the dot line using the Printronix odd dot plot graphics data format. ASCII :
HEX :
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2>.. .<Dn> <D2>.. .<Dn> <D2>.. .cDn>
LF
OA 10
DECIMAL:
05
NOTES: Field 041 must be set to "P+CI ESC* or ' ' C I+I SOH' for this command to work. The plot mode resets after one line, regardless of the Field 084 setting.
The ENQ code selects the normal density graphics mode, Dl...Dn specifies a complete dot line, and the LF code terminates the graphics line. The ENQ code does not have to be at the beginning of the graphics line. It can appear anywhere in the graphics line before the line terminator. The form feed (FF) c:ode can also be used as a graphics line terminator. Each byte of graphics data specifies a six dot long row of dots. The least significant bit (bit 0 ) specifies whether the first dot is printed, bit 1 specifies whether the second dot is printed, and so on, as shown below:
Figure 5-5. Normal Density Printronix Graphics Data Bits 6 and 7 should be set to 1 and 0, respectively. After each line is printed, the printer will execute a line feed in the current dot row pitch (72 dots per inch) - - not the value specified by the LPI selection. The available dot densities are shown in Table 5-9.
HIGH DENSITY (LQ) PRINTRONIX PLOT MODE

FUNCTION: Prints the dot line using the high density Printronix graphics data format. Both even and oddnumbered dots are printed.
EOT
04 04
<Dl>. <Dl>.
. .< D n > . .<Dn>
LF ENQ < D l > . . <Dn>
LF
OA 0 5 < D l > .
. .< D n >
OA 10
<Dl>. . . <Dn>
10 05 < D l > .
. .<Dn>
NOTES: Field 0 4 1 must be set to " P + C I E S C " or "P+CI SOH" for this command to work. The plot mode resets after one line, regardless of the Field 0 8 4 setting.
The Printronix high density graphics mode doubles the horizontal dot density of the low density mode (see Table 5-11)). The vertical dot density remains at 72 DPI. To completely specify each high density dot line, two data lines must be sent for each graphics line. One line must use the EOT ( 0 4 H ) code to specify the even dot positions, while the other line must use the ENQ ( 0 5 H ) code to specify the odd dot positions, as shown below:
EOT <Dl>...<Dn> LF RNQ <Dl>...<Dn> LP
Each data line must be terminated by the LF code. Line feeds are executed at 72 DPI. The graphics data to graphics dot correlation is shown below:
Figure 5-6. High Density Printronix Graphics Data
, -
PLOT MODE EXIT PRINT POSlTION

Determines whether the print posit.ion advances to the next text line after the plot mode is exited.
FUNCTION:
ASCII : HEX : DECIW:
ESC
1B
<P2> <P22 <P2>
3F
4D 77
27 SP
!
63

EQUIVALEWP FIELD: 055
EN m y G m Advance to the next text line. Resumes printing immediately after the last dot row.
(Hex 20)
.-
(Hex211
.,,-
ROW FEED PlTCH FOR LQ PLOT MODE

Determines whether dot row feeding in the LQ plot (graphics) mode occurs in increments of 1/144' or 1/288".
PNI' UCO. 'TN
ASCII :
HEX :
ESC
18
8
38
cP2> <P2> <P2>
3F 63
DECIMAL:
27
56
COHLMND TYPE: Configuration 2 - Can be saved.
PARRMETER P2 SP
!
PAPER FEED PITCH 1/144 Inch 1/288 Inch
(Hex20) (Hex211
PLOT MODE RESET

FUNCTION: Determines whether the printer remains in the plot mode after printing one line, or returns to printing text.
ESC 1B 27
<P2> <P2> <P2>
3F
6A 106
63

- Can be saved.
NOPES: This field does not affect the Printronix plot
modes, which always reset after one line.
FUNCTION
SP
!
(Hex 20) (Hex 21)
Hold plot mode. Reset after one line.
CI-500elc1~-1000e
POSTAL BAR CODES

The CI-500e/CI-1000e's Postal Bar Codes include both FIM (Facing Identification Mark) bar codes and the Postnet bar code. The FIM codes are used to identify the type of mil, indicate whether the Postnet bar code is used, and indicate whether the address is OCR-readable: FIM m e FIM-A FIM-B Type of Mail Courtesy Reply Mail Business Reply, Penalty, and Franked Mail Business Reply, Penalty, and Franked Mail OCR-Readable Mail
Postnet Bar Code? Yes No
OCRReadable? No
No
FIM-Ca
Yes
No
FIM-Da
NO
Yes
The 5-digit Postnet bar code encodes the ZIP code and the optional checksum, as follows:
ZIP Code Optional Checksum The 9-digit Postnet bar code encodes the ZIP+4 code and the optionaL checksum, as follows:
ZIP Code Add-on (+4) code Optional Checksum The 11-digit Postnet bar code encodes the ZIP+I c'~de, the 2-digit Advanced Add-on code, and the optional checksum, as 01 lows:
ZIP Code Add-on (+4) code
10 - 1 1
Advanced Bar Code Add-on Code (last 2 numerals of the street address)
12
Optional Checksum
Figure 5-7 shows an example of the Postal Bar Codes.
FIM Pattern
CIE M y krc P.O. Box 25137 Smtm An- CJUornla927994963
Postnet Bar Code
Figure 5-7. Postal Bar Codes
BAR CODE ESCAPE SEQUENCE
The following escape sequence can be used to print one or more Postal Bar Codes on a line: ASCII:
ESC y Sx
.-
Sxl
; (
; bctype ; DPI data 1 ) ; Sx2 ; data n ) b
; (
Nn ; ; NW data 2 ) ;
...
ACD ; ; Sxn
HEX :
"
1B 7 9 Sx 38 bctype 3B DPI 3B Nn 3B 3B NW 3B 3B ACD 3B Sxl 3B 28 data 1 2 9 3B Sx2 3B 2 8 data 2 29 3B ... 3B Sxn 3B 2 8 data n 2 9 b
DECIMAL: 27 121 Sx 59 bctype 59 DPI 59 Nn 59 5 9 NW 59% ACD 59 Sxl 59 40 data 1 41 59 Sx2 59 40 data 2 41 59 . . . 59 Sxn 59 40 data n 41 98 where each Sxn;(data n) parameter group specifies the position and data for bar codes 1 through n.
All parameters must be numeric. The parameters must be entered in the order shown above. If illegal parameters are entered or if the order of these parameters is incorrect, the printer will beep and the bar code escape sequence will be ignored. This escape sequence is available in all emulation modes. An SOH (01 hexadecimall control code is substituted for the ESC code when the bar code sequence is used in the P6000-P mode or when the CI-DLP emulation mode is set to use 1 h :e Printronix Code System (Field 041). Parameters which have defaults (as indicated) can be omitted. If they are omitted, the default value tates effect. The delimiters on either side of the omitced parameters must still be included in the data stream. Substituting a NUL or space for a parameter has the same effect as omitting the parameter. The parameters are defined as follows:
--.
ESC y
The ESC (1B hex) code and the lowercase y character (79 hex) introduce the bar code escape sequence. If the printer is configu~red to use Printronix SOH control sequences (Field 041 is set to P+CI SOH), substitute an SOH (01 hex) code for the ESC code. Start Position. Defines the column positl.on at which bar code printing begins. The line position is always the current line. Sx <:an
range from 1 to the maximum number of columns available at the current CPI setting.
bctype
Bar Code Type. Selects the type of bar code, as follows:
100 101 102 103 110

111 112
FIM-A pattern FIM-B pattern FIM-C pattern FIM-D pattern Postnet bar code (5-. 9, or 11-digit) Same as 110 Same as 110
Dots Per Inch. Indicates the dot density of the bar code printing, as follows:
PEI
Value
--
fIpri2on.b.l
Yertical
PET
PEL
72 72 144 144
80 13 102.9 14 60 21 22 (default) 72
Note that the current CPI or DP/LQ mode settings do not affect the bar code dot density. Narrow Bar Width. Defines the narrow bar width in printer dots. Valid parameter values are as follows:
Ul
Narrow Bar Width 1 dot

2 dots (default)
1
2
Note: To produce a readable bar code, 1 should be used as the parameter value for Nn.
BH
Bar Code Height. Defines the height of the bar code in units of 1/12 inch.
36
..
1 2
1/12 inch 2/12 inch 36/12 inch
...
The Bar Code Height parameter is ignored if used with any of the Postal Bar Codes (the bctype paraneter is in the range 100 through 112).
I W
NarrowIWide Ratio. Defines the narrow- towide bar (or space) ratio.
LLu
2
Ratio
1:2 (default) 1:3
This parameter is ignored if used with any of the FIM Pattern bar codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 103). If used with the Postnet code (bctype = 110 112), the N/W parameter defines the bar-tospace ratio. ACD Automatic Check Digit. If used with the Postnet bar code (bctype = 110 - 1121, the ACD parameter determines whether or not the printer generates an automatic check digit. This parameter is ignored if used with any of the FIM Pattern bar codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 103).
1
Sxl.. . S m
No ACD is added. ACD is added (default).
Defines the start position in columns or each of the bar codes to be printed on th :e same line, relative to the position defined by Sx. The values for these parameters can range from 0 to the maximum number of print columns at the current CPI setting. Sxl defines the position of the first bar code on
the line, Sx2 defines the positior~ of the second bar code, and so on. Omit these parameters if only one bar code is to be printed per line.
411,,l,ll,,lllllIIIIlltIlI,,IlItl,~~!Illllll ~lllllllllltlllllllI~l~ll~,I~IlIlI~~,llI~~I~lItll
l c s x
Sxl-4
sx2-I
data l...n Bar Code Data. The strings (each up to 30 characters long) which are to be converted into bar codes, enclosed by parenthesis characters ( ) . The valid Postnet bar code data parameter length varies according to the bar code length (5, 9 or 11 digits) and the ACD parameter selections, as follows:
No. of Dlaits
5
. .
A!2R
0
ld Data LengLh 6 (5 + check digit) 5 10 (9 + check digit) 9 12 (11 t check digit 11
5 9 9 11 11
1 0 1 0 1
If ACD = 1 (automatically generate check digit), the user does not have to supply the check digit when Postnet bar code is generated. If ACD = 0 (do not automatically generate check digit), the user must calculate the correct check digit (checksum) and include it at the end of the Postnet bar code data. Omit these parameters from the command sequence if you intend to print any of the FIM Pattern bar codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 103). The lowercase b (62 hex) terminates the bar code escape sequence. Note that normal print data and bar codes can not be contained within the same data line.
ENCODING THE POSTNET BAR CODE DATA
The following procedure details how to encode the bar code data. STEP 1: Determine the starting position (Sx) for the bar code. For the purposes of this example, the starting position will be 1 inch from the left margin. In columns, this is equal tcl Sx = 1 inch x 10 CPI = 10 STEP 2 : Determine the bar code type. For the Postnet bar codes, set the parameter bctype to 110, 111, or 112 (all of which perform the same function). For the FIM patterns, set bc:type to a value between 100 and 103, deper.ding upon the FIM type. This example will print a 9-digit (ZIP + 4) bar code, so bctype = 110. Determine the dots per inch (DPI) parameter value. Only a limited number of DPI vailues produce a Postnet bar code which conforrs to Post Office specifications. The DPI values that can be used depend upon the NW parameter value as follows:
STEP 3:
2 2 2 3
3 3
11 21 31 13 23 33
60 DPI x 72 DPI 60 DPI x 144 DPI 120 DPI x 144 DPI 80 DPI x 72 DPI 80 DPI x 144 DPI 160 DPI x 144 DPI
Since a value of 21 yields a darker bar code, this example will set the DPI value to 21. STEP 4 : Select the Narrow Bar Width (Nn). Only one value produces a bar code which conforms to Post Office specifications, so Nn = 1. Determine the Narrow/Wide Ratio (NW). Since DPI has been set to 21, NW = 2 (see the table in Step 3 ) .
STEP 5:
STEP 6:
Determine the ACD value. Instead of manually calculating the automatic check digit, this example will let the printer calculate the ACD. The printer will do so if ACD = 1. Specify the zip code to be encoded into the Postnet bar code. The ZIP + 4 code in this example will encode the "92799-9963" zip code, so data = 927999963. Enter these parameter values into the escape sequence, as follows:
STEP 7:
STEP 8:
The spaces have been included for clarity; do not enter them into the actual sequence. The first example below shows how this sequence can be sent to the printer using BASIC.
SOME BASlC EXAMPLES

The following example shows how to use the BASIC LPRINT statement to encode a single 9-digit (ZIP + 4) code: LPRINT CHR$(27);"y10;110;21;1;;2;;1;(927999963)b" The following example prints multiple bar codes on a single line: LPRINT ~~~$(27);"~10;110;21;1;;2;;1;0;(927999963);40;(92714966 3)b" This example prints an FIM pattern for business reply mail : LPRINT CHR$(27);"y10;102;24;l;;;;l;b"
CI-SOOe/CI-lOOOe
-,
MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS
PRINT START
FUNCTION: Determines whether a line is printed when (1) a print start control code (CR, LF, FF, VT,l is received or (2) when the buffer is full or a print start control code is received. If method 2 is selected, either of two alternate buffer l:.mit conditions may be employed: (a) print start if buffer full, or (b) print start if one byte is received after the buffer is full.
--.
ESC
1B
0 30
48
cP2> cP2> cP2>
3F
63
27

EQUIVALENTFIELD:
026
FUNCTION
Serial/Centronics interfaces: Print start on either control code or buffer-full condition. Dataproducts interface: Print start on control code only.
SP
(Hex201
(Hex 21) (Hex 22)
Print start on control code only. Print start only on buffer-full. Print start only on buffer-full plus one byte.
(Hex 23)
RESETISAVE 'CONFIGURATION 2 SETTINGS

FUNCTION: Saves the changes made by Configuration 2
escape sequences to non-volatile memory, or resets the printer attributes to the values stored in nonvolatile memory. ASCII : ESC
1B
>
cP1> <P1>
<PI>
DECIMAL:
27
HEX :
3E 62
FUNCTION
Reset to values stored in nonvolatile memory. Save changes into non-volatile memory.
SP
!
(Hex 20) (Hex 21)
SELECT USER NUMBER

EVNCTION: Select a set-up user number and copies its
attributes into memory. ASCII :

HEX :
ESC
1B 27
<PI> <PI> <PI>
7B 123
DECIMAL:

NOTES: Changing the user number clears the attributes of the previously selected user number from working memory. Data currently in the buffer is preserved. Any special graphics mode, such as the CI-GAP4 or the optional QMS emulation mode, will be cleared. The print position is advanced to the top of form, unless the printer is already at the top of form.
This sequence is ignored if the selected user number is the same as the current user number.
CHAPTER 6 PRINTRONIX EMULATION MODES
This chapter provides instructions for using the CI-500e/ CI-1000elsPrintronix emulation modes. The chapter's three main sections are:
b
PRINTRONIX SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS How to select Printronix emulation.
PRINTRONIX P6000-P/P6000-S CONTROL CODES ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR P6000-P/P6000-SEMULATION MOIIES
The CI-500e/CI-1000emay also be controlled with soft.ware comnands. These sections describe for programmers hod to control the Printronix emulation mode.
EMULATION MODES
The Printronix emulation modes selectable via the control panel are listed below. Graphics modes are chosen through control panel setting of Printer Attribute Field 001. P6000-S EMULATION Emulates the Printronix P6000 S-Series printers. These graphics capabilities can be selected:
b
C.ITOH GAP-4 graphics (standard feature) QMS MAGNUM graphics emulation (option) IGP graphics emulation (option)
P6000-P EMULATION Emulates the Printronix P6000 P-Series printers These graphics capabilities can be selected:
b
b
C.ITOH GAP-4 graphics (standard feature) QMS MAGNUM graphics emulation (option) IGP graphics emulation (option)
CI-SOOe/CI-l000e
HOW TO SET UP THE PRINTRONIX EMULATION MODE

The control panel i& used to select emulation modes. This section lists the settings required for Printronix emulation and describes their entry. Once a User Number is set up for Printronix emulation, selecting that User Number activates the emulation. Printronix emulation is selected via the following attribute setting: Emulation Mode (Attribute Field 000) set to P6000-S or P6000-P Emulation Mode. These settings are entered as follows:
STEP 1.
Select SET-UP mode or CONFIGURATION mode. See instructions in Chapter 3 for doing this from the control panel.
STEP 2.
Select User Number Note that the attribute values for User Nun-bers 0 through 3 are stored in non-volatile memory whose contents are not lost when the printer -is turned off. User Number 4 is a "scratch" list intended for frequent, temporary changes.
STEP 3.
Select attribute Field 000 (Emulation Mode) and either the P6000-S or the P6000-P menu item, depending upon which series of Printronix printers is supported by the host computer. Other operating characteristics may be selected at this time. Otherwise, exit by pressing the QUIET/SET-UP key, which stores all values selected in this session.
STEP 4.
CI-5wcI-1oooe

ASCII - the American Standard Code for Informa.:ion Interchange - is used for most communication between microcomputers and peripheral devices such as modems, printers, and terminals. When a printer receives a number, it interprets it as a code with a meaning according to the ASCII definition. This sect,ion discusses ASCII and its extensions, and how they are used to control a printer.
Numbers may be represented using various number bases. People use decimal, or base ten. Computers commonly use base two, or binary numbering, toget-her with base sixteen, or hexadecimal. Decimal numbers between 0 and 127, when represented here in other bases, appear as a group of eight binary digits or two hexadecimal digits. For example, 12 decimal is the same as 00001100 binary; in hexadecimal form: OCH. The table below shows decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents for the first 1 6 integers:
DK!
HeX
BINARY
DEX
HEX
BINARY
ASCII CATEGORIES
ASCII defines each number from 0 to 127 as regresenting either a control code or a character code. Control codes stand for commands to the receiving device. These include such operations as carriage returns, line feeds, tabs, and so on. Character codes represent something to be printed, such as letters, numerals, punctuation marks, or other symbols. In ASCII, most code values between 32 and 1 2 7 are character codes. Appendix
A
contains ASCII code tables.
PRINTRONIX P6000-P/P6000-S CONTROL CODES

This sectiondescribeshowtheCI-500e/CI-1000eresponds to ASCII control codes when in the P6000-P or P6000-S emulation mode. The CI-500e/CI-1000e responds to single ASCII control codes and also to an extended comand set defined by escape sequences. Both types are covered here. Control codes occupy code table columns 0 and 1 and range from hexadecimal 00 to 1F. Depending upon the Field 169 selection, control codes 00 (NUL) through IF (US) can be used as a polling character when the ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected (Field 164). See Appendix C for more information. Table 6-1. P6000 Code Table
The format used to list the control codes is:
ASCII code name Hexadecimal value for the function
( -1
CAN
18H
CANCEL
Deletes the printable characters in the preceding data line and moves the print position to the left margin. Escape sequences and control codes are not cleared. The CAN code is valid only in the P6000-S emulation mode.
Description of function Any item in parentheses following a description indicates the field number of a printer cont:rol setting that may affect this conanand.
SOH
01H
START OF HEADER
-ETX
Introduces an extended Pseries control sequence. Characters following the SOH code are treated as commands. For example, the SOH 2 control sequence sets the line spacing to 1/6 inch if the printer P6000-P emulation is selected. This control code is used only in the P6000-P mode; if the P6000-S emulation is selected, the SOH code is ignored.
03H
END OF TEXT
If the ETX/ACK or ACK/NAK serial interface pr0toc:ol is selected via Field 164, the ETX code is used to mark the end of a data block sent by the host computer. See Appendix C for more information.
EOT
04H
END OF TRANSMISSION (EVEN DOT PLOT)
The EOT code introduces a line of graphics data which specifies the dots to be printed in even numbered dot columns. The EOT control code is used with the ENQ code to print high density Printronixstyle graphics. Refer to the Graphics Commands section later in this chapter for more information. This control code is valid for the P6000-P emulation only.
-- -
ENQUIRY (ODD DOT PLOT)
Introduces a line of graphics data which specifies the dots to be printed in odd umbered dot columns By itself, this command is used to print normal density graphics. The ENQ code is also used with the EOT control code to print high density graphics. Refer the Graphics Commands section later in this chapter for more information. This control code emulation mode only.
ACK
is valid
for the P60OO-P
06H
ACKNOWLEDGE
When received by the printer in the P6000-P emulation mode, the ACK code sets the line spacing to 8 lines per inch. After one line is printed, the printer resets to the previous line spacing. If the P6000-S emulation mode is selected, the ACK code is ignored by the printer. The ACK code is transmitted by the printer to the host computer if ETX/ACK or ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected via Field 050. Refer to Appendix C for more information.
BS
088
BACKSPACE
In the P6000-S emulation mode, the BS code moves the print position one character to the left, until the left margin is reached. The backspace is executed using the current character pitch and width setting. In the P6000-P emulation mode, the BS code sets double-height printing for one line. After one Line is printed, the printer resets to normal width printing.
09H
HORIZONTAL TAB
,--
Advances the print head to the next horizontal tab position. Tab positions are set by default at every eighth column or by the Horizontal Tab Set command. If the print position is at the right margin, the printer ignores the HT code.
LF
OAH
LINE FEED
.-
Prints the current line and advances the paper one line at the current line spacing and line height. In the plot mode, the paper advances one dot line.
If the P6000-P emulation mode is selected, the LF code also causes a carriage return: the print position moves to the left margin. In the P6000-S mode, Field 025 determines whether or not the LF code also causes a .carriage return. Refer to Chapter 4 for more information.
VT
OBH
VERTICAL TAB
Prints the current line and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position (P6000-S mode) or to the next vertical tab position stored in charinel 12 (P6000-P mode). In the P6000-P emulation mode, if no vertical tab stops have been set or no vertical tab stops have be set on channel 12 after the current line, the VT code causes the printer to perform a line feed. In the P6OOO-S emulation mode, if no vertical tab stops have been set, the VT code performs a line feed. If vertical tabs have been set, but no tab stops have been set after the current line, the printer advances the paper to the top of form.
-
FORM FEED
The FF code prints the current line and advances the paper to the top of the next page. The print position moves to the left margin. If the 14 channel EVFU settings have been loaded and no top of form setting has been loaded into channel 1, the FF code causes a line feed.
ODH
CARRIAGE
RgTURN
Prints the current line and moves the print position to the left margin. If Field 045 is set to "CR+LFW,a line feed is also performed. If Field 045 is set to "CR ONLY" and the P6000-P emulation mode is selected, the CR code can be used to edit the contents of the print buffer, as follows: The following examples illustrate this use of the CR code. An "s" indicates a SPACE (20 hexadecimal), a " u " indicates an underline character ( S F hexadecimal), and a "d" indicates a DEL control code (7F hexadecimal).
"m*
EXAMPLES r
1) Under1ining
First line: Second line: Printed result:
The CI-1000e "CR" sssssssuuuuuu'LFg The CI-1000e
2 ) Addition and Deletion
First line: Second line: Printed result:

SO
OHI
PrintersYnCR" Dot Matrix sssssssssssLinessssssssdd"LI?* Dot Matrix Line Printer
SHIFT OUT
In the P6000-P mode, the SO code shifts t h e character set into the Alternate Character Set (8bit code area). 7-bit codes (00-7F hexadecimal) received after the SO code character are treated as if they were 8-bit codes (80-FF hexadecimal). In effect, the printer adds 80 hexadecimal ( 128 decimal ) to all 7-bit codes received. For example, sending an " @ ' character (40 hexadecimal, 64 decimal) causes an " e m (CO hexadecimal, 1 9 2 decimal) to be printed.
In the P6000-S mode, the SO code sets the dou.3le width print mode for one line only. After one line is printed, the printer resets to normal width printing. ESC SO performs the same function.
"-.
SI
OFH
SHIFT IN
.. .
If the P6000-P emulation mode is selected, the SI code shifts the character back to the US ASCII or national character set (7-bit code area). In the P6000-S mode, the SI code sets the condensea print mode. ESC SI performs the same function.
DC1
11H
DEVICE CONTROL 1 (XON)
Causes the printer to resume reception of data after reception was halted by the DC3 code. The validity of the DC1 code is selected via Field 047.
DC2
12H
DEVICE CONTROL 2
Resets the condensed print mode. This code is valid for the P6000-S emulation mode only.
DC3
13H
DgVICE CONTROL 3 (XOFF)
After it receives the DC3 code, the printer ignores any data received and displays " [DC3] RECEIVED" on the control panel. Data reception will not resume until a DC1 code is received. The DC3 code validity is selected via Field 047.
DC4 14H
DEVICE CONTROL 4
In the P6000-S emulation mode, the DC4 code resets the double-width printing mode set by the SO or ESC SO controls.
CAN
18H
CANCEL
Deletes the printable characters in the preceding data line and moves the print position to the left margin. Escape sequences and control codes are not cleared. The CAN code is valid only in the P6000-S emulation mode.
ESC
1BH
ESCAPE
Introduces an ESC command. The ESC code is valid in the P6000-S emulation mode only.
,"-.
RS
1EH
RECORD SEPARATOR
The RS code starts the 14-Channel EVFU Loading if the Paper Instruction (PI) signal is not used. T.his control code is valid for the P6000-P mode only.
US
1FH
UNIT SEPARATOR
.
DEL
Terminates the 14-Channel EVFU Loading if the Pager Instruction (PI) line is not used. This cont~rol code is valid for the P6000-P mode only.
7FH
DELETE
Deletes the last printable character in the P6000-S emulation mode. If the P6000-P mode is selected, the DEL code prints a space, unless it is used to modify a preceding line. To use the DEL code to modify a line, Field 045 must be set to "CR ONLY". The DEL code can be used to delete characters in the preceding line as follows: First line: Second line: Printed result: Dot Matrix LinerPrintert"CRU sssssssssssssssdsssssssd'LF' Dot Matzix Line Printer
INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SEQUENCES

The basic ASCII control codes allow computer control of a limited number of basic printer operations. An expanded range of commands is provided through the use of control sequences. In the P6000-S emulation mode, all control sequences begin with the ASCII code ESC (decimal 27, hexadecimal 1B). In the P6000-P mode, most control sequences begin with the ASCII code SOH (01 decimal and hexadecimal). The appearance of an ESC or SOH code signals the receiving device that the following codes are to be interpreted together, signifying a single command from an extended command set. This allows many more commands than the limited number of single ASCII control codes permit .
NOTATION FOR CONTROL SEQUENCE DESCRIPTIONS

b
Control sequences appear on one line unless otherwise noted. In that line, groups of symbols surrounded by spaces should be read as a whole. In the example: ESC C NUL the ESC represents the ASCII code ESC, the C stands for the code for the capital letter C, and NUL stands for the ASCII NUL code.
Control sequences are presented in three equivalent formats: ASCII characters, hexadecimal values, and decimal equivalents. Programmers should choose the appropriate representation for their programming environment. When programmer-supplied values must appear in a sequence, the required parameters are indicated by enclosure in angle brackets: < >. THE ANGLE BRACKETS ARE NOT PART OF THE ESCAPE SEQUENCE. THEY ARE INCLUDED IN THE DESCRIPTION TO SEPARATE AND IDENTIFY VARIABLES.
--
Example: the sequence ESC C <n> sets the form length in lines. To set the form length to 55 lines, :send the printer the sequence 18 hex (ESC code), 43 hex (the uppercase letter C and the value 37 hex (which is 55 decimal) .
b A
control sequence may include several paramet:ers that set a feature. These control parameters are generally shown by letters other than 'Dl. For examp1e :
ESC D <TI> cT2>
...
cTn> NCTL
sets horizontal tabs according to the values TI, T2, and so on. The first tab position is at column TI, the second at column T2, and so on.
b
Escape sequences may also include a stream of da~ta. In these cases, usually indicated by a series of <D> <D> <D> symbols, each <D> represents one unit (one byte) of required data. For example:
ESC K <Nl> <N2> <Dl> <D2> <D3>
...
<Dm
where <D3> is followed by more data bytes until the last unit, < D m .
CI-500e/CI-1000e
P6000-PIS CONTROL SEQUENCES

This section describes control sequences recognized by the The CI-500e/CI-1000e in the P6000-P and P-6000-S emulation modes. Where an attribute field number is given in parentheses after a command, it indicates that the selection for that field may affect the operation of the command. The format used here is:
NAME OF COMMAND FUNCTION Escape sequence in ASCII Equivalent in Hexadecimal Equivalent in Decimal EMULATION TYPE NOTES
CI-SOOe/CI-loooe

SET BOLD PRINTING
FtJkCl!ION:
Sets bold printing. Characters following this command are boldfaced until reset by the Ca:ncel Bold Printing Command.
P6000-P MODE P6000-S MODE
SOH 01 01
G
47
ESC 1B
27
G
47 71
71
EMOLATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S. NOTES:
Super- and subscript characters can not be bolded. Bold printing does not work in the Let.ter Quality (LQ) mode or when 15 or 1 7 . 1 4 CPI characters are printed in the DP mode.
CANCEL BOLD PRINTING

FUNCTION: Resets bold printing without affecting any other character attributes. P6000-P MODE P6000-S MODE
SOH 01
01
H
48 72
ASCII : HEX: DECIMAL:
ESC
1B
27
48
72
EMUIATION MODE: P6000--P and P6000-S. NOTES: Super- and subscript characters can not be bolded. Bold printing does not work in the Letter Quality (LQ) mode or when 15 or 1 7 . 1 4 CPT characters are printed in the DP mode.
SET SHADOW PRINTINC

PUNCTION: Sets shadowed printing. P6000-P MODE P6000-S MODE
SOH 01 01
ESC
1B
45
69
45
69
27
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S.
NOTES: Printed characters are shadowed until reset. Shadowed printing is not available in the Letter Quality (LQ) print mode.
RESET SHADOW PRINTINC

FUNCTION: Resets shadowed printing without affecting other print attributes. P6000-P MODE P6000-S MODE
ASCII : HEX :
SOH 01 01
ESC
1B
46
70
46
70
DECIMAL:
27
SET CONDENSED PRINTING

FUNCTION: Sets condensed
( 17.14
CPI printing.
ESC 1B 27
SI
OF 15
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S mode only.
NOTES: In the P6000-S emulation mode, the SI control code performs the same function. Condensed printing can be set using the SOH X <Ns <M> in the P6000-P emulation mode.
RESET CONDENSED PRINTING

FUNCTION: Resets condensed (17.14 CPI) printing without resetting other attributes. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: DC2 12
18
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S mode only.
SET ELITE PRINTING

FUNCTION: Sets Elite (12 CPI) printing. P6000-P MODE ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: SOH 01 01 P6000-S MODE
M
4D
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC
1B
M
4D 77
77
DECIMAL:
27
EMULATION MODB: P6000-P and P6000-S.
RESET ELITE PRINTING

PUNCTION: Resets the Elite (12 CPI) print mode to the 10 CPI print mode (not the previously selected character pitch). P6000-P MODE ASCII: HEX : DECIMAL: SOH 01
01
P6000-S MODE P 50 80 ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC

1B
P
50 80
27
SET DOUBLE-HEIGHT PRINTING

FUNCTION:
Sets double-height (elongated) printing. The character height is reset to normal after one line is printed.
P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
SOH 01 01
ASCII :
ESC 1B
27
d 64 100
64
100
HEX : DECIMAL:
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S. NOTES:
Double-height printing is set for an entire line at a time; if the SOH d/ESC d control sequence is received anywhere within print line, that entire line is printed using double-height characters.
In the P6000-P emulation mode, the BS code can also be used to set double-height printing for one line. DOUBLE- WIDTH PRINTING
FUNCTION:
Sets and resets double width (expanded)

P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
printing.
P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE
SOH 01 01
W<N>
57 <N> 87 <N>
ESC 1B
27
W <N>
57 <N>
87 <N>
IXMUTATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S.
, double-width print mode until reset.
NOTES:
Once set, the printer will remain in the
In the P6000-S emulation mode, the ESC SO or SO command can be used to set double-width printing for one line.
Eumwmul
0 1
( H e x 30 or 00) ( H e x 31 or 01)
FUNCTION
Reset double-width printing. Set double-width printing.
,,-
SET DOUBLE-WIDTH PRINTING FOR ONE LINE
FUNCTION: Sets double-width printing. The printer automatically resets to single-width printing after one line is printed.
ASCII :
ESC
1B
27
SO
HEX :
DECIMAL:
OE
14
EMUTATION MODE: P6000-S only
NOTES: The SO code performs the same function in the P6000-S emulation mode. Only the characters received after the SO or ESC SO command are printed using double-width characters. The DC4 code resets doc.blewidth printing set with this command.
SET MIXED PRINT MODES

FUNCTION: Sets one or more of the double-width, bold,
elite, shadow, or condensed print modes.

SOH 01 01
<N>
ESC 1B
27
<N>
21 <N> 33<N>
21 cN> 33 <N>
Once set, the attributes remain in effect until reset. Parameter N is used to select the attribute(s1 and can range from decimal 0 to 63 (hex 0 to 3F), as follows:
Reset (no attributes) Elite Condensed Shadow Bold Bold, elite Bold, shadow Double-width Double-width, elite Double-width, condensed Double-width, shadow Double-width, bold Double-width, bold, elite Double-width, bold, condensed Double-width, bold, shadow
SELECT PRINT QUALITY AND PITCH

FUNCTION: Sets the print quality and print pitch
(characters per inch). P6000-P MODE ASCII : HEX: DECIMAL: SOH X cN> cM> P6000-S MODE ASCII : HEX: ESC
X cN> cM>
01 58 <N> cM> 01 88 cN> <M>
1B 58 cN> <M>
DECIMAL: 27 88 <N> cM>
ENUIATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S. NOTES:
Only one print quplity (DP, LQ, or HSD) setting can be specified for a single line.
This command must be placed at the beginning cbf a print line. Parameters N and M specify the print quality and pitch, as follows:
0 1 2
(Hex 30 or 00) (Hex31 or 01) (Hex 32 or 02)
DP (Data Processing) LQ (Letter Quality) HSD (High Speed Draft)
0 1
2
3
4
(Hex 30 (Hex 31 (Hex 32 (Hex 33 (Hex 34
or or or or or
00) 01) 02) 03) 04)
10 CPI 12 CPI 13.33 CPI 15 CPI 17.14 CPI
SET SUPERSCRIPTISUBSCRIPT PRINTING

FUNCTION: Selects super- or subscript printing. P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
SOH 01 01
S 53
83
<N>
ASCII: HEX: DECIMAL:
ESC
1B
S
53
83
<N>
<N>
<N>
<N>
27
<N>
NOTES:
EMTLATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S
Shadowed and bolded characters cannot be superscripted or subscripted.
FUNCTION
Select superscript printing Select subscript printing.
0 1
(Hex 30 or 00) (Hex 31 or 01)
RESET SUPERISUBSCRIPT PRINTING

FUNCTION:
Resets the superscript or subscript print

P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
mode.
P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE
SOH
T
54 84
ESC 1B
27
T
54 84
01
01
"-
UNDERLINING
FUNCTION: Sets/resets underlined printing. P6000-P MODE P6000-8, MODE
ASCII:
HEX :
SOH
01 01
2D
45
cN> cN> <N>
ESC
1B
2D
45
cN> cN> cN>
DECIMAL:
27
EWIATION MODE: P6000 -P and P6000-S.
NOTES: In the P6000-P emulation mode, the CR code may
also be used for underlining. See the CR control code explanation in this chapter.
0 1
(Hex 30 or 00) (Hex 31 or 01)
Reset (normal print . Set underlined printing.
OVERSCORING
FUNCTION: Sets/resets overscored printing.
-P6000-S MODE
P6000-P MODE
ASCII: HEX :
SOH
01
5F
cN> cN> cN>
ESC
1B
27
5F
<N>
cN> <N>
DECIMAL:
01 0 1
95
95
EXUTATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S.
FUNCTION
Reset (normal print). Set overscored printing.
(Hex 30 or 00) (Hex 31 or 01)
CI-500elCI-1000e

SELECT ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET
FUNCTION: Shifts the character set into the Alternate Character Set (8-bit code area).
SO OE
14
ESC
1B
4 34 52
27
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S NOTES: 7-bit codes (00-7F hexadecimal) received after
the SO code character are treated as if they were 8bit codes (80-FF hexadecimal). In effect, the printer adds 80 hexadecimal (128 decimal) to all 7-bit codes received. For example, sending an " @ " character (40 hexadecimal, 64 decimal) causes an 'en (CO hexadecimal, 192 decimal) to be printed.
In the P6000-P emulation mode, the SOH SO and SOH 4 control sequences perform the same function.
CANCEL ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET
FUNCTION: Shifts the character set back to the US
ASCII or international character set (7-bit code area)
P6000-P MODE
P6000-S MODE
SI OF
15
ESC 1B 27
5
35
55
EWUWTION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S.
NOTES: In the P6000-P emulation mode, the SOH SI and SOH 5 control sequences perform the same function.
SELECT INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SET

FUNCTION: S e l e c t s b e t w e e n t h e s t a n d a r d US A S C I I c h a r a c t e r set a n d one o f n i n e i n t e r n a t i o r i a l c h a r a c t e r
sets.
P6000-P MODE
P6000-8 MODE
<N> <N> <N> ASCII : HEX: DECIMAL: ESC
SOH
01 01
R
52
cN>
52
82
1B
27
<N>
82
<N>
EMULATION MODE: P6000-.P and P6000-S.

NOTES:
0 1
A w i d e r r a n g e ( 1 3 i n s t e a d of 1 0 ) of c h a r a c t e r sets c a n b e s e l e c t e d v i a F i e l d 0 1 4 .
FUNCTION
S e l e c t s t a n d a r d US A S C I I s e t . . French set. German s e t . B r i t i s h ( U . K ) set. Danish set. Swedish set. I t a l i a n set. Spanish set. J a p a n e s e set. French Canadian set.
2
3 4 5
6
7 8 9
(Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex
30 or 0 0 ) 31 o r 01) 32 or 0 2 ) 33 or 0 3 ) 34 o r 0 4 ) 35 o r 05) 36 o r 0 6 ) 37 or 0 7 ) 38 or 0 8 ) 39 or 0 9 )
SELECT FONT
FCTNCTION:
Selects between the resident font and any fonts on the optional font card.
ASCII:
SOH 01 01
<PI>
ASCII:
ESC
1B
<P1>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
7D sP1>
HEX:
DECIMAL:
7D <PI> 125 <PI>
125 <PI>
27
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-.S.
NOTES: The optional font card must be installed for this command to work.
mMCTION
0 1 2 3 (Hex301 (Hex 31) (Hex 32) (Hex 33) Select Select Select Select resident font. Font-1 Font-2 Font-3
LINE FEEDIPITCH COMMANDS
N 1/216' lines.
LINE FEED Nl216 INCH

FUNCTION: Feeds the paper forward
ESC
1B
J
4A
cN> <N>
<N>
27
74
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only.

NOTES:
Parameter N can range from 1 to 255 decimal (01 to FF hexadecimal).
SET 116" LINE SPACING

FUNCTION:
LPI) .
Sets the line spacing (pitch) to 1/6" (6

P6000-S MODE
P6000-P MODE
SOH
2 32
ESC
1B
2 32
01 01
50
27
50

NOTES:
The line spacing set by this control sequeince remains in effect until reset.
This command can be sent in the middle of a print line. If more than one line spacing set command is received in a single print line, the printer uses the last setting received to print the line.
SET 1/8" LINE SPACING

FUNCTION:
LPI) .
Sets the line spacing (pitch) to 1 / 8 "

P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
0
(8
P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE
SOH 01 01
ESC 1B
27
0
30
48
30
48
NOTES: This setting remains in effect until reset.
Line spacing commands can be sent in the middle of a print line. If more than one line spacing set command is received in a single print line, the printer uses the last setting received to print the line.
SET 7/72" LlNE SPACING
FUNCTION: Sets the line spacing to 7 / 7 2 " .
ASCII :
HEX :
ESC 1B
27
1
31
49
DECIMAL:
-TION
MODE: P6000-S only.
NOTES: The line spacing remains at 7 / 7 2 ' until reset. The printer uses the selected line pitch, even if this command is received in the middle of a line.
SET N/72" LINE SPACING

FUNCTION: Sets the line spacing to N/72 inches.
ASCII :
HEX :
ESC 1B
27
A 41 65
<N> <N> <N>
DECIMAL:
EMJUTION MODE: P6000-S only. NOTES: Parameter N can range from 1 to 255 decimal (01 to FF hexadecimal). This command can be sent
anywhere within a data line. The command remains in effect until reset.
SET Nf216" LINE SPACING
<N>
ESC
1B
27
33
cN>
cN>
51
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only. NOTES: Parameter N can range from 1 to 255 decimal (01 to FF hexadecimal). The command is effective any-
where in a print line and remains in effect until reset.
CI-500elCI-1000e
FORM AND VERTICAL TAB COMMANDS

FORM LENGTH SET (INCHES)
FUNCTION: Sets the form length to N inches
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC 1B 27
C
43
NUL
<N>
00 00
<N> <N>
DECIMAL:
67
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only NOTES: Parameter N can range from 1 to 24 decimal (01 to 18 hexadecimal). If N is outside this range, the form length defaults to 11 inches.
Setting the form length also sets the top of form at the current line. Changing the line spacing will not affect the form length.
FORM LENGTH SET (LINES)

FUNCTION: Sets the form length to N lines.
ASCII: HEX :
ESC 1B
--
C
43
<N> <N> <N>
DECIMAL:
27
67
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only. NOTES: N can range from 1 to 127 decimal (01 to 7F hexadecimal). The form length is set using the current line pitch. For example, if the current line pitch is set to 3 lines per inch, setting the form length to 33 lines will yield an 11 inch form.
After the form length has been set, changing the line pitch will not change the form length.
W"*
SET PERFORATION SKIP

FUNCTION: Sets the margin that the printer allows for the perforation line which separates two sheets of continuous f o m paper.
ESC
1B
27
N
4E
78
cN>
<N> <N>
EM[ILATION MODE: P6000-S only.

NOTES: The perforation skip margin is set in units of lines, using the current line pitch. Parameter cN> can range from 1 to 127 decimal (01 to 7F hexadecimal .
CANCEL PERFORATION SKIP

FUNCTION: Resets the perforation skip margin to 0.
ESC
1B
4F
79
27
EKUIATION MODE: P6000-S only.
VERTICAL TAB SET

FUNCTION:
Sets vertical tabs at the specified lines. ESC 1B 27

B
<TI> <TI> <TI>
<T2> <T2> <T2>
42
66
... .. . ...
<Tn> cTn>
<Tn>
NUL
00
00
EMULATION MODE: ~6000-s only.
Sets up to 16 vertical tab stops at lines T1 . . . Tn. The parameters are entered as decimal values, ranging from 1 to the number of the last line on the page. For example, to set the first vertical tab stop at line 33, parameter T1 would be a byte whose decimal value is 33 (hex 21), which corresponds to the ! ASCII character. Once one or more vertical tab stops have been loaded, the VT control code will cause the paper to skip to the next tab stop. Previously set tab stops are erased by this command.
NOTES:
VFU SET
FIJNCTION:
Sets vertical tabs at the specified lines, using the 8 channel VFU (Vertical Format Unit). The 8-channel VFU can be used to define up to 8 sets of vertical tabs.
ESC
1B 27
b 62
98
<N> <N> <N>
<TI> <TI> <TI>
<T2> <T2> <T2>
. .. ... ...
<Tn>
NUL
<Tn>
<Tn>
00 00
EMDLATION XODE: P6000-S only. NOTES:
Sets vertical tab stops on lines T1 . . .Tn and stores the tab stops on channel N. The channel numbers range from 0 to 7 decimal (00 to 07 hexadecimal). The values for TI.. .Tn can range from 1 to 255 decimal (00 to FF hexadecimal). Up to 16 tab stops can be stored in each channel. To store tab stops on multiple channels, repeat the command with parameter N set to a different channel number. The printer advances the paper to the top of form after it receives the VFU set command.
Once the tab stops have been set on one or more channels, the VFU Channel Select command is used to select a particular channel. Sending a Vertical Tab (VT) control code to the printer will cause the paper to skip to the next tab stop defined by the selected channel. For example, suppose that vertical tab stops have been loaded at lines 35, 45, and 55 on channel 0 and at lines 40, 50, 60 on channel 1. If channel 3 is selected and a VT code is received before line 35, the printer will advance the paper to line 35. However, if channel 1 is selected, the printer will skip to line 40 when the VT code is received. The commands to set the tab stops are as follows: ESC b 0 3 5 45 55 NUL ESC b 1 40 50 60 NUL Translating the decimal parameter values into their ASCII character equivalents would yield the following byte strings: ESC b NUL t - 7 NUL ESC b SOH ( 2 < W L
VFU CHANNEL SELECT

FUNCTION: Selects a previously defined VFU channel.
ESC
1B
27
<N>
2F
47
<N>
<N>
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only. NOTES: Parameter N is a decimal value ranging from 0 to 7 decimal (00 to 07 hexadecimal) which specifies a
previously defined VFU channel. Once-a channel. is selected, the tab stops stored in this channel by the VFU Set command can be used.
EVFU SET
E'UNCTION: Loads the EVFU (Electronic Vertical Format Unit). The EVFU load sequence is used to set the top of form and up to 13 sets of vertical tabs.
RS 1E 30
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> . . . <Dn>
<D2>
US 1F
31
...
<Dn>
<D2> . . . <Dn>
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P mode only
The codes used to load the EVEU settings while the PI line is ON use the following format: ASCII : HEX : n 6E <Dl> <Dl> <Dl> <D2> <D2> <D2>
DECIMAL: 110
NOTES:
. .. ... ...
<Dn>
<Dnr
<Dn>
o 6F 111
Use of the PI line requires the optional Dataproducts interface. Field 151 must be set to "PI/VALIDW.The values used to set vertical tabs or the top of form depend upon whether the PI line is used. as follows:
FUNCTION
DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS
A
(Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex (Hex
NUL (Hex 00)
(Hex 01) (Hex 02) (Hex 03) (Hex 04) ENQ (Hex 05) ACK (Hex-06) BEL (Hex 07) BS (Hex 08) HT (Hex 09) LF (Hex OA) VT (Hex OB) FF (Hex OC) CR (Hex OD) SOH STX ETX EOT
Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set
TOE tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab tab
on on on on on on on on on on on on on on
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
maximum of 144 channel entries can be made. line: each line has a vertical tab stop form length is 66 sent.
The channel data is organized by a Dl.. .Dn parameter which stores setting for that line. If the lines, 66 data parameters must be
Vertical tab stops are set for a particular !ine by specifying the channel code for the Dl. . .Dn parameter which corresponds to that line. For example, to set a vertical tab stop on line 10 and store the vertical tab stop in channel 2, the tenth data parameter ( D l 0 1 must be the code which sets a tab on channel 2. The channel codes are binary numbers which use the 4 least significant bits (bits 0 - 3 ) to specify the channel number. If the PI line is not used to initiate EVFU loading, bit 4 must be set to a 1; if the PI line is used, bit 4 can be 0 or 1. The printer ignores the 3 most significant bits (bits 5 - 7 ) .
EVFU CHANNEL LOADING
EVFU loading is performed in the following manner:
1. Send the Loading Start code:
RS (Hex 1 E ) - PI not used. n (Hex 6 E ) - PI is ON.
2. Load the Top of Form into Channel 1:

DLE (Hex 1 0 ) - PI not used. NUL (Hex 0 0 ) - PI is ON.
3. Load a vertical tab (VT) in a channel on each line of your form. If a 66 line form is used, 65 bytes (in addition to the byte sent in Step 2) m s : be ut sent. For example, to set a tab on line 1 0 and store that tab setting in Channel 5 , send the following:
1x4 (Hex 1 4 ) - PI not used. EOT (Hex 0 4 ) - PI is ON.
4. Send the Loading End Code:

US (Hex 1F) - PI not used. o (Hex 6F) - PI is ON.
An
example of how to load the EVFU is shown in Table
6-2.
CI-500elC1-1000e
Table 6-2. EVFU Loading Example

Line No. Start Loading 1 2 3 4
5
6 7
8
PI Not Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex
Used 1E 10
11
60 61 62 63 64 65 66
End Loading
Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex Hex
... .. ... ..
11 lB 11 1~ 11 11
Data PI Is Used PI+ Hex 6E 0OH 01H 01H OBH 01H OBH 01H
01H
Channel No. 1 2 2 12 2 12 2
2
11 11 11 1B lB 1B 11 1~
01H 0OH 01H 0BH 0BH OBH 01H PI+ Hex 6 F
... ...
2 2 2 12 12
12
2
EVFU CHANNEL SELECTION

FUNCTION:
Selects a channel in which vertical tar) or form settings have been stored and executes a vertical tab.
COHMAND TYPE: Configuration 1 EMULATION MODE: P6000-P only.
- Cannot be saved.
The Printronix 14-Channel Loading sequence is used to load the tab stops in the selected channels. If no tabs have been loaded in the selected channel, or channel 1 is selected, the printer skips to the top of form when it receives a VT code.
NOTES:
Two methods exist for selecting EVFU channels, depending upon the whether or not the PI line is used. If the PI line is not used, a channel selection code ranging from 10 to 1D hexadecimal is sent to the printer. If the PI line is used, the host computer must pull the PI signal high and send a charnel selection code ranging from 00 to OD hexadecimal. Use of the PI line requires the optional Dataprod~icts interface. Field 151 must be set to 'PI/VALTDn.
E.uuuEm
DLE (Hex 10)
I!JxsEQ PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI PI
CHANNEL
(Hex 00) (Hex 01) (Hex 02) (Hex 03) (Hex 04) (Hex 05) (Hex 06) (Hex 07) (Hex 08) (Hex 09) (Hex OA) (Hex OB) (Hex OC) (Hex OD)
DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN

ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS
(Hex 11) (Hex 12) (Hex 13) (Hex 14) (Hex 15) (Hex 16) (Hex 17) (Hex 18) (Hex 19) (Hex 1A) (Hex 1B) (Hex 1C) (Hex ID)
+ NUL + SOH + STX + ETX + EOT + ENQ + ACK
PI + BEL
+ BS +
t
+ HT + LF
+ VT
FF
CR
FUNCTION: settings .
Clears the 14-channel Printronix EVFU RS US IF

31
1E
30
If the optional Dataproducts interface is used, the PI line can be used to reset the EVFU. After the PI line is turned ON, a command of the following format clears the EVFU settings:
ASCII :
n 6E
o
6F 111
HEX :
DECIMAL: 110
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P only.
EVFU LINE COUNT FEEDING

FUNCTION: The paper can be advance from 1 to 16 lines by setting the PI line HIGH and sending the following codes:
!xu
DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK
SYN
FUNCTION
Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward forward 1 line. 2 lines. 3 lines. 4 lines. 5 lines. 6 lines. 7 lines. 8 lines. 9 lines. 10 lines. 11 lines. 12 lines. 13 lines. 14 lines. 15 lines. 16 lines.
ETB CAN
EM SUB ESC FS
GS RS US
(Hex 10) (Hex 11) (Hex 12) (Hex 13) (Hex 14) (Hex 15) (Hex 16) (Hex 17) (Hex 18) (Hex 19) (Hex 1Al (Hex 1B) (Hex 1 C ) (Hex ID) (Hex 1E) (Hex 1F)
BMULATION MODE: P6000-P only. NOTES: Line count feeding requires the Dataproducts
interface 'PI/VALID'.
option.
Field
151 must
be
set
to
Although the preceding codes have the three most significant bits (bits 5-7) set to 0, the value of these bits can be 0 or 1. The value of the four least significant bits determines the number of lines the paper is advanced.
12-CHANNEL DAVFU LOADING

FUNCTION: Loads the 12-Channel DAVFU (Direct Access Vertical Format Unit). This method is used to set up to 11 sets of vertical tabs and the top of form.
ASCII:
n 6E
<L1-6> <L7-12>. . . <L1-6> <L7-l2> <L1-6> <L7-12>. . . <L1-6> <L7-12>
0 6F
HEX :
DECIMAL: 110
<L1-6> <L7-12>.. .<L1-6> <L7-12> 111
EMULATION MODB: P6000-P and P6000-S. NOTES: This command requires the Dataproducts interface option. Field 151 must be set to "PI/VALIDm. For the command to work, the host computer must hold the Paper Instruction (PI) line high while the command is sent to the printer.
The channel data is organized by line: each line has an L1-6 and an L7-12 code (or character) which assigns top of form and vertical tab stops on channels 1 to 6 and 7 to 12, respectively.
HSB
L7-12
LSB
HSB
L1-6
LSB
CHANNELS
Figure 6-1. DAVFU Channel Data These codes are organized in a binary format. The L16 and L7-12 set codes are composed of one byte each. The two most significant digits, bits 6 and 7, can be either 0 or 1. The values of the remaining 6 bits of the L1-6 and L7-12 codes determine which channels are loaded for a particular data line. In the actual loading, the binary values of L1-6 and L7-12 codes are converted to their equivalent hex codes or ASCII characters. For example, if tab stops on a particular data line are to be loaded in channels 2 and 9, L1-6 equals 01000010 (hex 42), while L7-12 equals OlOOOlOO (hex 44).
,-
...
Note that bit 0 (channel 1) is always equal to zero when tabs are loaded. Channel 1 is reserved for the top of form setting. The remaining channels can .be used for storing tab settings. Up to 144 lines can be loaded with channel data.
DAVFU LOADING EXAMPLE
The channel data shown in the following example set bit 7 to 0 and bit 6 to 1. The loading is performed in the following order:
1. The host computer must pull the PI line high and transfer the Loading Start code.
n (Hex 6E) 2. Load the top of form (TOF) into channel 1. L1-6 = A (Hex 41) L7-12 = @ (Hex 40)
3. Load vertical tab stops into channels 2 through 12, as desired.
LoadVT in channel 2: Load V?' in channel 9: [and so on1
L1-6 = B (Hex 42) L7-12 = @ (Hex 40) L1-6 = @ (Hex 40) L7-12 = D (Hex 44)
4. Load line spaces (lines without tab settings) to the end of the form. L1-6 = @ (Hex 40) L7-12 = @ (Hex 40)
5. Transfer the Loading End code.
o (Hex 6F)
To return to printing data, the host computer must set the PI line to its low (OFF) state.
The following example illustrates DAVFU loading for: Top of form on data line 0 loaded in Channel 3 Vertical tabs on data line 3 loaded in Channels
2,3,4
Vertical tabs on data line 6 loaded i.n Channels

5,6,7
Vertical tabs on data line 9 loaded in Ct~anriels 8,9,10 Vertical tabs on data line 12 loaded in Channels 2 11 Vertical tab on data line 15 loaded in Channel 11 Vertical tab on data line 18 loaded in Channel 10 Vertical tab on data line 20 loaded into Channel 12.
CI-500e/cI-;loo0e
Table 6-3. Sample DAVFU Download
Begin
PI BIG8 + n (8ex 6B)
...
... n
(Hex 6P)
* Note that in the table above, El-6 and L7-12 r e v e a in order to show the relationship between the bits and the channels.
DAVFU CHANNEL SELECTION
DAVFU channel selection is accomplished by turning the PI signal ON (HIGH) and transmitting the following codes.
CHANNEL
NUL
SOH STX
ETX
EOT
FDJQ
ACK BEL BS
W
LF VT
(Hex 00) (Hex 01) (Hex 02) (Hex 03) (Hex 04) (Hex 05) (Hex 06) (Hex 07) (Hex081 (Hex09) (Hex OA) (Hex OBI
EMULATION NODE: P6000-P and P6000-S. NOTES: When one of the channel selection codes is
received, the printer selects the indicated channel and moves the paper to the next vertical tab stop position. The optional Dataproducts interface is required for DAVFU channel selection. Field 151 must be set to "PI/VALIDW.
RESETTING 12-CHANNEL DAVFU
FUNCTION: The DAVFU channel settings are cleared by
setting the PI line HIGH and sending a DAVFIJ load sequence without any channel data, as follows: ASCII: HEX : n
6E
o
6F 111
DECIMAL: 110
EElIJLATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S.

m S :
The channel settings are also cleared if an odd number of channel data bytes is received, or if a second Load Start code is received.
DAVFU LINE COUNT FEEDING
FUNCTION: The paper can be advanced from 1 to 15 lines by setting the PI line HIGH and sending the following codes:
.cmE
FUNCTION
(Hex 10) (Hex 11) (Hex 12) (Hex 13) (Hex 14) (Hex 15) (Hex 16) (Hex 17) (Hex 18) (Hex 19) (Hex 1A) (Hex 1B) (Hex 1C) (Hex ID) (Hex 1E) (Hex IF) No line feeding. Feed forward 1 line. Feed forward 2 lines. Feed forward 3 lines. Feed forward 4 1.ines. Feed forward 5 lines. Feed forward 6 lines. Feed forward 7 lines. Feed forward 8 lines. Feed forward 9 lines. Feed forward 10 lines. Feed forward 11 lines. Feed forward 12 lines. Feed forward 13 lines. Feed forward 14 lines. Feed forward 15 lines.
DLE El
DC2 DC3
DC4
NAK SYN ETB

CAN
EM SUB ESC FS GS
us
NOTES:
RS
EMULhTION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S.
Line count feeding requires the Dataproducts interface option.
Although the preceding codes have the three most significant bit (bits 5-7) set to 0, the value of these bits can be 0 or 1. The value of the four least significant bits determines the number of lines the paper is advanced. Bit 4 must always be 1. The optional Dataproducts interface is required for DAVFU line count feeding. Field 153 must be set to "PI/VALIDm.
CI-500elCI-1000e
HORIZONTAL POSITIONING/FORMAT COMMANDS

HORIZONTAL TAB S E T
FUNCTION: Sets horizontal tab stops at the specified
columns.
P6000-P MODE
SOH 01 01
<TI> <TI> <TI>
<T2> <T2>
44
68
.. . .. .
<Tn> <Tn>
NUL
00 00
<T2> . . . <Tn>
P6000-S MODE
ESC
1B 27
D
44
<TI> <TI> <TI>
<T2> <T2> <T2>
...
<Tn>
NUL
68
.. . .. .
<Tn> <Tn>
00 00
EMDLATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S
NOTES: Sets up to 32 horizontal tab stops at columns T1 . . .Tn. Parameters TI. ..Tn are decimal values and must be in ascending order. If an attempt to set more than 32 tab stops is made, the printer will accept the first 32 tab positions and print the tab data after the 33rd tab position.
The current character pitch setting determines the column width used to set the tab stops; changing the character pitch after tabs have been set will not change the physical position of the tab stops. This sequence erases the default tab stop settings. The default tabs are set at every eighth column when the printer is turned on or the P6000-P or P6000-S mode is selected. The tab stop settings are effective immediately.
HORIZONTAL TAB CLEAR

FUNCTION: Clears all horizontal tab stop settings.
P6000-P MODE P6000-8 MODE
NUL
ASCII :
SOH 01 01
D 44 68
ASCII:
ESC 1B
27
NUL
HEX :
DECIMAL:
00 00
HEX:
DECIMAL:
44 68
00 00
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S

NOTES: Clears both the default tab stops and the tab stops set by the ESC/SOH D command.
LEFT MARGIN SET

"-
1 6C
cN>
FUNCTION: Sets the left margin at column N
ASCII:
-
ESC 1B
27
HEX : DECIMAL:
<N> cN>
108
EMUIATION MODE: P6000-S only NOTES: The left margin is set at the column specified by parameter N, where parameter N is a decimal vslue
which can range from 0 to a number which is 2 c o l m s less than the right margin or the maximum numbel- of columns. The current character pitch settling determines the column width used to set the Left margin; changing the character pitch after the left margin has been set will not change the physical position of the margin.
Pitch
Character Max. Columns Max. 1 10 CPI

12 CPI
Columns Max. th=132
Columrls -:0 =81
13.33 CpI 15 CPI 17.14 CPI The left margin is reset when the printer is turned on or the P6000-S emulation mode is selected. The left margin can also be reset by setting N to 0.
RIGHT MARGIN SET

FUNCTION: Sets the right margin to column N.
ASCII:
ESC
1B 27
Q 51
iN> <N> <N>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
81
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only. NOTES:
Parameter N is a decimal value which ranges from 0 to 233 (or the maximum number of columns available at the current CPI and print width settings). The current character pitch setting determines the column width used to set the right margin (see Chapter 4 and the left margin set control sequence explanation). Changing the character pitch after the right margin has been set will not change the margin's physical position.
The right margin is reset when the printer is turned on or the P6000-S emulation mode is selected. The right margin can also be reset by entering 0 for parameter N.
GRAPHICS COMMANDS
--
BIT IMAGE MODE CODE REASSIGNMENT

FUNCTION: Determines what bit image mode introducer
(K, L, Y, or Z) is used to enter the various bit image modes. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B 27
?
<N>
<M>
<M>
cMr
3F
<N>
<N>
63
EMULATION MODE: P6000-S only

NOTES:
Introducer N is assigned to bit image mode number M. Parameter N can be the K, L, Y, or Z characters (hexadecimal 4B. 4C, or 59, respectively). Parameter M can take the following values:
E w mM A m L
FUNCTION
Single-density (default is K) Double-density (default is L) Double-density/speed (default is Y) Quadruple-density (default is Z)
0
1
(Hex00) (Hex01) (Hex 02 ) (Hex03)
2
3
For example, to swap thd characters used to enter the double-density and double-density/speed modes, use the following commands: ESC ? Y SOH ESC ? K STX The command to print graphics using the doubledensity bit image mode would then be: ESC Y <N1> <N2> <Dl> <D2>
...
cDn>
SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE MODE

F'UNCTION: Selects the 60 dots per inch (horizontal) graphics mode.
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC 1B 27
K 4B 75
<N1> <N1> <N1>
<N2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> . . . <Dn> <D2> <D2>
<N2> <N2>
...
<Dn>
<Dn>
DECIMAL:
...
JDWLATION MODE: P6000-S only NOTES: If the DP print quality mode is selected, the vertical dot density is 72 dots per inch; if the LQ print quality mode is selected, the vertical dot density is 144 dots per inch. See the Field 013 explanation in Chapter 4.
Each data byte (represented by <Dl>, <D2>, through <Dn> in the escape sequence) is printed as a column of eight vertically-aligned dots. Each bit in the byte directly controls whether a dot is printed or not. The high-order bit (Bit 7) is the topmost dot; the low-order bit (Bit 0) is the lowest dot. <Dl> is the first byte printed, <D2> the next to the right, and so on. A value of 1 causes a dot; a value of 0 does not. Parameters <N1> and <N2> specify how many data bytes are being sent in the sequence. The total number of bytes must not exceed the number of columns from the print position to the right edge as of start of the command. For an 8 inch printable width at 60 DPI, there can be 480 dot- columns. For 13.6 inch paper there can be 816 dot-columns. Given T, the total number of dot-columns to be printed, the decimal values of <N1> and <N2> are computed from:
1. Divide T by 256. 2. <N2> is the dividend, using integer division. 3. <N1> is T MODULO 256.
Example: for T = 300
<N2> = INT(300/256) or 1 <N1> = integer remainder of 300/256, or 44
, -
The figure below shows how the bits of each data byte correspond to dots in a column:
DOT
No.
BIT
Figure 6-2. Bit Image Mode Data Format
--
The printer automatically returns to the previoilsly commanded text mode after the number of data bytes specified in the command has been printed.
DOUBLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE MODE

FCTNCTION: Selects the 120 dots per inch (horizontal) graphics mode.
ESC 1B 27
L 4C 76
cN1> <N1> <N1>
<N2> <N2> <N2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> <D2>
... ...
<Dn>
<Dn>
<D2> . . . <Dn>

NOTES: As with the single density mode, 72 vertical dots per inch are printed in the DP print quality mode, while 144 vertical dots per inch are printed in the LQ mode. See the Field 013 explanation in Chapter 4. Parameters N1 and N2 and the data are supplied in the same format as for the normal density bit image graphic mode. The maximum number of dot-columns for this mode is twice that of the normal density mode: 960 dot colunms are supported for an 8 inch printable width, while 1632 dot-columns are supported for the 13.6 inch printable width.
DOUBLE DENSITYJDOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE MODE

FUNCTION: Selects the 120 dots per inch (horizontal) graphics mode. Graphics data is printed at twice the speed of the normal double density bit image mode.
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC 1B
27
<N1> <N1> <N1>
<N2> <N2> iN2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> <D2> <D2>
59 89
DECIMAL:
. .. . ..
... <Dn> <Dn> <Dn>

NOTES: Prints 72 vertical dots per inch in DP print quality mode and 144 vertical dots per inch in LQ
print quality mode. See the explanation for Field 013 in Chapter 4 for more information. This mode cannot print horizontally adjacent dots. Since each bit in a data byte controls a corresponding pin in the print head, this means that two successive bytes may not have corresponding bits set. For example, two sequential data bytes with value:; of 0000 0001 and 0000 0001 cannot be used, but 0000 0001 and 0000 0010 are allowed. Parameters N1 and N2 and the data are supplied in the same format as for normal density bit image graphic mode. As with the 120 DPI graphics mode, 960 dot-columns are supported for an 8 inch printable width, while 1632 dot-columns are supported for the 13.6 inch printable width.
QUADRUPLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE MODE

FUNCTION:
Selects the 240 dots per inch (horizontal) graphics mode. ASCII: ESC 1B
27
Z
5A
<N1> <N1>
<N2> <N2> <N2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> <D2> <D2>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
90 '<N1>
... . .. . ..
<Dn>
<Dn> <Dn>
MULATION MODE: NOTES:
P6000-S only.
As with the single density mode, 72 vertical dots per inch are printed in the DP print quality mode, while 144 vertical dots per inch are printed in the LQ mode. See the Field 013 explanation in Chapter 4. Parameters N1 and N2 and the data are supplied in the same format as for the normal density bit image graphic mode. The maximum number of dot-columns for this mode is twice that of the double density mode: 1920 dot columns are supported for an 8 inch printable width, while 3264 dot-columns are supported for the 13.6 inch printable width.
BIT IMAGE MODE SELECTION

FUNCPION: Selects one of four bit image modes and
then prints a line of graphics data in the selected mode. ASCII:

-
ESC
-
*
-
<M>
-
<N1> cN1>
<N2> <N2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> cD2> cD2>
. . . <Dn>
...
<Dn>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
1B 27
2A
<M>
<M>
42
<N1> <N2r
. . . <:h>
EMVIATION MODE: P6000-S only. NOTES:
Parameter M selects the bit image mode, as follows.
0 or K 1 or L 2 or Y 3 or Z
(Hex 30 (Hex 3 1 (Hex 3 2 (Hex 33
or 4B) or 4C) or 59) or SA)
Single density Double density Double density/speed Quadruple density
Refer to the appropriate bit image mode explanations for information on parameters N 1 , N2, and D l . . . D n .
FUNCTION: Prints the odd numbered dots in a graphics
line. ASCII:
HEX :
-.","
EQ N
<Dl>
<Dl>
<D2>. . c D n >
cD2>.,.cDn> cD2>.
LF
05 05
OA
10
DECIMAL:
<Dl>
. .<Dn>
EMLTI;ATION MODE: P6000--P only.
The ENQ code selects the normal density graphics mode, D l . . . E n specifies a complete dot line, and the LF code terminates the graphics line and performs a dot row feed.
NOTES:
The ENQ code does not have to be at the beginning of the graphics line. It can appear anywhere in the graphics line before the line terminator. The form feed (FF) code can also be used as a graphics line terminator.
Each byte of graphics data specifies a six dot long row of dots. The least significant bit (bit 0 ) specifies whether the first dot is printed, bit 1 specifies whether the second dot is printed, and so on, as shown below:
Figure 6-3. Odd Dot Plot Data Format Bits 6 and 7 should be set to 0 and 1, respectively. After each line is printed, the printer will execute a line feed in the current dot row pitch - - not the value specified by the LPI selection. The currently selected print quality mode (Field 013) determines the dot row feed pitch. The dot pitch is 48 DPI in the HSD mode, 72 DPI in the DP mode, and 144 DPI in the LQ mode.
EVEN DOT PLOT
FUNCTION: Prints the even numbered dots in the graphics line.
EOT 04 04
<Dl>
<Dl>
<D2>. . .<Dn> <D2>. . . <Dn> <D2>.. .<Dn>
LF
OA
10
<Dl>
EMUL&TION MODE: P6000--P only. NOTES: This command is used with the Odd Dot Plot command to print high den'sity graphics at 120 horizontal dots per inch.
To completely specify each high density dot line, two data lines must be sent for each graphics line. One line must use the EOT (04H) code to specify the even dot positions, while the other line must use the ENQ (05H) code to specify the odd dot positions, as shown below: EOT <Dl>...<Dn> LF ENQ <Dl> . . .<Dn> LF Each data line must be terminated by the LF code. After each line is printed, the printer will execute a line feed in the current dot row pitch - - not the value specified by the LPI selection. The currently selected print quality mode (Field 013) determines the dot row feed pitch. The dot pitch is 48 DPI in the HSD mode, 72 DPI in the DP mode, and 144 DPI in the LQ mode. The graphics data to graphics dot correlation is shown be1ow :
Figure 6-4. Nigh Density Plot Mode Data Format
POSTAL BAR CODES

The CI-500e/CI-1000e's Postal Bar Codes include both FIM (Facing Identification Mark) bar codes and the Postnet bar code. The FIM codes are used to identify the type of mail, indicate whether the Postnet bar code is used, and indicate whether the address is OCR-readable: Type of Mail Courtesy Reply Mail FIM-B Business Reply, Penalty, and Franked Mail Bcsiness Reply, Penalty, and Franked Mail OCR-Readable Mail Postnet Bar Code? Yes No OCRReadable? No No
FIM-Ca
Yes
No
FIM-Da
No
Yes
The 5-digit Postnet bar code encodes the ZIP code and the optional checksum, as follows:
ZIP Code Optional Checksum The 9-digit Postnet bar code encodes the ZIP44 code and the optional checksum, as follows:
niaits
Function ZIP Code Add-on ( + 4 ) code Optional Checksum
The 11-digit Postnet bar code encodes the Z l P + 4 code, the 2-digit Advanced Add-on code, and the optional checksum, as follows:
ZIP Code Add-on ( + 4 ) code
Advanced Bar Code Add-on Code ( l a s t 2 numerals of t h e s t r e e t address 1

12
Optional Checksum
Figure 6 - 5 shows an example of t h e Postal Bar Codes.
FIM Pattern
IBUSINESS REPLY MAIL

CIE America. Inc. P.O.Box 25137 Smtn Ann, Cnlltornlm 92799-9%3
Attention: MarketlnglData Entry
\
Figure 6-5.
I
Postnet Bar Code
Postal Bar Codes
BAR CODE ESCAPE SEQUENCE

The following escape sequence can be used to print one or more Postal Bar Codes on a line: ASCII: ESC y S x ; bctype ; DPI ; Nn ; ; N W ; ; A C D ; Sxl ; ( data 1 ) ; Sx2 ; ( data 2 ) ; . . . ; Sxn ; ( data n ) b 1B 79 Sx 3B 'bctype 3B DPI 3B Nn 38 3B NW 3B 3B ACD 3B Sxl 3B 28 data 1 29 3B Sx2 3B 28 data 2 29 3B . . . 3B S m 3B 28 data n 29 b
HEX :
DECIMAL: 27 121 Sx 59 bctype 59 DPI 59 Nn 59 59 NW 59 59 ACD 59 Sxl 59 40 data 1 41 59 Sx2 59 40 data 2 41 59 . . . 59 S m 59 40 data n 41 98 where each Sxn;(data n) parameter group specifies the position and data for bar codes 1 through n. All parameters must be numeric. The parameters must be entered in the order shown above. If illegal parameters are entered or if the order of these parameters is incorrect, the printer will beep and the bar code escape sequence will be ignored. This escape sequence is available in all emulation modes. An SOH (01 hexadecimal) control code is substituted for the ESC code when the bar code sequence is used in the P6000-P mode or when the CI-DLP emulation mode is set to use the Printronix Code System (Field 041). Parameters which have defaults (as indicated) can be omitted. If they are omitted, the default value takes effect. The delimiters on either side of the omitted parameters must still be included in the data stream. Substituting a NUL or space for a parameter has the same effect as omitting the parameter. The parameters are defined as follows:
ESC y
The ESC (1B hex) code and the lowercase y character (75 hex) introduce the bar code escape sequence. In the P6000-P mode, substitute an SOH (01 hex) code for the ESC code. Start Position. Defines the column position at which bar code printing begins. The line position is always the current line. Sx can
range from 1 to the maximum number of columns available at the current CPI setting
Lelt Margin
-$hllllllllllllllll,lllllllllllllllIl~IIl,ll,l,lll,
bctype
Bar Code Type. Selects the type of bar code, as follows:
100 101 102 103 110 111 112
FIM-A pattern FIM-B pattern FIM-C pattern FIM-D pattern Postnet bar code ( 5 - .. 9, or 11-digit) Same as 110 Same as 110
DPI
Dots Per Inch. Indicates the dot density of the bar code printing, as follows:
PeT
Value
Horizontal
PeT
11 60 12 72 13 80 14 102.9 21 60 22 (default) 72 23 80 24 102.9 120 31 32 144 33 160 34 205.8
Note that the current CPI or DP/LQ mode settings do not affect the bar code dot density .
Nn
Narrow Bar Width. Defines the narrow bar width in printer dots. Valid parameter values are as follows:
1 2
1 dot 2 dots (default)
Note: To produce a readable bar code, 1 should be used as the parameter value for Nn. BH Bar Code Height. Defines the height of the bar code in units of 1/12 inch. BH 1 2 Heiaht 1/12 inch 2/12 inch
..
...
36
36/12 inch
The Bar Code Height parameter is ignored if used with any of the Postal Bar Codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 112). Narrow/Wide Ratio. Defines the narrow- towide bar (or space) ratio.
Iuu
2 3
Ratio
1:2 (default) 1 :3
This parameter is ignored if used with any of the F I M Pattern bar codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 103). If used with the Postnet code (bctype = 110 1121, the N/W parameter defines the bar-tospace ratio. ACD Automatic Check Digit. If used with the Postnet bar code (bctype = 110 - 1121, the ACD parameter determines whether or not the printer generates an automatic check digit. This parameter is ignored if used with any of the F I M Pattern bar codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 103).
0 1
No ACD is added. ACD is added (default).
Sxl ...S x n
Defines the start position in columns for each of the bar codes to be printed on the same line, relative to the position defined by Sx. The values for these parameters can range from 0 to the maximum number of print columns at the current CPI setting. Sxl defines the position of the first bar code on
the line, Sx2 defines the position of the second bar code, and so on. Omit these parameters if only one bar code is to be printed per line.
Left Margin
k-sx-
a..l.l~..,l.l.,.lII~I~II~l~lll~
+l..l.,,l~l~ll~~.lll~I~II~l~III~~~,l
Sx1-d
s2I x-
data l...n Bar Code Data. The strings (each up to 30 characters long) which are to be converted into bar codes, enclosed by parenthesis characters ( ) . The valid Postnet bar code data parameter length varies according to the bar code length (5, 9 or 11 digits) and the ACD parameter selections, as follows:
. . No. of Dlaits
5 5
9 9
ALX
Yalid Data Lenath

6 (5 + check digit
11 11
0 1 0 1 0 1
5 10 (9 + check digit)
9 12 (11
t
check digit)
11
If ACD = 1 (automatically generate check digit), the user does not have to supply the check digit when Postnet bar code is generated. If ACD = 0 (do not automatically generate check digit), the user rnust calculate the correct check digit (checksum) and include it at the end of the Postnet bar code data .
Omit these parameters from the command sequence if you intend to print any of the FIM Pattern bar codes (the bctype parameter is in the range 100 through 103). b The lowercase b (62 hex) terminates the bar code escape sequence. Note that normal print data and bar codes can not be contained within the same data line.
ENCODING THE POSTNET BAR CODE DATA
The following procedure details how to encode the bar code data. STEP 1 : Determine the starting position (Sx) for the bar code. For the purposes of this example, the starting position will be 1 inch from the left margin. In columns, this is equal to Sx = 1 inch x 10 CPI = 10 STEP 2: Determine the bar code type. For the Postnet bar codes, set the parameter bctype to 110, 111, or 112 (all of which perform the same function). For the FIM patterns, set bctype to a value between 100 and 103, depending upon the FIM type. This example will print a 9-digit (ZIP + 4) bar code, so bctype = 110. Determine the dots per inch (DPI) parameter value. Only a limited number of DPI values produce a Postnet bar code which conforms to Post Office specifications. The DPI values that can be used depend upon the NW parameter value as follows:
STEP 3:
U
2
2 2
DpI
Densitv (Horizontal x Vertical)

60 DPI x 72 DPI 60 DPI x 144 DPI 120 DPI x 144 DPI 80 DPI x 72 DPI 80 DPI x 144 DPI 160 DPI x 144 DPI
3 3 3
11 21 31 13 23 33
Since a value of 21 yields a darker bar code, this example will set the DPI value to 21. STEP 4: Select the Narrow Bar Width (Nn). Only one value produces a bar code which conforms to Post Office specifications, so Nn = 1. Determine the Narrow/Wide Ratio (NW). Since DPI has been set to 21, NW = 2 (see the table in Step 3 ) .
STEP 5:
STEP 6:
Determine the ACD value. Instead of manually calculating the automatic check digit, this example will let the printer calculate! the ACD. The printer will do so if ACD = 1. Specify the zip code to be encoded into the Postnet bar code. The Z I P + 4 code in this example will encode the '92799-9963" zip code, so data = 927999963. Enter these parameter values into the escape sequence, as follows:
STEP 7:
STEP 8:
The spaces have been included for clarity; do not enter them into the actual sequence. The first example below shows how this sequence can be sent to the printer using
BASIC .
SOME BASIC EXAMPLES
The following example shows how to use the BASIC LI?RINT statement to encode a single 9-digit ( Z I P + 4) code:
LPRINT CHR$(27);'y10;110;21;1;;2;;1;(927999963)b"
The following example prints multiple bar codes on a single line:

LPRINT
CHR$(27);'y10;110;21;1;;2;;1;0;(927999963);40;(92714966
3)b' This example prints an FIM pattern for business ireply mail:
LPRINT C~R$(27);"y10;102;24;l;;;;l;b"
CI-500eICI-lOOOe
RESET PRINTER
FUNCTION:
power-up settings .
Resets the printer attributes to their. values, without affecting interface

P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE
SOH 01 01
ESC
1B
40 64
40 64
27
The print position will be advanced to the top of form, unless it is already there.
SELECT USER NUMBER

FUNCTION: Select a set-up user number and copies its attributes into memory. P 6 0 0 0 - P MODE P 6 0 0 0 - S MODE
SOH 01 01
<PI>
ESC 1B 27
<PI>
7B <PI> 123 <PI>
7B <PI> 123 <PI>
EMULATION MODE: P6000-P and P6000-S. NOTES: Changing the user number clears the attributes
of the previously selected user number from working memory. Data currently in the buffer is preserved. Any special graphics mode, such as the CI-GAP4 or the optional QMS emulation mode, will be cleared. The print position is advanced to the top of form, unless the printer is already at the top of form. This sequence is ignored if the selected user number is the same as the current user number.
CHAPTER 7 IBM EMULATION MODE

This chapter provides instructions for using the CI-SOOe/ CI-1000e's IBM Proprinter II/XL emulation mode. The chapter's three main sections are:
F
IBM EHOZATION MODE SET-UP INSTRUCTIONS. How to select the IBM Proprinter II/XL emulation.
p b
ASCII CONTROL CODES ESCAPE SEQUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION MODE TheCI-500e/CI-1000emay alsobecontrolledwith software commands. These sections describe for programmers how to control the IBM emulation mode.
CI-500elCI-1m HOW TO SET UP THE IBM EMULATION MODE

The control panel is used to select emulation modes. This section lists the settings required for Proprinter emulation and describes their entry. Once a User Number is set up for the IBM Proprinter
II/XL emulation, selecting that User Number activates
the emulation. The IBM Proprinter II/XL emulation is selected via the following attribute setting: Emulation Mode (Attribute Field 00) set to IBM Emulation Mode (the IBM PRO menu item) -- see Step 3 below) These settings are entered as follows:
STEP 1.
Select the SET-UP mode or CONFIGURATION mode. See the instructions in Chapter 3 for doing this from the control panel.
STEP 2.
Select the User Number. Note that the attribute values for User Numbers 0 through 3 are stored in non-volatile memory whose contents are not lost when the printer is turned off. User Number 4 is a "scratch" list intended for frequent, temporary changes.
STEP 3 .
Select attribute Field 000 (Emulation Mode) and the IBM PRO menu item (IBM Emulation Mode) . Other operating characteristics may be selected at this time. Otherwise, exit by pressing the SET-UP key, which stores all values selected in this session.
STEP 4 .
mm*

ASCII - the American Standard Code for 1nforrna1:ion Interchange - is used for most communication between microcomputers and peripheral devices such as modems, printers, and terminals. When a printer receives a number, it interprets it as a code with a meaning according to the ASCII definition. This section discusses ASCII and its extensions, and how they are used to control a printer.
Numbers may be represented using various number bases. People use decimal, or base ten. Computers commonly use base two, or binary numbering, together with base sixteen, or hexadecimal. Decimal numt~ers between 0 and 127, when represented here in other bases, appear as a group of eight binary digits or two hexadecimal digits. For example, 12 decimal is the same as 00001100 binary; in hexadecimal form: OCH. The table below shows decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents for the first 16 integers:
DEC
HEX
BINARY
DEC
HEX
BINARY
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ASCII CATEGORIES
8H 9H AH BH CH DH M
F'H
1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
ASCII defines each number from 0 to 127 as representing either a control code or a character code. Control codes stand for commands to the receiving device. These include such operations as carriage returns, line feeds, tabs, and so on. Character codes represent something to be printed, such as letters, numerals, punctuation marks, or other symbols. 1x1 ASCII, most code values between 32 and 127 are character codes. Appendix A contains ASCII code tables.
ASCII CONTROL CODES

This section describes how the CI-500e/CI-1000eresponds to ASCII codes when in the IBM Proprinter XL emulation mode. The CI-500e/CI-1000e responds to single ASCII control codes and also to an extended command set defined by escape sequences. Both types are covered here. Depending upon the Field 169 selection, control codes 00 ( N U L ) through 1 F (tJS) can be used as a polling character when the ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected (Field 164). See Appendix C for more information. Table 7-1. IBM Proprinter Code Table
The format used here is:
ASCII code name

Hexadecimal value for the function
I I
ESC 1BH
I
ESCAPE
Introduces an escape command. This code is used in combination with other codes in ways described later in this manual.
Description of function Any item in parentheses following a description indicates the field number of a printer cont.rol setting that may affect this command.
ETX
03H
END OF TEXT
- "
If the ETX/ACK or ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected via Field 164, the ETX code is used to mark the end of a data block sent by the host computer. See Appendix C for more information.
ACK
-*
06H
ACKNOWLEDGE
"-
The ACK code is transmitted by the printer to the host computer if ETX/ACK or ACK/NAK serial interface protocol is selected via Field 050. Refer to Appendix C for more information.
BS
O8H
BACKSPACE
Each time this command is received, the printer prints the current line and moves the print. position one character space to the left (using the current character pitch). The BS code is ignored i f the print position is at the left margin.
HT
09H HORIZONTAL TAB
Advances the print position to the next horizontal tab position. Horizontal tab positions are freely definable by the Set/Clear Horizontal Tab escape sequence, or if initialized by the Initialize Tabs escape sequence. If no tab positions have been set or if all tabs are cleared, this code is ignored. Tabs are stored using column numbers. If the character pitch changes, the absolute position will change. For example, 10 CPI provides 1/10" per column; 12 CPI spacing is 1/12" per column. Tab positions remain unchanged when the double. width print mode is set.
LF
OAH
LINE FEED
Prints out the current line and performs a single line feed. Note that if double-feed is set by ESC [ @ sequence, line feed amount is doubled. A carriage return is also performed if Field 025 is set to LF + CR. The LF code also cancels the double-width print mode (if this mode is set by the SO control code .
VT OBH
VERTICAL TAB
Prints out the current line and moves the print position to predetermined vertical tab positions which have been set by the Set/Clear Vertical Tabs escape sequence. The VT code also cancels the double-width print mode (if this mode is set by the SO control code). If no vertical tabs are set, the paper feeds one line. At power-on, no vertical tabs are set. If the double-width mode is currently in effect, it is cancelled.
-"
OCH
FORM FEED
--.
The Form Feed code prints out the current line, feeds the paper to the next top of form position (the first line of the next page), and performs a carriage return. Cancels the double-width mode set by code SO.
CR
ODH
CARRIAGE RETURN
Prints out the current line and moves the next printing position to the left margin. Also performs a line feed if Field 4 5 is set to CR+LF or Auto LF is set by the ESC 5 sequence. Also cancels the double-width print mode (set by the SO code).
SHIFT OUT
(Select Double-Width Character Mode for One Line) Sets the double-width character mode for one line. This mode is cleared by DC4, CR, CAN, LF, FF, VT, ESC W 0, or ESC [ @ codes. ESC SO performs the same function.
SI OFH
SHIFT IN
(Select Condensed Characters) Sets the condensed character mode, which prints subsequent characters at 1 7 . 1 4 CPI. This mode is cleared by a DC2 code, returning printing to 10 CPI. The SI code can also be sent as ESC SI. The SI command is ignored when received in the 12 CPI mode, 1 5 CPI mode, bold printing mode, or double-height printing mode. The condensed print mode can only be entered from the 10 CPI or proportional modes. If the SI command is received while printing 10 CPI or proportional characters in the LQ or NLQ modes, the condensed DP print mode will be set.
If the proportional print mode is entered while the condensed print mode is set, the printer w . i l l return to the condensed print mode when the proportional mode is reset.
DC1
flH
SELECT PRINTER
Resets the deselected state (set by the ESC Q SYN sequence) so that the printer can accept data from the host computer. The printer will ignore this control if it is in the select state.
DC2
12H
CLEAR CONDENSED CHARACTERS
Cancels proportional, condensed, 15 CPI, or Elite printing; resets printer to 10 CPI.

-
CLEAR DOUBLE-WIDTH CHARACTERS
Clears the double-width character mode set by an SO code.

CAN 18H CANCEL
Cancels all print data in the print buffer and cancels the SO code, but does not erase ESC sequences and other control codes.
ESC
1BH
ESCAPE
Introduces an escape command. This code is used in combination with other codes in ways described later in this manual.
INTRODUCTION TO ESCAPE SEQUENCES
The basic ASCII control codes allow computer cont.ro1 of a limited number of basic printer operations. An expanded range of commands is provided through the use of escape sequences. Escape sequences are so named because they all begin with the ASCII code ESC, represented by the number 27, which is 1B hexadecimal. Appearance of an ESC code signals the receiving device that the following codes are to be interpreted together, signifying a single command from an extended command set. This allows many more commands than the limited number of single ASCII control codes permit.
NOTATION FOR ESCAPE SEQUENCE DESCRIPTIONS
Escape sequences appear on one line unless otherwise noted. In that line, groups of symbols surrounded by spaces should be read as a whole. In the example: ESC C NUL the ESC represents the ASCII code ESC, the C stands for the code for the capital letter C, and NUL stands for the ASCII Mn code.
Escape sequences are presented in three equivalent formats: ASCII characters, hexadecimal values, and decimal equivalents. Programmers should choose the appropriate representation for their programming environment. When programer-supplied values must appear in a sequence, the required parameters are indicated by enclosure in angle brackets: c >. THE ANGLE BRACKETS ARE NOT PART OF THE ESCAPE SEQUENCE. THEY ARE INCLUDED IN THE DESCRIPTION TO SEPARATE AND IDENTIFY VARIABLES. Example: the sequence ESC C cN> sets page length. To set length at 55 lines, send the printer the sequence 1B hex (ESC code), 43 hex (the uppercase letter 'C' , ) and the value 37 hex (which is 55 decimal).
An escape sequence may include several parameters that set a feature. These control parameters are generally shown by letters other than 'D'. For example:
ESC B <TI> <T2>
...
<Tn> NUL
sets vertical tabs according to the values TI, T2, and so on. The first tab position is at line TI, the second at line T2, and so on.
b
Escape sequences may also include a stream of data. In these cases, usually indicated by a series of <D> <D> <D> symbols, each <D> represents one unit (one byte) of required data. For example: ESC L <N1> <N2> <Dl> <D2> <D3>
...
<Dn>
where <D3> is followed by more data bytes until the last date byte ( < D m ) .
ESCAPE SEOUENCES FOR IBM EMULATION MODE

This section describes escape sequences recognized by the CI-500e/CI-100Oein the IBM emulation mode. Where an attr:ibute field number is given in parentheses after a command, it indicates that the selection for that field may affect. the operation of the command.
The format used here is:
.-
NAME OF COMMAND FUNCTION Escape sequence in ASCII Equivalent in Hexadecimal Equivalent in Decimal NOTES
1
_I
CI-500elCI-lOOOe
VERTICAL POSITIONING/ACTIVITY COMMANDS

SET TOP OF FORM
FUNCTION: Sets the top of form (TOF) to the line at the print head when this code is received.

-
ESC 1B
27
-
4
34
52
SET PAGE LENGTH (INCHES)

FUNCTION: Sets the page length in inches.
ASCII:
ESC
1B
27
NUL
00 0
<N> <N> <N>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
43
67
NOTES: Sets the page length to N inches, with N in the range of 1 to 255. The line at the print head becomes the new top of form (beginning of page). This command cancels the skip perforat ion setting, but not the VT setting. When N is zero, the command will be ignored.
SET PAGE LENGTH (LINES)

FUNCTION: Sets the page length in lines.
ESC
1B
C
43
67
cN> <N> cN7
27
NOTES: Sets the page length to N lines, where N is 1 through 255, with line spacing is set by control panel setting Field 011 (Line Spacing). The current line at the print head becomes the new top of form (beginning of page). This command clears the skipperforation setting but not the vertical tabs.
SETICLEAR SKIP PERFORATION MODE

FUNCTION: Sets (or clears) automatic skipping at the
end of each page over a space equal to the selected number of lines.
SET SKIP-PERFORATION
CANCgL SKIP-PERFORATION
ESC
1B
27
N
4E
78
<N>
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC
1B
<N>
<N>
4F
79
DECIMAL:
NOTES: The sequence ESC N <N> sets the printex to
skip automatically at the end of each page over a space equal to the number N lines. The actual distance the paper is fed depends on the value set for line spacing. For example, if line spacing is set at 1/8", the sequence ESC N 3 would cause a spacing at the end of each page of 3 / 8 ' .
N can be between 1 and 255 inclusive; if N = 0, the command does nothing. A value of N greater than the form length will cause improper operation.
The sequence ESC 0 clears auto skip-perforation

If the form length (page length) value is changed after this command is entered, it cancels the value for the perforation skip that was set by this command.
SETlCLEAR VERTICAL TABS

FUNCTION: Sets (or clears) vertical tabs.
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC 1B 27
<TI> <TI> <TI>
<T2> . . . <Tn> <T2> . . . <Tn> <T2>
NUL
00
42
66
DECIMAL:
.. .
<Tn>
NOTES: The sequence ESC B , followed by vertical tab
values (the unit of measurement is lines), ending in

NUL, sets vertical tab positions to the supplied values of TI, T2, etc. Vertical tabs can then be executed by the VT code.
The ESC B NUL command sent without parameters clears all the vertical tabs; VT will then cause a line feed . Tab values are in the range of 1 to 255 lines, inclusive. All tab values are relative to the top of the page (defined as line 1). Tab settings must be provided in a series from smallest number to largest (top to bottom) for proper operation. Depending on the page length and line feed pitch, from 1 to 64 vertical tabs can be set. The ESC R code clears vertical tabs (see Miscellaneous Commands). Settings are not affected by a change in the page length.
CI-500e/CI-l000e
"-
LINE SPACING COMMANDS
Upon power-up, the line spacing value used is t.he one selected for attribute Field 011 (Line Spacing) of User Number 0 . The initial setting for Field Clll (the value as shipped from the factory) is 6 LPI. However, programmers should not assume that tt.is value will be retained after installation and subsequent user-access to the controls.
SELECT 118" LINE FEED SPACING

FUNCTION: Sets 1/8" line spacing.
ESC
1B
27
30
48
SELECT 7/72'' LINE FEED SPACING

FUNCTION: Sets 7 / 7 2 '
spacing between lines.
ASCII :
ESC
1B
27
1
31
HEX :
DECIMAL:
49
--
SELECT N1216" LINE FEED SPACING

ASCII :
HEX :
DECIMAL:
ESC
1B
-
3
33
-
<N>
cN>
--
27
51
.rN>
NOTES: Parameter N is in the range of 1 to 255.
SET N/72" LINE FEED SPACING FUNCTION: Sets line spacing to N/72 inches.
ESC 1B
27
A 41
65
<N>
<N>
<N>
NOTES: The parameter N is in the range of 1 to 85. The line spacing set by this sequence is not started until commanded by the ESC 2 sequence. Each time the ESC A sequence is used, it must be activated by sending the sequence ESC 2 (see below).
START Nl72 INCH LINE SPACING
FUNCTION: Activates the use of the line spacing value set by the ESC A sequence.

NOTES:
ESC 1B
27
32 50
If an ESC A sequence has not been received, the ESC 2 sequence resets the line spacing to the value in effect when the printer was last powered up.
SELF-CANCELLING LF PITCH
FUNCTION: Performs a single N/216" line feed.

NOTES:
ESC
1B
J 4A
74
cN> cN>
<N>
27
Parameter N is in the range of 1 to 255. Before command is performed, data in the buffer is printed. The command terminates upon line feed. If the Auto CR on LF function has been set to LF + CR (Field 251, a carriage return also is performed.
SELECTICANCEL AUTO LF UPON CARRIAGE RETURN
FUNCTION: Determines whether or not to automatically
line-feed after a carriage return. SELECT AUTOMATIC LINE FEED UPON CARRIAGE RETURN ASCII: HEX : DECIMAL: ESC
1B
27
5 35
52
SOH
01
1
CANCEL AUTOMATIC LINE FEED UPON CARRIAGE RETURN ASCII: HEX : DECIMAL: ESC
1B
NUL
35 52
00
0
27
(Cancels automatic line feed after carriage return.)
CI-500e/cI-1oooe
HORIZONTAL POSITIONING/ACTIVITY COMMANDS

SET LEFT/RIGHT MARGINS
FWiCTION:
Sets horizontal margins. ESC 1B 27
ASCII : HEX :
DECIMAL:
<Lm> <Lm>
<Rm> <Rm>
58
88
<Lm>
<Rm>
NOTES: The value of Lm sets the column number of the left margin, and Rm sets the right margin. The unit
of distance equals the reciprocal of the currently selected CPI value. For example, for 10 CPI, 1/10', and so on. Column numbers are in the range of 0 to 255. (When 0 is used, the current margin remains unchanged.) Margins are stored as absolute position values equal to the column number divided by the current character width (that is, the character pitch). Example: if left margin value is column 20 and the current character pitch setting is 10 CPI, the left margin will be at 20/10 or 2" from left edge. The right and left margins must be set so that the printable width is at least two columns (Rm - Lm > 1) in the 10 CPI mode. The right margin should not exceed the maximum number of columns permitted for a given character pitch. The maximum number of column depends upon the Print Width (Field 16) and Character Pitch (Field 12) settings, as follows: Character Pitch 10 CPI 12 CPI 15 CPI 17.14 CPI Proportional Max. Columns (Width=136) 136 163 204 233 136 Max. Columns (Width=80)
If the right margin setting exceeds the maximum number of columns, the right margin will be set at the rightmost column.
--
When proportional spacing mode is set, margins are computed using a character width of 10 CPI. The double-width character setting does not affect the margin position. Once the margins have been set, changing the character pitch setting will not move the margins (although the effective column n~unber wi 11 change).
SETICLEAR HORIZONTAL TABS

FUNCTION: Sets or clears horizontal tab values.

mS : E
ESC
1B
D
44
<TI> cT1> <TI>
cT2> cT2r cT2>
27
68
... .. . .. .
<Tn>
NUL
cTn>
<Tn>
00
SETTING TABS
Tab setting is performed from left to right using the values of T1, T2, and so on. These values specify the absolute column numbers of the tabs, calculated from the left edge of the page (not from the left margin). The leftmost column is defined as column 1. Horizontal tab positions are stored as absolute column numbers. Thus, their physical locations will change if the character pitch is changed. In proportional spacing mode, the character pitch used is 10 CPI. Tab positions are not affected by the double-width mode or by the margin settings. This sequence can be used to set up to 28 tabs. I an attempt to set more than 28 tabs is made, the additional tab values will be ignored.
CLEARING TABS
The ESC D NUL command, sent without parameters, cancels all horizontal tabs, and subsequent HT codes will not cause tabbing. The ESC R command initializes horizontal ta.bs, settings them at every eighth column (starting at column 9 .
SELECTICANCEL PROPORTIONAL SPACING MODE

FUNCTION: Proportional spacing mode provides spaces between characters that are proportional to the character width. SELECT PROPORTIONAL SPACING
ESC
1B
27
SOH
50 80
01 01
NOTES: Activates proportional spacing mode
This mode is cancelled when character pitch change commands such as DC2 or ESC : or SI are executed, or when the Cancel Proportional Spacing command is sent.
CANCEL PROPORTIONAL SPACING
ASCII :
-
ESC
1B
P
50 80
NUL
00
HEX : DECIMAL:
27
NOTES: This sequence cancels proportional spacing
CI-500e/cI-1000e~
-,-

SELECT PRINT QUALITY
FUNCTION: Selects the print quality and character set.
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC
1B
I 49
<N>
<N>
<N>
DECIMAL:
27
73
N(YPES: Allows selection of the DP (Data Processing) mode, NLQ (Near Letter Quality), or LQ (Letter Quality) characters. Also allows selection of either an internal character set or downloaded (cu:;tom designed) characters.
Printing character modes are selected by these values for parameter N:
DP : DP : NLQ :
a:
DP : DP :
NLQ :
m:
standard standard Resident (Using Sans Serif font) Resident (Using Roman font) using downloaded font using downloaded font use downloaded font use downloaded font
NLQ Download fonts (N=6) are generated from the DP download font ( N = 4 )
CI-500e/CI-1oooe CHARACTER PITCH SELECTION
SELECT 10 CPI PRINTING MODE

FUNCTION: Selects the Pica pitch (10 CPI)
ASCII:
HEX :
DC2 12 18
DECIMAL:
NOTES: Cancels the proportional spacing, 12 CPI mode, 1 5 CPI mode, and condensed mode; does not cancel double-width print.

FUNCTION: Selects the Elite pitch ( 1 2 CPI).
ESC
1B 27 3A
58
NOTES: Cancels the proportional spacing, 10 CPI mode,
1 5 CPI mode, and condensed mode; does not cancel double-width print. This sequence does not work if the double-height print mode is set.

FUNCTION: Selects 1 5 CPI printing.
ESC
1B 27
g
67 103
NOTES: Cancels the proportional spacing, 1 0 CPI mode, 1 2 CPI mode, and condensed mode; does not cancel double-width print. If the double-height print mode is set, the printer will substitute the 1 0 CPI mode for the 1 5 CPI mode.
SELECT 17.14 CPI CONDENSED PITCH PRINTING MODE

FUNCTION: Selects condensed pitch (17.14 CPI).

NOTES:
ESC
1B
SI
OF
27
15
This escape sequence performs the same function as the SI (hex OF) control code.
The ESC SI and SI commands are ignored when rec:eived in the 12 CPI mode, 15 CPI mode, bold printing m3de, or double-height printing mode. The condensed print mode can only be entered from the 10 CPI or proport ional modes. If the proportional print mode is entered while the condensed print mode is set, the printer will rezurn to the condensed print mode when the proportional mode is reset.
SELECTICANCEL EMPHASIZED PRINT MODE

FUNCTION:
Sel.ects or cancels printing wi t.h bold (emphasized) print.

CANCEL EMPHASIZED PRINT
SELECT EMPHASIZED PRINT
ESC
1B
ESC
1B
45
69
46
70
27
27
NOTES: The i.rst sequence selects the emphasized print mode (bold print) . The second sequence cancfels emphasized printing.
Emphasized printing does not work with the conden~~ed, NLQ, and LQ print modes. If an attempt is made to bold condensed print, bolded 10 CPI text will be printed instead. If an attempt is made to bold NLQ or LQ text, normal. NLQ or LQ text will be printed.
SELECTICANCEL NEAR LETTER QUALITY PRINT MODE

F'UNCTION: Selects or cancels NLQ printing SELECT NLQ
CANCEL NLQ

NOTES:
ESC 1B
27
ESC 1B 27
47 71
48
72
The first sequence sets NLQ mode; the second sequence cancels it.
SELECTICANCEL UNDERLINING PRINT MODE

FIRSCTION: Sets or clears underscoring (underlining). SELECT UNDERLINING

NOTES:
ESC 1B 27
SOH
2D
45
01
01
The printer will not underline portions of a line which has been skipped over by horizontal tabbing, character codes F4 and F5, and downloaded characters which have bits 0 and 1 of parameter B1 set to a value other than 00.
CANcgL UNDERLINING
ESC 1B 27
NUL
2D 45
00
0
NOTES: Cancels the underlining mode.
SELECTICANCEL SUPEWSUBSCRIPT PRINTING MODE
FUNCTION: Selects or cancels printing in the sugerscript (half-line elevation of characters) and sub-
script (half-line lowering of characters) modes. Superscript and subscript characters cannot be printed simultaneously. The mode chosen last is the one that is activated.
SELECT SUPERSCRIPT

NOTES:
ESC
1B
S
-
NUL
-
53
00
0
27
83
This command does not work in the double height or NLQ printing modes. If this command is received while print NLQ or LQ characters, the DP and superscript mode print modes will be set.
SELECT SUBSCRIPT

NOTES:
ESC
IB
S
53 83
SOH 01 01
27
This command does note work in the dou.~le height or NLQ printing . modes. If this cornn~and is received while print NLQ or LQ characters, the DP and superscript mode print modes will be set.
CANCEL SUPER/SUBSCRIPT
ASCII : HEX :
-
ESC
--
1B
-
54
84
DECIMAL:
27
NOTES: Cancels the superscript and subscript modes
SELECTICANCEL DOUBLE-WIDTH PRINTING MODE

FUNCTION: Selects or cancels printing of characters at double their normal width. SELECT DOUBLE-WIDTH PRINT
ESC
1B
SOH
01
57 87
27
01
CANCEL DOUBLE-WIDTH PRINT

NOTE:
ESC
1B
27
W
57
87
NUL
00 0
ESC [ @ also clears/sets the double-width character mode.
SELECT DOUBLE-WIDTH PRINTING FOR ONE LINE

FUNCTION:
Causes double width characters to be printed for the rest of the present line only. ASCII:
-
ESC 1B
27
SO
OE
14
HEX :
DECIMAL:
NOTES: This sequence sets the double-width mode. The DC4, ESC W NUL, ESC [ Q, CR, CAN, LF, FF, and VT
codes cancel this mode. The SO control code performs the same function as the ESC SO escape sequence.
SELECTICANCEL DOUBLE-HEIGHT PRINTING SELECTICANCEL DOUBLE-WIDTH PRINTING

This sequence allows printing doubleheight characters, double-width characters, or both modes at once. Line spacing may be commanded to be single, double, or unchanged from previous sett in!$.
FUNCTION:
ESC 1B 27
EOT 04 4
NUL 00 0
NUL
NUL
<N1> <:N2>
5B
40
00 0
00 <N1> <:N2>
91 64
0 cNlz <N2>
CHARACTKR HEI-
IWD LINE FEED
Byte-value Nl's lower 4 bits set character height; the upper 4 bits select line feed (line spacing) operation. Choices are: CONTROLLING LINE SPACING AND CHARACTER HEIGHT N1 VALUE: HEX / DEC OOH 01H 02H 10H 11H 12H 20H 21H 22H 00 01 02 16 17 18
32 33
RESULTING LINE SPACING unchanged unchanged unchanged single single single double double double
RESULTING CHARACTER HEIGHT unchanged normal double height unchanged normal double height unchanged normal double height
34
CHARACTER WIDTH
Byte-value N2 controls character width as follows: N2 VALUE: 01H 02H

( (
EFFECT
-
1 Decimal) 2 Decimal)
single-width printing. double-width printing.
SELECTJCANCEL OVERSCORING
FUNCTION: Selects or cancels overscoring of charac-
ters.
SELECT OVERSCORING
ESC 1B
27
SOH
01
5F 95
01
NOTES: This sequence causes overscoring of all foll-
owing spaces and characters; however, columns skipped by use of HT are not overscored, nor are graphic characters, ASCII codes F4H and FSH, or down-loaded characters whose bits 0 and 1 of parameter B1 are not 00. (See discussion of Downloading.)
CLEAR OVERSCORING
ESC 1B
27
5F
95
NUL
00
NOTES: Cancels overscoring mode.
CI-500e/cI-1oooe
",
GRAPHICS COMMANDS
SELECT NORMAL DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHIC MODE
FUNCTION: Selects 60 dot per inch (horizontal) bit
image graphic mode. ASCII: ESC 1B 27
K
4B
75
<N1> <N1> <N1>
<N2> <N2> cN2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> <D2>
<D2>
.. .
...
. ..
<Di> <Di>
- .-
HEX :
DECIMAL:
<Di>
NOTES: Each data byte (represented by <Dl>, <D2>, through <Di> in the escape sequence) is printed as a column of eight vertically-aligned dots. Each bit in the byte directly controls whether a dot is printed or not. The high-order bit (Bit 7) is the topmost dot; low-order bit (Bit 0) is the lowest dot. <Dl> is the first byte printed, <D2> the next to the right, and so on. A hit value of 1 causes a dot; a bit v3lue of 0 does not.
Parameters <N1> and <N2> specify how many data bytes are being sent in the sequence. The total number of bytes must not exceed the number of columns from the print position to the right edge as of start of the command. For 8 inch width at 60 DPI, there can be 480 (lotcolumns. For 13.6 inch paper there can be 816 tiotcolumns. Given T, the total number of dot-columns to be printed, the decimal values of <N1> and <N2> are computed from: 1. Divide T by 256. 2. <N2> is the dividend, using integer division. 3. <N1> is T MODULO 256. Example: for T = 300 <N2> = INT(300/256) or 1 <N1> = integer remainder of 300/256, or 44
The figure below shows how the bits of each data byte correspond to dots in a column:
DOT
No.
Da ta=CF
BIT
Hex
Figure 7-1. Graphics Data Format The printer automatically returns to the previously commanded text mode after the number of data bytes specified in the command has been printed. The printer will not Eeed paper if the line buffer overflows.
SELECT 120 DPI BIT IMAGE GRAPHIC MODE

FU!?CTIONa
This mode prints at twice the normal 60 dots per inch density but at half the normal speed. ESC 1B
27
ASCII:
L
4C 76
<N1> <N1> <Nl>
<N2> <N2> <N2>
<Dl> <Dl>
<Dl>
<D2> <D2> <D2>
HEX :
DECIMAL:
... ... . ..
<I)i>
<I)i>
<T)i>
NOTES: Parameters N1 and N2 and the data are supplied in the same format as for normal density bit image graphic mode.
The maximum number of dot-columns for the 120 DPI graphics mode is twice that of the normal density mode: 960 dot-columns are supported for an 8 inch printable width, while 1632 dot-columns are suppc~rted for the 13.6 inch printable width.
SELECT 120 (HALF) DPI BIT IMAGE GRAPHIC MODE

FUNCTION: This mode prints at twice the normal den-
sity and at normal speed. ASCII: HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B

Y
59 89
<N1> <N1>
<N2> <N2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> <D2> <D2>
27
<N1>' <N2>
... ... ...
<Eli>
- -
cCi> cCi>
NOTES: This mode cannot print horizontally adjacent
dots. Since each bit in a data byte contro:.~ a corresponding pin in the print head, this means that two successive bytes may not have corresponding bits set. For example, two sequential data bytes dith values of 0000 0001 and 0000 0001 cannot be used, but 0000 0001 and 0000 0010 are allowed. Parameters N1 and N2 and the data are supplied in the same format as for normal density bit image graphic mode. As with the 120 DPI graphics mode, 960 dotcolumns are supported for an 8 inch printable width, while 1632 dot-columns are supported for the 13.6 inch printable width.
SELECT 240 DPI BIT IMAGE GRAPHIC MODE

E'UNCTION: This mode prints at four times the normal density and at half normal speed.
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC 1B 27
<N1> <N1>
<N1>
<N2> <N2> <N2>
<Dl> <Dl> <Dl>
<D2> . . . <Di> <D2> . . . <Di> <D2>
5A
90
DECIMAL:
...
<Di>
NOTES: Like 120 (Half) DPI mode, this mode cannot
print horizontally adjacent dots. Two successive bytes may not have corresponding bits set. (Refer to the description of the 120 (Half) DPI mode.) Parameters N1 and N2 and the data are supplied in the same format as for normal density bit image graphic mode. The maximum number of dot-columns for the 240 DPI graphics mode is four times that of the normal density mode: 1920 dot-columns are supported for an 8 inch printable width, while 3264 dot-columns are supported for the 13.6 inch printable width.
The CI-500e/CI-1000ecomes with several printing font!;. It can also accept custom fonts sent by the host computer. This section describes how to download and use customdesi.gned characters, and how to select alternate character sets for printing.
BASICS OF CHARACTER GENERATION: DOWNLOADING CHARACTERS
Normally, the CI-500e/CI-1000eprints using one of se\.eral internally stored, fixed fonts. Each printing data value selects a character pattern from a character generator ROM . Flexibility is provided by several escape sequences that allow printing with one of several alternate character sets in the ROM. Available graphic sets include English, non-English, and IBM-standard symbols.
TheCI-500e/CI-1000eadditionallycanemployupto256cser-
supplied, custom-designed characters for both the DP/NLC! and LQ modes. The Define Download Character escape sequence can contain patterns for the printer to store in a RAM buffer. Once the character pattern data is downloaded, the escape sequence Select Print Quality controls switching from normal fonts to the user-supplied fonts and back as often as required. This provides flexibility for printing foreign-language characters, special emphasized characters, or custom symbols. The downloaded characters are stored in RAM until the printer is turned off. Changing the emulation mode and selecting a graphic mode (such as the CI-GAP4 mode) will also erase downloaded characters.
STRUCTURE OF DOWNLOADED CHARACTERS

The CI-500e/CI-1000esupports downloading into the DP/NLQ or LQ font areas. (Selection is via the ESC I sequence.) Selecting the DP or NLQ downloaded font will invoke the DP downloaded font.
DP/NLQ characters are 8 x 11 dot-matrices, existing within a 9 x 12 dot cell. Columns 1 through 11 are defined by user-supplied patterns, while column 12 is not specified since it is always blank. Characters defined as ascending are printed in the top 8 out of 9 rows in the character matrix; descending characters are printed in the bottom 8 rows.
LQ characters are 16 x 23 dot-matrices in a 18 x 24 dot cell. Columns 1 through 23 are defined by the user, while column 24 is always blank and is not specified. Ascending characters are printed in the top 16 rows of the character matrix, while descending characters use the bottom 16 rows of the 18-row character matrix.
The following figure illustrates the aspects of character matrices:

COLUMNS
1 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ROWS
Ascending Characters occupy these upper eight rows
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2
3 4 5 6 7 8
0
Descending Characters occupy these lower eight rows Column 12 is always blank
Columns 1 through 11 can have dots
Figure 7-2. The Cell-Matrix For a DP/NLQ Character
COLUMNS
1
11 13 15 17 19 21 23
ROWS
Ascending occupy these sixteen rows
1 5
7 g
00000000 000000000000000 ooooo 0 0 8 000 000 0 0 00
888888%88888888888!888 00 00000000000000000 0 . 00 X88888888888888X88g88Q88
88888888888888888888~888 ooooooooooooooooo8ooooo oooooooooooooooooooo8ooo

000000000000000000000000 888888888888888880888088
11 13
I5
17
888888888888888888888888 000000000000000000000 0 0
ooooooooooooooooooooo8oo
Descencling Characters occupy these lower sixteen rows
Columns 1 through 23 can have dots
Column 24 is always blank
Figure 7-3. The Cell-Matrix For an LQ Character
DESIGNING AND ENCODING DOWNLOADABLE DPJNLQ CHARACTERS

Each user-supplied character must be represented in the downloading escape sequence by a group of two at t r :i bute bytes and eleven data pattern bytes. There are three steps in designing characters and converting the patterns into downloadable information:
STEP 1 .
DECIDE WHETHER A CHARACTER WILL BE AN ASCENDING OH DESCENDING CHARACTER.
Attribute Byte 1 must be set to correspond to the desired position.

STEP 2.
CREATE THE CHARACTER DOT PATTERN WITHIN AN 8 X 1 1 MATRIX.
For example:
Figure 7-4. DP/NLQ Dot Pattern Example
Typically, uppercase characters need only the top seven dot rows. Normal character spacing can be achieved by leaving columns 10 through 12 blank.
STEP 3.
TRANSLATE THE DOT PATTERNS INTO DATA:
Each of the 11 columns in a character has a binary numeric equivalent. Regardless of whether a column is in an ascending character occupying the top eight rows of the dot rnatrix, or a descending character using the lower eight rows, the value is computed in the same way: 1. Convert the bit-pattern of a character-column into an eight-bit number by considering the column's top row to be the number's most significant bit, the next lower the next bit, down through the bottom row as the least significant bit.
2. For a row-dot to be printed there must be a one in the appropriate position of the binary value. A non-printing dot-row is set by a zero in the appropriate position.
3. The computed value of the number is the sum of the binary weights of those bits having values of one. The MSB has a value of 2 - 7 or 128; the LSB has a value of 2^0 or 1.
These rules are applied in the Eollowing example:
TOP DOT
I
MSB
.
0 0
0 0 0
LSB
Figure 7-5. Computing Data For a Character Column If this column were the first (left most) in a character, the first of the eleven pattern data bytes would be the value 134 decimal.
DESIGNING AND ENCODING DOWNLOADABLE LQ CHARACTERS

Each user-supplied character must be represented in the downloading escape sequence by a group of two attribute bytes and forty-six data pattern bytes. There are three steps in designing characters and converting the patterns into downloadable informatio11:
STEP 1.
DECIDE WHETHER A CHARACTER WILL BE AN ASCENDING OR DESCENDING CHARACTER.
Attribute Byte 1 must be set to correspond to the desired position.

. .
STEP 2 .
CREATE THE CHARACTER DOT PATTERN WITHIN AN 16 X 23 MATRIX.
For example:
Figure 7-6. LQ Dot Pattern Example Typically, uppercase characters need only the top thirteen dot rows. Normal character spacing can be achieved by leaving columns 19 through 24 blank.
STEP 3 .
*-
",-.
TRANSLJATE THE DOT PATTERNS I N T O
DATA:
Each of the 23 columns in a character has a bir.,ary numeric equivalent which 1s represented using two bytes. Regardless of whether a column is in an ascending character occupying the top sixteen rows of the dot matrix, or a descending character using the lower sixteen rows, the value is computed in the same
way :
1. Counting from the top, separate the 16 dot high character-column into even and odd dots, so that the dot pattern is broken into two 8 dot high groups.
2. Convert the bit-pattern of each group into an eight-bit number by considering the col~unn'stop row to be the number's most significant bit, the next lower the next bit, down through the bottom row as the least significant bit.
3. For 3 row-dot to be printed there must be a one in the appropriate position of the binary value. A non-printing dot-row is set by a zero in the appropriate position.
4. The computed value of each number is the sum ot the
binary weights of those bits having values of one. The MSB has a value of 2 ^ 7 or 128; the LSB has a value of 2 - 0 or 1. These rules are applied in the following example:
Character Dot-Column
.L.
Odd Dots
Even Dots
I
J
MSB ..-lx
1 x
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
MSB
,
, - - O x
:,
.
LSB
0 0 0
u -
. .
. .
.
= 192D
0 0 -
0 0
O x
0 x
1
. LSBO0 -
u -
1 x 128 = 128 64= 0 O x 32= 0 O x 16= 0 O x 8 = 0 O x 4 = 0 o x 2 = 0

O X
1 =
11000000
or COH
Figure 7-7. Computing Data ?or a Character Column If this column were the first (left most) in a character, the first two bytes of the forty six data bytes would be the values 192 128 decimal, or CO 80 hexadecimal.
CI-5wCI-1000e
DEFINE DOWNLOAD CHARACTER CODE

The sequence described below commands the printex to begin accepting downloaded Data Processing/Near Letter Quality (DP/NLQ) or LQ print mode character patterns for storage in RAM character buffer memory. The escape sequence ESC I cN> must be sent first; to select whether DP/NLQ or LQ characters are being used. The download sequence structure is the same whel;her DP/NLQ or LQ characters are involved; only the amount of data will differ. Undefined characters will be automatically replaced by the CI-500e/CI-1000echaracter generator ROM contents.
--
Download characters are defined by an escape sequence with 5 major elements:
Item : -1 Download Sequence Identifier
1 I I
: Item 3 Print Type (Print Quality)
-2 Item :
Character Definition Data (repeated for each character)
Item 2 : Data Length Parameter
Item -2: Character S e t Start Address
Parameter values to be included in an item are skown within angle brackets: < >. The brackets identify parameters and are NOT included in the actual data.
CI-500elCI-1oooe
The five major items are described on the next pages: ESC = Narne~Download Sequence Identifier Descrl~tlQn; Begins the download process.
Value:
ASCII: HEX : ESC 1B
=
3D 61
DECIMAL: 27 <N1> <N2>
Name: Data Length Parameters pescri~tion: Number of bytes to be sent, computed using one of the following formulas: If downloading DP/NLQ characters: NB = 2 + (13 x Number of characters)
If downloading LQ characters:
NB = 2 + ( 4 8 x Number of characters)
The lower byte <N1> and the high byte <N2> are computed from NB using integer arithmetic as follows: Divide NB by 256. The integer dividend is <N2> and the integer remainder (which is the same as NB modulo 256) is <N1>.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------for 10 DP/NLQ characters,
<N2> = INT(NB/256) = 132/256,or 0 decirral. <N1> = MOD(NB/2561 = 132 decimal. (integer remainder of integer division 132/256 is 132 decimal) le B: for 30 DP/NLQ characters,
.-
<N2> = integer dividend of NB/256 = 392/256, or 1 decimal. <N1> = integer remainder of 392/256, or 136 decimal.
..
<T>
Name: Print Type/Print Quality Parameter . . Descrlotlgn: This parameter identifies the
character area to receive downloaded datis. A value of 14H (ASCII code DC4, or20 decimal) for this parameter identifies downloading into the DP/NLQ area. A value of 15H (ASCII code 21 decimal) identifies LQ downloading. <A> Character Set Start Address
A -
. l ~ t.i o n : This one-byte parameter selects the beginning character number for downloading data .
yalue: The range is 0 to 255. For example, to download characters into codes starting with the ASCII code 'S' set this parameter equal to the number of code 'S',which is 83 decimal or 53H.
<B1> <B2> <Dl> . . . <D end> &me; Character Definition Data Bescrwion: This structure is repeated for each character to be downloaded. For DP/NLQ characters there are 2 Attribute Bytes plus 11 data bytes, totalling 13 bytes per character, while for LQ characters there are 2 Attribute Bytes plus 46 data bytes for a total of 48 bytes per character.
<B1>
me^ Attribute Byte 1
Descri~tion: The bits of this byte are set as follows:
Set = 0 if ascending character; set = 1 if descending. Must be enabled by value of 00 for bits 1&0.
6 through 2 - always set to zero.

1 & 0 These bits act as follows:
00 01
Enables action of bit (ascender/descender).
Disables action of bit 7. Used for line-oriented characters. For DP, dots in row 8 are duplicated in rows 9 through 12. Provides twopass printing; first pass rows 1-8; second pass rows 9-12. For NLQ, duplicates row 15 in rows 17. 19, 21, and 23: duplicates row 16 in rows 18, 20, 22, and 24.
10
For shading characters l ike #I76 through 178.
For DP/NLQ, lowest dots of columr~s1 through 4 are repeated in rows 9 through 12. Two print passes are made; first prints rows 5 through 9; second prints rows 1 through 4. For LQ, repeats top dot of rows 1, 4, 5, and 7 in rows 17, 19, 21, and 23.
Name: Attribute Byte 2

DescrlDtlon: The bits of this byte
are set as follows:

If <B2> = 0, proportional spacing is disabled .
No function.
6-4 3-bit binary number giving rightward offset of first byte to be printed. 3-0 4-bit binary number defining character width. The total width, defined as the sum of this value and the print start position given by bits 6-4, is limited to 11. <Dl>.. .<D11> (for DP/NLQ data) or <Dl>.. . <D46> (for LQ data)
Name: Character Pattern Data
Descri~tios: The columrl data is encoded as previously described. For DP/NLQ characters, there are 1 1 bytes per character (one byte per column of dots). For LQ characters there are two bytes for each dot-column. The first byte describes the pattern to be printed on the first printing pass; the second byte describes the patterns for the second printing pass. This two-byte sequence is repeated 23 times . Example: Byte 1: byte data for pass one of column 1; Byte 2: byte data for pass two of column 1 ; Byte 3: byte data for pass one of column 2; Byte 4: byte data for pass two of column 2; and so on. Column 24 of each LQ character is always (automatically) made blank and is not specifiable. No sequence terminator is required, since the Data Length parameter defines the total length of the data section of the sequence. Thus the command ends when all the data has been transmitted.
"a-
Additional sequences for character set control are:

SELECT CHARACTER SET 1
FUNCTION:
Causes printing with Character Set 1 , containing English language characters and symbols. ESC 1B 27
7
37
55
SELECT CHARACTER SET 2

FUNCTION: Causes printing with Character Set 2, con--
taining characters and symbols from non-Engl.ish languages. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B
27
6
36
54
SELECT "ALL CHARACTERS" PRINT MODE 1

FUNCTION: Causes the specified number of charact:ers
from the All Characters chart to be printed. ASCII :

HEX :
ESC
1 8
<N1>
<N2> <N2> <N2>
5C 92
cN1> <N1>
DECIMAL:
27
NOTES: The number of characters to be printed i s specified by parameters <N1> c N 2 > :
<N2> = number of characters / 256 <N1> = remainder For example, to print 530 characters: 530
/ 256 = 2 with
remainder of 18
<N1> = 18 and <N2> = 2
SELECT " ~ L L CHARACTERS" PRINT MODE 2

FUNCTION: Causes the printer to print the character
following this command using the font description shown in All Characters chart. ASCII : HEX : DECIMAL: ESC 1B
27
A
5E
94
NOTES: This command afects only the following char -
acter, and after printing of that character, printing resumes with the font previously in effect.
SELECT FONT
FUNCTION: Selects between the printer's resident font and any fonts stored on an optional font module.
ESC 1B
27
<N>
7D 125
<N> <N>
NOTES: Setting N to 0 selects the resident font; setting N to 1 through 15 selects one of the optional
fonts, depending upon the fonts which are available on the optional font module.
SELECT CODE PAGE

FUNCTION: Selects the IBM Code page character set.
ASCII:
HEX :
ESC
EY (T
04 04
NUL
NUL
NUL
<N1> <la>
1B 5B
27 91
54 84
00 00
00 00
00 <N1> <W2>
DECIMAL:
00 <N1> <1\J2>
NOTES: Code Page 990 is not a standard IBM character set. Selecting Code 990 will select the IBM Chara'zter Set 1' or Character Set 2', depending upon whether Field 014 is set to Set 1 or Set 2.
N1 and N2 can take the following values:
181
82
1
3 3
92 95 97 222
3 3 3
Code Code Code Code Code Code
437 850 860 863 865 990
(U.S.A)
(Multilingual) (Portugal) (Canada-French) (Norway) (Set 1'/2')
CI-500elCI-1000e
SELECT USER NUMBER
FUNCTION:
Selects User Ntrmber list of attributes to use for printing. ESC

1B 27
{
<N> <N> <N>
7B 123
NOTES: Allows the host to select the User Number whose list of attributes is used to control printing. The specified User Number tN> is in the range 0 to 4.
To prevent communication disruption, communications parameters from the presently active User Number list are copied and used as working parameters for the selected list. That is, the communications parameters on the newly selected User Number list are ignored (and the stored values left unchanged). For example, if the current User Number is 1 and it is using serial communications, and the host computer selects User Number 2 containing parallel communications parameters, the printer wi 11 use the printing attributes of User Number 2 with the serial communications parameters of User Number 1.
INITIALIZE TABS
FUNCTION: Clears all tabs to the ones set on power on

NOTES:
ESC
1B
27
52
82
Horizontal tabs are initialized to tabs at every 8th column, beginning at the 9th column. All vertical tabs are cleared; VT causes a line feed.
'-
DESELECT PRINTER
FUNCTION: Deselects the printer (sets the SELECT signal LOW). The printer is reselected by sending the DC1 control code. ASCII:
HEX :
ESC
1B
27
Q
51
SYN
16
22
DECIMAL:
81
CHAPTER 8 ALARMS AND MAINTENANCE
This chapter describes printer alarms and recommerlded user responses. It also covers routine maintenance a i a rd limited level of troubleshooting.
ALARMS
When an abnormal condition arises in the printer, the control panel's Alarm Indicator lights or flashes. At the same time a tone sounds and the display window shows the code number for the corresponding alarm. The cause of the alarm must be corrected before printing can start or resume. For example, i f the printer runs out of paper, the resulting alarm halts printing. When paper is supplied, printing can resume once the ONLINE key is pressed.
ALARM EXAMPLE
Figure 8-1 below shows an example of an alarm message :
POWER
==
ON LINE == ALARM m .
7
AL:Ol
Top Cover
I
Alarm Message Number of Alarm
blinking or
steady
I Alarm
Figure 8-1. Format for Alarm Messages
ENABLING OF ALARMS
Display of the following alarms may be disabled by setting corresponding printer attribute fields: Paper Jam; Head Coil; Ribbon. Refer to information given in Chapter 4 listing of Fields 120 through 125.
MULTIPLE ALARMS
When several alarms occur at the same time, they are displayed alternately for periods of time set by printer attribute Field 120. (See Chapter 4 listings.)
--
ALARM LIST
The following list describes Alarm Codes 01-19 and 23, and recommended corrective actions. Alarm Codes 2022 and 24-69 are described in the Maintenance Manual; if these codes appear, refer the printer for servicing. The format for this section is: ALARM NUMBER
01
DISPLAY MESSAGE
CAUSE: Cause of alarm

REblEDY:
Suggested action
ALARMS
01
~ o po v e r C
CAUSE:
Top Cover is open. Close the top cover.
--
IWWZDY: mTrES:
I f the cover is opened during printing, print ing stops. When the cover is closed, the printer resumes printing.
If the cover is opened when the printer is offline, all control panel keys except ONLINE are enabled (are usable). If the cover is opened when the printer is online, the printer goes offline; when the cover is reclosed, the printer remains offline.
02
P a p e r Out
CAUSE: The printer has run out of paper. Depending on the Field 147 setting, the Centronics interface FAULT
signal is sent to the host computer.

REMEDY: Load more paper.
03
P l a t e n Open
CAUSE: The paper adjustment lever is OPEN.

REMEDY:
Set the paper adjustment lever to position
"1" if you are using single part word processing and
computer paper; for multi-part forms or thick paper, set the lever to the appropriate position.
-
04
PS C o o l i n g CAUSE: The power supply has not cooled down to a safe
operating temperature.
REMEDY:
This alarm occurs only when the printer has just been turned on and the condition exists. The alarm ceases when the power supply cools down to a safe operating temperature.
-
05
Power Hot
CAUSE: The printer has stopped printing because the
power supply temperature has risen past the safe operating limit.
RIMEDY:
Printing will resume when the power supply temperature has dropped to the safe operating range.
NOTES:
For safety, the control panel keys are disabled when this alarm occurs.
Head H o t
06
CAUSE: The Printer has stopped printing because the
print head temperature is above the safe operating range.

RKMBDY:.
Printing will resume when the print head has cooled down to the safe operating range.
07
H. Driv H o t
CAUSE: The head pin driver is getting hot.

RElaEDY:
This alarm ceases when the head pin driver temperature has dropped to the safe operating range.
PFDM H o t
08
CAUSE: The paper feed motor drive IC is getting hot.
This alarm ceases when the paper feed mot:or driver IC temperature has dropped to the safe operating range.
REMEDY:
09
,,-
Front Cover
CAUSE: The front door is open.

REMEDY: Close the front door.
NOTES: If the door is opened during printing, print-
ing stops. When the door is closed, the printer resumes printing.
If the door is opened when the printer is offlire, all control panel keys except the ONLINE key are usable.
If the door is opened when the printer is online, the printer goes offline; when the door is closed, printer remains offline.
10
11
Unused
Reserved
P a p e r Jam
CAUSE: The paper is jammed.

REMEDY: Remove the jam. Make sure the paper can move
freely. When finished and the cover is closed, press the RESET key.
12
Ribbon Jam
CAUSE: The ribbon is jammed.
REMEDY: Free the ribbon from the jam; make sure it can move freely. When finished and the cover is closed,,pressthe RESET key.
If the ribbon is folded, scratched, or obviously damaged, replace it with a new ribbon.
14
D A W Err.
CAUSE: Loading cannot be done properly, due to DAVFIl or VT error.
REMEDY: Check the program. Press RESET to clear the error.
CAUSE: Skips to unloaded channel due to DAVFU or VT.

REMEDY: Check the program. Press RESET to clear the
error.
16
Parity
CAUSE: Parity error occurred in received serial data from the host computer.
REMEDY:
Verify that the printer attribute settings for serial data communication match values for host computer and/or check the printer cable. Press RESET to clear the error.
CAUSE: An overrun error occurred in received serial
data from the host computer.

REMEDY:
Verify that the printer attribute settings for serial data communications match the values for the host computer. Press RESET to clear the error.
18
Framing
WSE:
A framing error occurred in received serial data from the host computer.
REMEDY: Verify that the printer attribute settings
for serial data communications match the values for the host computer. Press RESET to clear the error.
19
Protocol
CAUSE: A protocol error occurred.
REMEDY: Verify that the printer attribute settings for serial data communications match the values for the host computer. Press RESET to clear the error.
23
I / F No C o n
CAUSE: The Interface Module is not installed.
Verify that the appropriate interface module is installed, and that the correct printer attribute settings for data communications are selected. Press RESET to clear the error.
REmEmY:
CI-500e/CI-1000e
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
This section describes routine maintenance procedures for the CI-SOOe and CI-1000e printers. To ensure printer reliability and best print quality. keep the printer clean of dust and free of moisture. Refer to the environmental specifications in Appendix B. To keep the printer irl optimum condition, perforn~ maintenance inspections daily and weekly:
At the beginning of each day, check for the following conditions:

1. POWER indicator: should light when the power is turned on.
2. ALARM indicator: should not be lit. If it is, refer to the section on alarms earlier in this chapter.
3. Verify that the printer is level. Unevenness may cause extra printer vibration.
4. Examine the ribbon for obvious signs of wear such as fraying; replace if damaged or worn. This action not only improves print quality but also helps protect the print head from expensive damage.
5. Verify that an adequate supply of paper is present and loaded, and that it can move smoothly through the machine.
CI-500e/cI-1oooe WEEKLY INSPECTION AND CLEANING OUTSIDE OF PRINTER

Inspect the outside of the printer and clean if necessary.
b
Dust, grit, and moisture can harm the printer. Clean the printer's exterior surfaces and control panel only with a soft cloth and gentle, non-abra,sive cleaner. Harsh chemicals or abrasives can damage the display window. Do not allow moisture to enter the control panel through the key-switch openings. Wipe the printer dry after wet-cleaning.
INSIDE OF PRINTER
Buildup of dirt can cause blurred printing. Thsrefore, periodic cleaning of components is recommentled. However, harsh or careless cleaning actions can damage printer parts such as the ribbon mask, so please take the time to read and understand the following steps:
STEP 1. STEP 2 .
Open the top cover. Open the platen to the widest gap by moving the Paper Thickness Adjustment Lever fully towards the back of the printer.
STEP 3 . STEP 4 .
. Remove
the paper and ribbon. Check the rihbon for wear; replace it if necessary.
Using only gentle actions and light pressure, clean the print head and the ribbon mask with cleaning cloth. Clean dirt and debris ouch as ribbon ravellings away from the areas around the left and right ribbon guides.
CAUTION: DO NOT BEND THE RIBBON MASK. Limit action to gently brushing the bottom of the ribbon mask. Be extremely careful : the ribbon
mask is made of extremely thin stainless steel and can be easily bent or damaged through careless action. (continued)
Figure 8-2. Cleaning With the Accessory Brush STEP 5. STEP 6. Reinstall the ribbon and paper. Close the platen and turn the paper feed knob by hand. Then check for paper damage and make sure that the paper moves easily.
STEP 7. STEP 8.
If a black smear appears on the paper, reclean the machine.

If there is damage to the paper unevenness, call for technical support. or
CI-JWCI-lOOOe
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section presents general mechanical troubleshooting procedures. For items not covered here, such as the appearance of alarm codes 20-22 and 23 or higher, please refer the printer for service. SYMPTOM: ACTIONS: Cannot turn the printer on. Verify that the printer is connected to a ) 110-120V outlet (USA/Canadian models) c r a 220-220V outlet (European models). Verify that the power cord is plugged in at the power source. Verify that the power source is present. If the breaker at the right rear of the printer has popped out, turn the printer off and push the breaker back in to reset it. Then turn the printer back on. If the problem remains, refer the printer for servicincr to an authorized service station. SYMPTOM: When the printer is turned on, the A:.arm Indicator on the control panel lights or flashes. An illuminated Alarm Indicator is accompa~~ied by an alarm code number shown in the control panel's display window. Refer to the a:larm handling procedures in this chapter. Data will not print out when a normal print operation is attempted.
-ACTIONS:
---
SYMPTOM: ACTIONS:
Electrical Problem - An illuminated Alarm Indicator is accompanied by an alarm code number shown in the display window of the control panel. Refer to the section in t.his chapter on alarm handling. Mechanical/Operational Problem - 1. Verify that the platen gap is the appropriate value. 2. Verify correct ribbon positioning.
SYMPTOM: ACTION :
Certain columns of data do not print out correctly. If the Alarm Indicator is lit or flashing: a 1 1 illuminated Alarm Indicator is accompanied by an alarm code number shown in the display window of the control panel. Refer to the section in this chapter on alarm handling. Some print head pins may be damaged. Call technical support to confirm the need for referring printer for service.
SYMPTOM: ACTIONS:
The print quality on the entire page is too light. Examine the ribbon. If it is obviously wor-n or old, replace it. Verify correct setting of the paper adjustment lever. Also verify the adequacy of the platen gap. If the platen gap is too wide, data will not print darkly enough.
SYMPTOM: ACTIONS:
The print quality in certain columns is too 1ight . The print head(s) may require cleaning. Refer to the operator maintenance procedures in this chapter. Some print head pins may be damaged. Call technical support to confirm need for referring printer for service.
SYMPMM: ACTIONS:
Print characters are deformed. Examine paper to see if it is taut; if j.t is loose, readjust the tractor position. Verify that the upper tractor locking lever is locked.
\
If the Alarm Indicator is lit or flashing: an illuminated Alarm Indicator is accompanied by an alarm code number shown in the display window of the control panel. Refer to the . section in this chapter on alarm handling. SYMPTOM: ACTIONS: The paper shows ink smears or stains acwired during printing operations. The paper can be stained or smeared by a.ccumulated ribbon dust. Refer to the print head and ribbon mask cleaning instructions elsewhere in this chapter. Be careful not to bend the ribbon mask. Ribbon smears can also be caused if the ribbon was positioned between the paper and the ribbon mask, instead of between the ribbon mask and the print head. Refer to the Ribbon Loading Procedure in Chapter 2 for a description on how to load the ribbon correctly. SYMPMM: A discrepancy exists in the paper feeding pitch, or paper jams occur during paper feeding. Make sure that the paper being used is within the specification limits for the CI-500e/CI-1000e (see Appendix B ) . Make sure that the paper setting is correct and the stacked paper is correctly positioned under the paper insertion area of the printer. See if the paper adjusting lever setcing places the paper too close to the print head. If so, increase the paper gap.
ACTIONS:
SYMPTOM: ACTIONS:
Continued line feeding causes the paper feed motor to idle. Check to see that the paper adjustment lever is in the proper position. The ribbon shifts at random. Examine the platen gap. The gap may be too narrow even i f the paper adjustment ].ever is set properly.
SYMPTOM: ACTIONS:
APPENDIX A
CHARACTER SETS
CI-DLP EMULATION MODE
The following summarizes the CI-400/800 DLP emule~tion mode character sets. The following pages show the individual character sets.
CTL CODES
ALPHA CHARS, SYMBOLS, &NATIL CHARS
CTL CODES, LINE DRWG, OR BLOCK CHARS
SCIENTIFIC CHARS & SYMBOLS CHARS
LINE DRAWING OR BLOCK
Field 018 determines whether the Line Drawing or Block characters reside in positions 224 to 255 (hex Ell to FF); Field 042 enables codes EO to FF. Field 053 selects whether character set positions 128 through 159 are used for control codes or to print Line Drawing or Block characters. Field 042 chooses between Line Drawing or Block characters. The national character set is selected via Field 014 The scientific and line drawing/block characters can be accessed by just sending decimal codes 128-255 (hex 80FF) or by sending the SO/SI control codes. The latter method can only be used with the Centronics interface.
....
To use the latter method, first send the SO control code to the printer. After this code is sent, received 7-bit codes (00-7F hexadecimal) are treated as if they were 8bit codes (80-FF hexadecimal). In effect, the pri:nter adds 80 hexadecimal (128 decimal) to all 7-bit c ~ ~ d e s received. For example, sending an " @ " character (40 hexadecimal, 64 decimal) causes an '@ ' (CO hexadecimal, 192 decimal) to be printed. To resume printing characters from the 7-bit sectio~lof the character set, send the SI code to the printer.
.-
CI-500eICI-1000e
Table A - 1 .
U S ASCII/Line D r a w i n g C h a r a c t e r S e t
KEY
CI-500e/CI-1oooe
Table A-1. US ASCII/Line Drawing Character Set (cont.)
CI-SOOeICI-lOOOe
Table A - 2 . US A S C I I / B l o c k C h a r a c t e r S e t
KEY
Table A-2. US ASCII/Block Character Set (cont.)
The following table shows the characters which change when Field 014 or the character set escape sequence (ESC ? $ P2) is used to change the national character set. Table A - 3 . National Character Set Differences
IBM EMULATlON MODE
The IBM emulation mode supports six different Code Page character sets, which may be selected by Field 018 or the Select Code Page (ESC [ T) escape sequence. These character sets support different combinations of special, graphic, and foreign language characters. The CI-500e/CI-1000ehas three variations of each Code Page character set, as follows:
CHARACTER SET 1 (STANDARD SET)
This is the basic (default) character set. Character codes 0 through 31 decimal and 128 to 159 decimal are reserved for control codes. Field 014 or the ESC 7 sequence selects Character Set 1. 169 - 255 FOREIGN LANGUAGE CHARS GRAPHICS
SYMBOLS,
CHARACTER SET 2
(INTERNATIONAL SET)
Character Set 2 substitutes foreign language characters for the control codes which are usually found in positions 128 to 159 decimal. Five special characters are also made available at locations 03 to 06 and 21 decimal. Field 014 or the ESC 6 sequence selects Character Set 1.
169 - 255
FOREIGN
FOREIGN CHARS
GRAPHICS
ALL CHARACTERS SET
(SYMBOL SET)
The All Characters Set allows you to access all of the characters available in the selected Code Page - including those characters ranging from decimal 0 to 31 that would normally be reserved for control codes. You sequence print one character from the can use the ESC All Characters set at a time, or use the ESC \ sequece to print a limited number of characters from this set.
A
1 1
E
ALPHA CHARS, & S S
FOREIGN LANGUAGE C R S
FOREIGN LANGUAGE C S
GRAPHIClS
CI-500elCI-loooe
Table A - 4 . Code Page 4 3 7 ( U S A ) / A 1 1 Characters
KEY
Table A-4. Code Page 437 (USA)/A11 Characters (cant.)
C1-500eICI-1000e
Table A-5. Code Page 437 (USA)/Character Set 1
KEY
Table A - 5 .
Code Page 437 (USA) /Character Set 1 (cont . )
CI-500e/CI-l000e
Table A - 6 . Code Page 437 ( U S A ) /Character Set 2
KEY
m a value ml
Heradecimsl Value
Charactac
C I - S W C [-loooe
-,
Table A-6. Code Page 437 (USA)/Character Set 2 (comt.)
CI-500elCI-1000e
Table A - 7 . Code Page 850 (~ultilingual)
KEY
C1-500e/CI-l000e
Table A-7. Code Page 850 (~ultilingual)(cor1t.l
CI-500elCI-1000e
Table A-8. Code Page 860 (Portugal)
KEY
Chsraclsr
CI-500e/CI-1000e
Table A - 8 . Code Page 850 (Portugal) (cont
.)
CI-500elCI-lOOOe
Table A - 9 . Code Page 863 (Canada-French)
KEY
*t &a
Table A - 9 . Code Page 863 (Canada-French) (cont.)
CI-500eICI-1000e
T a b l e A-10. C o d e P a g e 865 ( N o r w a y )
KEY
value
Table A - 1 0 . Code Page 865 (Norway) (cont.)
CI-500e/CI-1MH)e
Table A - 1 1 . Code Page 990 (Set 1 ' / 2 ' )
KEY
CI-5oOe/CI-loooe
Table A - 1 1 . Code Page 990 (Set l V / 2 ' ) ( c o n t . )
P6000-PlP6000-S EMULATION MODES

The following summarizes P6000-P and P6000-S character set contents. The character sets are shown in charts on the following pages. 0 - 31 CTL CODES 32
127
128 - 159 CTL CODES
160 - 168 FOREIGN LANGUAGE CHARS GRAPH1CS
ALPHA CHARS, SYMBOLS, & NAT'L CHARS
The foreign and graphics characters can be accessed by using the Select/Cancel A1ternate Character Set co~itrol sequences or by just sending decimal codes 160-255 (hex AO-FF) . To use the former method, first send the Select Alternate Character Set control sequence to the printer. In the P6000-P mode the SO code is used; in the P6000-S mode, the ESC 4 sequence is used. Once this control sequence is sent, received 7-bit codes (00-7F hexadecimal) are treated as if they were El-bit codes (80-FF hexadecimal) . In effect, the printer adds 80 hexadecimal ( 1 2 8 decimal) to all 7-bit codes received. For example, sending an '@' character (40 hexadecimal, 64 decimal) causes an 'em (CO hexadecimal, 192 decimal) to be printed. To resume printing characters from the 7-bit section of the character set, sent the appropriate Cancel Alternate Character Set control sequence (SI in the P6000-P mode, ESC 5 in the P6000-S mode). Field 014 selects the national character set used.
CI-500elCI-1000e
Table A - 1 2 . US ASCII Character S e t
KEY
CI-500e/CI-l000e
Table A-12. US ASCII Character Set (cont.)
The following table shows the characters which change when Field 014 is used to change the national character set. Table A - 1 3 . P6000-P/S Mode National Character Set Differences
APPENDIX B SPECIFICATIONS
EMULATIONS
Printronix P6000-P/P6000-S
b
b
IBM Proprinter- II/XL

CIE GAP-4 Graphics QMS Magnum (option) IGP (option)
b b
PRINT METHOD:
Dot matrix line printing, using a shuttle with hammer bank.
PRINT HEAD:
Print Head Design: Wire Diameter: 34 wires (CI-500e) or 68 wires (CI-1000e) 0.4 mm (0.018 inch) CI-5OOe: 10.16 mn (0.4 inch) between wires CI-1.000e: 5.08 m (0.2 inch) between wires 1.5 billion dots per wire
Print Head L i f e:
PRINT SPEEDS/MODES
All text mode print speeds are given for printing 10 CPI, all uppercase text. All graphics mode print speeds are for the 10 CPI graphics density.
MODE NAME
HSD DP
MODE DESCRIPTION
HIGH SPEED DRAFT
DATA PROCESSING
TEXT LINES/ MINUTE

5 4 0 LPM 4 0 0 LPM 1 1 4 LPM 1 1 4 LPM
GRAPHICS DOT LINES/MIN
--3200 DLPM 1 6 0 0 DLPM 1 6 0 0 DLPM
NLQ*
NEAR LETTER QUALITY
w
MODE
HSD
LETTER QUALITY
MODE DESCRIPTION
HIGH SPEED DRAFT
TEXT LINES/ MINUTE

940 LPM
7 0 0 LPM 2 0 0 LPM 2 0 0 LPM
GRAPHICS DOT LINES/MIN
--5 6 0 0 DLPM 2800 DLPM 2 8 0 0 DLPM
DP
DATA PROCESSING
NLQ*
NEAR LETTER QUALITY

LETl'ER
QUALITY
* IBM emulation mode only.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PRINTABLE COLUMNS LISTED BY CHARACTER PITCH AND EMULATION MODE
CHAR/IN
( PI C I
CHAR/LINE
CCPL)
DhE
EMtTWlTION MODE IBM P6OOO-P/S
Note: Proportional spacing is available in the IBM mode

only.
CHARACTER SETS
CI-DLP
-
US ASCII + Scientific and Line Drawing or Block character sets, plus 12 internat.iona1 character sets.
P6000-P/S - US ASCII + Alternate Character Set, plus 12 international character sets. IBM Pro
- Character Set 1, Set 2, Symbol Set
PRINT ATTRIBUTES:
Under1ine Bold Superscript Subscript Overscoring Italic Vertical enlargement (2x, Elx) 4x, Horizontal enlargement (2x, 4>:, 8x1
CHARACTER FONT DOT MATRIX SIZES

The following are the sizes of the matrices within which characters are printed: Uppercase
Q d z
Upper and
HSD mode: DP mode: NLQ/LQ mode:
9 x 5 9 x 7 17 x 13
Lowercase
9 x 6 9 x 9 17 x 17
DOT DENSITIES
b
CHARACTER MODES
Hs4z
HSD DP LQ
HORIZONTAL DPI (BY CHAR. PITCH)
VERTICAL
u u 1 3 . 3 3
140 140 280 145 145 290 160 160 320 180 180 360
ULa
200 200 400
PeT
48 72 144
120 120 240
P6000-P/S Emulation Modes: MsQE HSD DP

LQ
HORIZONTAL DPI (BY CHAR. PITCH) U . f . i u 120 120 240 145 145 290 160 160 320 180 180 360 8-3 210 210 420
VERTICAL
IZET
IBM mulation Mode: HORIZONTAL DPI (BY CHAR. PITCH)
Ln
12.08L5
UProD.
VERTICAL DPI -
GRAPHICS MODES
HORIZONTAL DPI (BY CPI SETTING)
VERTICAL
MQRE
La
1161.833f ..7201.3i
1.7 66
Qu
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
MQlz
HSD DP
PET
60 60 60/120
PET
48 72 144
u2 .
P6000-S F U i o n Mode: HORIZONTAL VERTICAL
UQJX
PET
PEL
HORIZONTAL
PllQPE
VERTICAL
PET
PET
PAPER HANDLING CAPABILITIES DRIVE TYPE:
Pin feed for continuous/perforated paper
DRIVE, FEED, AND EXIT ARRANGEMENTS:

Dual tractor paper drive . Bottom feed, rear exit Bottom feed, top exit (option)
PAPER CHARACTERISTICS:
WIDTH: THICKNESS: WEIGHT: COPIES : 3.5" to 16" Up to 0.0276' 15 to 46 lb. Original +5 sheets
I
(88.9 m to 406.4 n n u) (0.7 m ) (56 to 173 g/m2)
PAPER FEED SPEED

15 or 25 inches per second
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
RS-232C/423A serial Centronics parallel Dataproducts parallel (option) IBM-Coaxial (option) IBM-Twinax (option)
RS-232Cl423A SERIAL
Transfer protocols: XON/XOFF ETX/ACK ACK / NAK DTR/BUSY (pin 20) Restraint/BUSY (pin 11) Synchronous 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 BPS Word length: Start bit: Stop bit: 7 or 8 bit (selectable)
1 bit fixed
Transmission method:
Selectable 1 or 2 stop bits. Incoming data should have one or more stop bits. Even, odd, none, or ignore 25 pin DB25 female 4096-7936 bytes 256-4096 bytes (selectable!)
Parity: Connector: Input buffer size: Overflow buffer size:
CI-500eICI-1000e CENTRONICS
Transfer system: Transmission speed : Handshake: Synchronizing method: Logic level: Connector: Input buffer size:
'
8 bit parallel Up to 20,000 byte/second ACK (acknowledge) or BUSY STROBE pulse TTL-compatible 36 pin female Up to 7936 bytes
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Power Consumption: CI-500e: Standby: mical: Maximum: CI-1000e: Standby: mical: Maximum: Power requirements: 50 watts 350 watts 700 watts
50 watts 500 watts 1100 watts
l20VAC 510% (UL, CSA-approved USA and Canadian models) 220-240 VAC 26% (TW-approvedEuropean models)
Source Frequency:
50 or 60 Hz
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Temperature: In operation: 5O C. to 40 C (41 F. to 104O F.) Storage: -40 C. to 70 C. (-40 F. to 1 8 F.) 5' Humidity: Storage: Operating: 5% to 90% (non-condensing )
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Noise output:
55 dB or less (with enclosed cabinet 60dBorless(withoutenclosed cabinet )
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Height: (without pedestal) Width: Depth: Weight: (without pedestal, cord, or ribbon) 13.0" 27.8" 21.3" (330 nun) (706 mm) (540 nun)
CI-500e: 1041bs. (47 kg: CI-1000e: 1061bs. (48 kg1
RIBBON
Width: Length: Thickness: Material : Life: Drive mechanism: 1" 180 ft 0.005" Ny 1on Over 20,000,000characters (DP mode) Reversible (25.4 mm) (54.9 m) (0.13 nun)
NOTE:
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX C INTERFACING WITH THE HOST COMPUTER
The CI-500e/CI-1000e printer has two standard comunications interfaces: Centronics parallel and RS-232C/RS-423A. Chapter 2 explains physical connection. This chapter discusses interface functions in more detail.
MULTIPLE-HOST CAPABILITY
More than one host computer may be physically connected to the CI-500e/CI-1000eat the same time. Users may select a host for cornmunicationby settingprinter attribute Field140 tothe desired interface type. Once this field is set for a given User Number, selecting that User Number from the control panel activates that interface.
RS-232Cl423A INTERFACE
The RS-232C/RS-423A interface uses the same connec:tor. RS-232C interfaces for serial data typically use shielded cable runs of less than 50 feet (15 meters), whereas longer cable runs can be used with RS-423A interfaces.
TheCI-5OOe/CI-1000e'sRS232C/RS-423Ainterfaceist~~DTE (Data Terminal Equipment), with a DB-25 25-pin female connector. The host computer cable must provide a DEi-25P connector (male RS232C connector).
The following diagram shows the arrangement of pins in the connector shell:
Figure C-1. RS-232C/423A Pin Layout
RS-232Cl423A CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS

The function of some pins varies depending on the communications protocol used. (The protocol is selected by printer attribute Field 164.) These variations are covered in the pin descriptions.
ELM
STANDARD
ABBREVIATION
SOURCE
Frame Ground Send Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect Data Busy Data Terminal Ready + 5 VDC Power Source
FG TXD printer RXD host RTS printer CTS host DSR host SG CD host DB printer DTR printer (FOR FACTORY USE ONL9Y)
SIGNAL DEFINITIONS Frame Ground Send Data
Pin 1 is a safety ground between the printer and earth ground. Pin 2 (serial data output from the printer) is held LOW (MARK state) by printer when it is not sending data. Pin 3 (serial data input to the printer) is held M W (MARK state) when data is not present. Pin 4 (output from the printer) goes HIGH when printer is turned on and is ready to receive data. Pin 5 (input line to the printer) is set HIGH by the host to enable the printer when the host is ready to receive data from the printer. Pulling CTS low will prevent the printer from receiving or printing data. Do not wire pins 4 and 5 together.
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
--
Data Set Ready
Pin 6 (input to printer): this control line is set HIGH by the host to enable printer to receive data from the host. If Field 168 is set to "MODEM-HIm,the printer will not print if this signal is LOW. If Field 168 is set to "MODEM-ANYa the printer \?ill , ignore this signal. Pin 7 provides a ground (signal return) for data signals. '?his line must be provided for the interface to function correctly. (Received Line Signal Detect) Pin 8 (input to the printer) inust be HIGH to enable the printer to receive data. If Field 168 is set to nMODEM-HIn,the printer will not print if this signal is LOW. The printer will ignore this signal if Field 168 is set to "MODEM-ANY" .
Signal Ground
Carrier Detect
Data ~ u s y
(also known as Ready/Data Busy or Restraint) Pin 11 indicates whether the printer is ready to receive data. The Serial Interface Protocol by Field 164) (selected determines how this signal is used.
Under Restraint m: whet:her pin 11 goes HIGH or LOW to inclicate Busy depends on the sett.ing of printer attribute Field 164, Serial Interface Protocol. See the appropriate chapter describing control settings for emulation in use.
Data Terminal Ready
Pin 20 behavior is determined by the Serial Interface Protocol selection (Field 164), as f01 lows : Under DTR grotocol: goes HIGH when the printer is ready to receive/ transmit data, LOW when busy.
'
Qthec grotocol%: held HIGH when no alarm conditioris are present.
XON/XOFF PROTOCOL
If Field 164 is set to "X-ON/OFF", the printer transmits the XON (DC1) and XOFF (DC3) control codes to indicate whether or not it is ready to receive data. The printer transmits following conditions: the XON code under the
(1) When the printer's state changes from offline to online. (2) When there is less than 2K of data left in t.he receive buffer.
(3) Every 5, 10, or 20 seconds when the printer is online and idle, depending upon the Field 170 selection.
The printer transmits the XOFF code under following conditions:
the
(1) When the printer's state changes from online to ofline. (2) When the receive buffer fills (the size of the receive buffer is calculated by subtracting the amount of space allocated to the overrun buffer from 8K (8192 bytes)). The receive buffer ranges from 4096 to 7936 bytes (the default), depending upon the overrun buffer setting (Field 165). Data received after the receive buffer is filled is stored in the overrun buffer. Once the overrun buffer is filled, any received data is lost. The size of the overrun buffer can be set to 256, 1024, 2048, or 4096 bytes using Field 165.
( 3 ) When data is received after the receive buffer is
full and the first XOFF has already been sent. printer assumes that the host computer missed first XOFF and will transmit multiple XOFF's to host computer, depending upon the Field. setting.
(4)
The the the

166
Every 5, 10, or 20 seconds when the printer is online and idle. depending upon the Field 170 selection.
E'PX/ACK PROTOCOL
If Field 164 is set to "ETX/ACKW, the host computer must transmit an ETX to determine if the printer is ready to receive the next block of data. Typically, this : o is done after each block of transmitted data (up t 4K bytes). When the printer receives the ETX code, it transmits the ACK control code to the host if it is ready to receive the next data block. If the printer is not ready to receive the next block (it is offlirie or the receive buffer is full), it will not transmit. the ACK code until is ready. Once the host computer recteives the ACK code from the printer, it can then transmit the next data block. When this protocol is used, the ETX code cannot be used for any other purpose. The overrun buffer is not used with the ETX/ACK protocol.
ACK/W
PROTOCOL
The ACK/NAK protocol is enabled by setting Field 164 to "ACK/NAKn.When the ACK/NAK protocol is enabled, the host computer must send a polling character to the printer to determine if the printer is ready to rec:eive the next block of data. Field 169 sets the polling character. If there is 4K bytes or more free space in the receive buffer and the printer is online, the printer will transmit and ACK code to the host computer. The printer will transmit a NAK code if there is less than 4K bytes free space in the receive buffer or the printer is offline. The maximum size of the data block transmitted to the printer is 4K bytes. The overrun buffer is not used with the ACKINAK protocol.
DTR/BUSY PROTOCOL
DTR/Busy protocol is selected via Field 164. When it is enabled, the DTR signal (pin 20) is used by the printer to indicate whether or not it is able to receive data. The DTR signal is set HIGH by the printer under the following conditions:
(1) When the printer's state changes from offline to online.

(2) When there is less than 2K of data left in the receive buffer. The DTR signal is set LOW under the following conditions: (1) When the printer's state changes from online to offline.
(2) When the receive buffer fills (the size of the receive buffer is calculated by subtracting the amount of space allocated to the overrun buffer from 8K (8192 bytes)). The receive buffer ranges from 4096 to 7936 bytes (the default), depending upon the overrun buffer setting (Field 165).
Data received after the receive buffer is filled is stored in the overrun buffer. Once the overrun buffer is filled, any received data is lost. The size of the overrun buffer can be set to 256, 1024, 2048, or 4096 bytes using Field 165.
RESTRAINT /BUSY PROTOCOL
If Field 164 is set to "RSTRT-H", the printer sets the BUSY signal (pin 11) HIGH to indicate that the receive buffer is full or that the printer is offline. The BUSY signal is then set LOW when the amount of data in the buffer drops below 2K or the printer is placed online. If Field 164 BUSY signal is the printer is state indicates
is set to 'RSTRT-La, the meaning of the

inverted: the LOW state indicates that unable to receive data, while the HIGH that the printer can receive data.
Data received after the receive buffer is full is stored in the overrun buffer. Field 165 selects the overrun buffer size. The size of the receive buffer by subtract the space allocated to the overrun buffer from 8K (receive buffer = (8K - overrun buffer).
CENTRONICS PARALLEL INTERFACE

The parallel Centronics interface is typically used for distances under approximately 30 feet. Cable type: shielded twisted pairs. The printer has a female connector; the host cable must provide a male Centrcmicscompatible connector.
CENTRONICS CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS
The following table shows connector pin assignmer..ts:
EM&
*STROBE Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8

*ACK
SOURCE
BUSY PAPER EMPTY SELECT Signal Ground Chassis Ground

+ SVDC
host host host host host host host host host printer printer printer printer
* PRIME *FAULT Signal Ground
printer (Factory use only.) twisted pair returns for lines 1-11 and 31 host printer printer
--
FUSE
* Indicates that the signal is active when LOW.
Figure C - 2 . Centronics Pin Layout
CENTRONICS INTERFACE SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS

STROBE
Pin 1 is a host output that signals when host data is ready for the printer to read. STROBE is a LOWgoing pulse whose width is in the range of 0.5 to 30 microseconds. Pins 2 through 9 are host data lines.
A HIGH level represents a 1, a LOW
DATA
1ine e
level is a 0. The host must maintain signals for at least 0.5 microsecond after STROBE goes HIGH again. Pin 10 is a normally HIGH printer output. The ACK signal pulses LOW for 0.4 or 0.8 microseconds when the BUSY signal goes from HIGH to LOW. The length of the ACK signal is selected by Field 146. Field 145 selects the ACK signal pulse position relative to the BUSY signal.
BUSY
Pin 11 is a normally LOW printer output that goes HIGH when the printer is not ready to accept data. Conditions that cause this signal to go HIGH include:
(1) the printer has gone into the D E S E L E C T state (the S E L E C T signal has gone LOW). (2) the PRIME signal has gone LOW,
(3)
the DATA STROBE signal has gone

LOW.
(4) an alarm condition exists. Field 061 determines whether the BUSY signal goes H I G H for each line or for each character.
PAPER OUT
Pin 12 is a normally LOW printer output that goes HIGH to indicate the out of paper condition.
-.
SELECT
Pin 13 is a printer output that: goes HIGH when the printer is online a t ni ready to respond. It goes HIGH when the control panel has been used to put the printer online or when the DC1 code is received. The signal goes LOW under the following conditions:
(1) the control panel has been useti to take the printer offline,
(2) (3)
a DC3 code has been received,
the FAULT state has been triggered (the FAULT signal has gone LOW), has run out of
(4) the printer paper.
Pin 1 8 is a printer output providing a maximum of 500 mA to be used only for testing purposes.
.."
PRIME
Pin 3 1 is a printer input. When the host brings this line LOW for 0 . 5 microseconds, the BUSY signal will go HIGH. When the PRIME signal returns to the HIGH state, it then resets the printer to the condition attained on power-on. The BUSY signal remains HIGH until the PRIME signal goes; HIGH. Field 1 5 2 determines whether the receive buffer is cleared by the? PRIME signal. Pin 32 is a normally HIGH printel: output; when LOW, it signals that the printer cannot function because of a fault condition. The FAULT signal is triggered by an alarm condition 01the DESELECT state (the SELECT signal. has gone LOW, see above). Field 148 determines whether or not. the FAULT signal is sent when the printer is taken offline. Field 147 determines whether the FAULT signal. is sent when the printer runs out of paper. Supplies a connection to +5VDC power via a 220 ohm resistor for testing purposes only.
FAULT
INDEX
12-channel B-300 DAVFU (CI-DLPmode) 5-58 bottom of form control, selecting 4-21, 5-47 channel selection 5-60 enabling (CI-DLP mode) 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-58 using the PI line 5-59 resetting 5-61 12-channel DAVFU 5-51, 6-40 bottom of form control (CI-DLP mode) 4-21, 5-47 channel selection 5-56, 5-57, 6-44 CI-DLP mode 5-56 using PI line 5-57 P6000-P/S mode 6-44 enabling CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 loading 5-51, 6-40 CI-DLP mode 5-51 P6000-P/S mode 6-40 resetting 5-57 CI-DLP mode 5-57 P6000-P/S mode 6-44 14-channel EVFU 5-62, 6-34 channel selection 5-65, 6-37 CI-DLP mode 5-65 P6000-P mode 6-37 enabling CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 loading 5-62, 6-34 CI-DLP mode 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-34 resetting 5-66, 6-38 CI-DLP mode 5-66 P6000-P mode 6-38 2-channel VFU (CI-DLPmode) 5-49 bottom of form control, enabling 4-21, 5-47 enabling 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-49 resetting 5-50 7 bits selection (CI-DLP, P6000-P/S modes) 4-28 7-bit data word 4-52 8 bits selection (CI-DLP, P6000-P/S modes) 4-28 8 LPI reset (CI-DLPmode) 4-35 8-channel VFU (P6000-Smode) 6-32 channel selection 6-33 loading 6-32 8-bit data word 4-52
Accessories 1-4 ACK control code 5-6, 5-15, 6-6, 7-5 CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15 IBM mode 7-5 P6000-P/S mode 6-6 ACK Centronics interface signal C-8 pulse width 4-48 timing 4-47 ACK/NAK protocol C-5' polling character selection 4-54 selection 4-52 Acknowledge control code 5-6, 5-15, 6-6, 7-5 CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15 IBM mode 7-5 P6000-P/S mode 6-6 Alarms 3-25, 8-1 data error 4-53 DAVFU Chan 8-6 DAVFU Err. 8 - 6 display 8-1 display duration 4-42 enabling 4-43, 4-44 Framing 8-7 Front Door 8-5 H.Driv Hot alarm 8-5 head coil, enable 4-43 Head Hot 8-4 I/F No Con 8-7 indicator 3-10 listing 8-3 multiple 8-2, 4-42 on/offline in response to alarm 4-42 Overrun 8-6 Paper Jam 8-5 enable 4-43 Paper Out 8-3 Parity 8-6 PFDM Hot 8-5 Platen Open 8-4 Power Hot 8-4 Protocol 8-7 PS Cooling 8-4 Ribbon Jam 8-6 enable 4-44 Top Cover 8-3 All characters set (IBM mode) A - 9 , A-10 select 7-45, 7-46
A (Continued)
Alternate character set (P6000-P/Smode) A-29 cancel 6-9, 6-24 P6000-P mode 6-9, 6-24 P6000-S mode 6-24 select 6-9, 6-24 P6000-P mode 6-9, 6-24 P6000-S mode 6-24 Attribute settings 3-17, 3-19, 3-27, 3-28, 3-29, 4 changing 3-19, 3-27 explanation 4-4 groups 3-29 listing 3-28 Auto CR on LF (P6000-S, IBM modes) 4-18 Autowrap setting 4-17
B-300 DAVFU (CI-DLPmode) 5-58 bottom of form control, selecting 4-20, 5-47 channel selection 5-60 enabling 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-58 using the PI line 5-59 resetting 5-61 Back space control code 5-7, 5-15, 6-7, 7-6 CI-DLP mode 5-7, 5-15 enable 4-32, 5-30 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P/S mode 6-7 Bar code, postal 5-81, 6-58 CI-DLP mode 5-81 P6000-P/S modes 6-58 Baud rate 4-51 Bidirectional printing 4-45 CI-GAP4 mode 4-56 enable 4-45 Bit image modes CI-DLP mode 5-72 dot row feed 5-42 pitch 4-20, 5-77 exit print position 4-32, 5-77 high density 5-73 high density Printronix 5-76 enable 4-24, 5-28 normal density 5-72 normal density Printronix 5-75 enable 4-24, 5-28 reset 5-74 reset after one line 4-36, 5-78
B (Continued)
Bit image modes (continued) IBM mode 7-29 double density 7-31 normal density 7-29 quadruple density 7-32 P6000-P mode 6-55 even dot plot 6-57 odd dot plot 6-55 P6000-S mode 6-49 code reassignment, P6000-S mode 6-49 high density 6-52, 6-53, 6-55 normal density 6-50, 6-55 quadruple density 6-54, 6-55 Block character set (CI-DLPmode) A-4 enabling 4-24, 5-27 map into columns 8/9 4-31, 5-37 selecting 4-16, 5-26 Bold print 5-19, 7-23, 6-15, 6-20 CI-DLP mode 5-19 IBM mode 7-23 P6000-P/S mode 6-15, 6-20 Bottom of form control (CI-DLP mode) enabling 4-20, 5-47 setting 5-49, 5-51, 5-58 British character set A-6. A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 BS control code 5-7, 5-15, 6-7, 7-6 CI-DLP mode 5-7, 5-15 enable 4-32, 5-30 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P/S mode 6-7 Buffer clear (Dataproduct interface) 4-50 s overrun 4-53 overrun alarm 8-6 print out at offline 4-22 receive (parallel interface) 4-45 Busy (Centronics interface signal) C-8 action (CI-DLP mode) 4-34
CAN control code 5-10, 6-10, 7-8 CI-DLP mode 5-10 enable 4-28, 5-30 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10 Canadian character set A-6, A-20, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 IBM mode A-20 selecting 4-16, 7-47 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Cancel control code 5-10, 6-10, 7-8 CI-DLP mode 5-10 enable 4-28, 5-30 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10 Carriage return code 5-8, 6-8, 7-7 CI-DLP mode 5-8 function selection 4-26, 5-31 IBM mode 7-7 function selection 4-26, 7-17 P6000-P/S mode 6-8 function selection 4-26 Carriage return on LF (P6000-S, IBM modes) Carrier detect, RS-232C/423A signal C-3 CD, RS-232C/423A signal C-3 Centronics .interface C-7 connector 2-9, 2-11, C-7 gin assignments C-7 receive buffer enable 4-45 selection 4-45 signals C-8 ACK C-8 pulse width 4-48 timing 4-47 BUSY C-8 control (CI-DLP mode) 4-34 DATA lines C-8 data latch timing 4-47 invert data lines 4-46 FAULT C-9 at offline 4-49 at paper out 4-48 FUSE C-9 PAPER OUT C-8 PRIME C-9 SELECT C-9 function 4-46 STROBE C-8
C (Continued)
Character and control code settings (CI-DLP mode) 5 - 2 8 Character attributes 5 - 1 9 , 6 - 1 5 , 7 - 2 4 bold print 5 - 1 9 , 6 - 1 5 , 6 - 2 0 , '7 - 2 3 CI-DLP mode 5 - 1 9 IBM mode 7 - 2 3 P 6 0 0 0 - P / S mode 6 - 1 5 , 6 - 2 0 double-height print 5 - 2 2 , 5 - 2 3 , 6 - 1 8 , 7-27 CI-DLP mode 5 - 2 2 , 5 - 2 3 reset after one line 4 3 6 , 5 - 2 3 IBM mode 7 - 2 7 P6000-P/S mode 6 - 1 8 double-width print 5 - 1 5 , 5 - 2 1 , 6 - 1 8 , 7 - 7 , 7 - 2 6 CI-DLP mode 5 - 2 1 , 5 - 1 5 reset after one line 4 - 3 5 , 5 - 2 1 set/reset by SO/SI codes 4 - 3 0 IBM mode 7 - 7 , 7 - 8 , 7 - 2 6 , 7 - 2 7 resetting 7-8 P6000-P mode 6-18, 6 - 2 0 P6000-S mode 6 - 1 8 , 6 - 1 9 , 6 - 2 0 resetting 6 - 1 0 horizontal enlargement 5 - 1 5 , 5 - 2 1 , 6 - 1 8 , 7 - 7 , 7 - 2 6 CI-DLP mode 5 - 2 1 , 5 - 1 5 reset after one line 4 - 3 5 , 5 - 2 1 set/reset by S O / S I codes 4 - 3 0 IBM mode 7 - 7 , 7 - 8 , 7 - 2 6 , 7 - 2 7 resetting 7 - 8 P6000-P mode 6 - 1 8 , 6 - 2 0 P6000-S mode 6 - 1 8 , 6 - 1 9 , 6 - 2 0 resetting 6 - 1 0 mixed ( P 6 0 0 0 - P / S mode) 6 - 2 0 overscoring 6 - 2 3 , 7 - 2 8 IBM mode 7 - 2 8 P6000-P/S mode 6 - 2 3 shadow printing ( P 6 0 0 0 - P / S mode) 6 - 1 6 , 6 - 2 0 slanted printing, CI-DLP mode 5 - 1 9 subscript printing 6 - 2 2 , 7 - 2 5 IBM mode 7 - 2 5 P 6 0 0 0 - P / S mode 6-22 superscript printing 6 - 2 2 , 7 - 2 5 IBM mode 7 - 2 5 P6000-P/S mode 6-22 underlining 5 - 2 0 , 6 - 2 3 , 7 - 2 4 CI-DLP mode 5 - 2 0 IBM mode 7-24 P6000-P/S mode 6-23 vertical enlargement 5 - 2 2 , 6 - 1 8 , 7 - 2 7 CI-DLP mode 5 - 2 2 , 5 - 2 3 reset after one line 4 - 3 6 , 5-23 IBM mode 7-27 P 6 0 0 0 - P / S mode 6 - 1 8
C (Contioued)
Character codes 5-4, 6-4, 7-4 CI-DLP mode 5-4 EO-FF 4-24, 5-27 undefined 4-25, 5-35 IBM mode 7-4 P6000-P/S mode 6-4 Character matrix B-2 Character pitch 4-10, 5-18, 6-16, 6-20, 7-7, 7-22 CI-DLP mode 4-10, 5-18 IBM mode 4-10, 7-7, 7-8, 7-22 P6000-P mode 4-10, 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 P6000-S mode 4-10, 6-16, 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 Character Set 1 (IBM mode) A-12 selection 4-12, 7-45 Character Set 1' (IBM mode) A-24 selection 4-12, 4-16, 7-45, 7-47 Character Set 2 (IBM mode) A-14 selection 4-12, 7-45 Character Set 2' (IBM mode) A-24 selection 4-12. 4-16, 7-45, 7-47 Character sets A-1 CI-DLP mode A-1 selection 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selection 4 -56 IBM mode A-8 download 7-33, 7-39 DP/NLQ characters, IBM mode 7-33 LQ characters 7-37 selection 4-12, 7-45, 7-46 P6000-P mode A-27 selection 4-12, 6-9, 6-25 P6000-S mode A-27 selection 4-12, 6-25 CI-400/800emulation mode See CI-DLP emulation mode CI-DLP emulation inode 5-1 character sets A-1 code table 5-4 control codes 5-4 C O ~ U ~ ~ S4-31, 5-37 8/9 Printronix-type 4-24, 5-15, 5-28 See also Control codes
C (Continued)
CI-DLP emulation mode (continued) escape sequences 5-11 character and control code settings 5-28 character set commands 5-24 configuration 1 5-11 configuration 2 5-13 form and vertical tab commands 5-43 graphics-related commands 5-72 horizontal posit'ioning/format commands 5-67 line feed/pitch commands 5-38 miscellaneous commands 5-87 print style/attribute commands 5-18 selection 4-2, 4-4, 5-2 CI-GAP4 mode 4-4, 4-56, 4-57 configuration 4-56 enabling 4-4 terminate code 4-57 wake-up command character 4-57 Circuit breaker 2-10 Cleaning the printer 8 - 9 Clear buffer (IBM mode) 7-8 CLEAR signal 4-50 Clear to send, RS-232C/423A signal C-2 Code Pages (IBM mode) 4-16, 7-47, A-10 Code system (CI-DLP mode) 5-28 Column scale 2-30 Compressed print width (CI-DLP mode) 4-15, 5-68 Condensed print mode CI-DLP mode 5-18 print width 4-15, 5-68 IBM mode 7-7, 7-8, 7-23 P6000-P mode 6-20 P6000-S mode 6-9, 6-10, 6-16, 6-20 Configuration 1 escape sequences (CI-DLP mode) 5-11 enable 4-23 Configuration 2 escape sequence (CI-DLP mode) 5-13 enable (CI-DLP only) 4-23 reset 5-88 save 5-88 enable storing 4-5 Configuration mode 3-15 entering 3-15, 3-23 example 3-22 exiting 3-19, 3-23 initial field 4-39 restoring default settings 4-38 return to last selection 4-39 settings, explanation 4-4 enable storing 4-5 save 3-19
C (Continued)
Connectors Centronics i n t e r f a c e Power cord 2-16 Control codes
ACK
2-10, C-7
RS-232C/423A 2-10, C-1 5-4, 6-4, 7-4 CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15 IBM mode 7-5 P6000-P/S mode 6-6
BS CI-DLP mode 5-7, 4-32, 5-15, 5-30 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P mode 6-7 CAN CI-DLP mode 5-10, 4-28, 5-30 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10 columns 8/9 (CI-DLPmode) 4-31, 5 -37 CR CI-DLP mode 5-8, 4-24, IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-8 DC1 CI-DLP 5-9, 4-27, 4-52, 5-32, C-4 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-P/S mode 4-27, 6-10 DC2 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10
DC3
CI-DLP mode 5-9, 4-27, 4-52, 5-32, C-4 P6000-P/S mode 4-27, 6-10 DC4 code IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10 DEL CI-DLP mode 5-10 P6000-P/S mode 6-11 CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15, 5-75 P6000-P mode 6-6 EOT CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15, 5-76 P6000-P mode 6-6 ESC CI-DLP mode 5-10, 4-23, 4-24, 5-28, 5-33 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10
ETX
mQ
CI-DLP mode 5-5 IBMmode 7-5 P6000-P/S mode 6-5
C (Continued)
Control codes (continued) FF CI-DLP mode 5-7 IBM mode 7-7 HT CI-DLP mode 4-29, 5-7, 5-69 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P/S mode 6-7 LF CI-DLP mode 5-7 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P/S mode 6-7 RS CI-DLP mode 5-10, 5-15 P6000-P mode 6-11, 6-34, 6-38, 6-39 SI CI-DLP mode 4-28, 4-30, 5-9, 5-29, 5-34 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-9 SO CI-DLP mode 4-28, 4-30, 5-8, 5-29, 5-34, 4-34, 5-35 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-9 SOH CI-DLP mode 5-5, 5-15 P6000-P mode 6-5 undefined (CI-DLP mode) 4-25, 5-36
us
VT
CI-DLP mode 5-10, 5-15 P6000-P mode 6-11, 6-34, 6-38, 6-39 CI-DLP mode 5-7, 4-29, 5-43, 5-48, 5-49, 5-57, 5-60 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P mode 6-8, 6-37, 6-44 P6000-S mode 6-8. 6-32, 6-33, 6-44 Control panel 2-8, 2-11, 3-9, 3-11 cover 2-11 offline functions 3-13 online functions 3 -12 Control sequences enable storing 4-5 P6000-P mode 6-12 character set commands 6-24 form and vertical tab commands 6-34 graphics commands 6-49 horizontal positioning/format commands 6-46 line feed/pitch commands 6-27 miscellaneous commands 6-66 print style/attribute commands 6-15 Printronix-style in CI-DLP mode 4-24, 5-15, 5-28
C (Continued)
Copy from user number set-up 4-38 Cord, power, attaching 2-16 Cover control panel 2-10 interface 2-11 interface cartridge 2-10 lower tractor 2-10 upper tractor 2-10 CPI setting 4-10 CI-DLP mode 4--10, 5-18 IBM mode 4-10, 7-7, 7-8, 7-22 P6000-P mode 4-10, 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 P6000-S mode 4-10, 6-16, 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 CR code CI-DLP mode 4-26, 5-8, 5-31 function selection 4-26, 5-31 IBM mode 7-7 function selection 4-26 P6000-P/S mode 6-8 function selection 4-26 CR on LF code setting (P6000-S, IBM modes) 4-18 CTS, RS-232C/423A signal C-2
Danish character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Data bits ignore 8th data bit 4-28, 5-29 CI-DLP mode 4-28, 5-29 P6000-P/S mode 4-28 serial interface word length 4-51 Data Busy RS-232C/423A interface signal C-3 Data carrier detect RS-232C/423A signal C-3 enable for modem control 4-54 Data error response 4-53 Data latch timing 4-47 Data processing font 4-6 print mode CI-DLP mode 4-11, 5-23 IBM mode 4-11, 7-21 P6000-P/S mode 4-11, 6-21 Data set ready, RS-232C/423A signal C-3 enable for modem control 4-54
D (Continued)
Data terminal ready, RS-232C/423A signal C-4 Data line inverting option 4-46 Data products B-300 DAVFU (CI-DLPmode) 5-58 bottom of form control, selecting 4-20, 5-47 channel selection 5-60 enabling 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-58 using the PI line 5-59 resetting 5-61 Data products line count feeding 4-49, 5-39, 5-40 8-300 line count feeding (CI-DLP)mode 5-41 Data products interface settings 4-47 CLEAR signal 4-50 data line 8 4-51 Paper Instruction signal 4-50, 4-51 DAVFU Chan alarm 8-6 DAVFU 5-51, 5-58 alarms 8-6 CI-DLP mode 12-channel DAVFU 5-51 bottom of form control, selecting 4-20, 5-47 channel selection 5-56 enabling 4-20, 5.48 loading 5-51 resetting 5-57 Data products B-300 12-channel DAVFU 5-58 bottom of form control, selecting 4-20, 5-47 channel selection 5-60 enabling 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-58 using the PI line 5--59 resetting 5-61 P6000-P/S mode (Dataproducts interface) 6-40 channel selection 6-44 enabling 4-20 loading 6-40 resetting 6-44 DAVFU line count feeding (P6000-P/Smode) 6-45 DAVFU Err. alarm 8-6 DB, RS-232C/423A signal C-3 DC1 code 4-52, 5-9, 6-10, 7-8, C-4 CI-DLP mode 5-9 enable 4-27, 5-32 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-P/S mode 6-10 enable 4-27 use with XON/XOFF protocol 4-52, C-4 DC2 code 6-10, 7-8 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10
D (Continued)
DC3 code 4-52, 5-9, 6-10, C-4 CI-DLP mode 5-9 enable 4 - 2 7 , 5-32 P6000-P/S mode 6-10 enable 4-27 use with XON/XOFF protocol 4 - 5 2 , C-4 DC4 code 6-10, 7 - 8 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6-10 DCD signal RS-232C/423A signal C-3 enable for modem control 4-54 Defaults, restoring default settings 4-38 DEL code 5 - 1 0 , 6 - 1 1 CI-DLP mode 5-10 enable 4 - 2 7 , 5-32 P6000-P/S mode 6-11 Deselect printer (IBM mode) 7-49 Device control 1 code 4-52, 5 - 9 , 6-10, 7 - 8 , C--4 CI-DLP mode 5 - 9 enable 4 - 2 7 , 5 - 3 2 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-P/S mode 6-10 enable 4-27 use with XON/XOFF protocol 4-52, C-4 Device control 2 code 6 - 1 0 , 7 - 8 IBM mode 7 - 8 P6000-S mode 6-10 Device control 3 code 4-52, 5 - 9 , 6 - 1 0 , C-4 CI-DLP mode 5-9 enable 4-2'7, 5-32 P6000-P/S mode 6-10 enable 4-27 use with XON/XOFF protocol 4 - 5 2 , C-4 Device control 4 code 6 - 1 0 , 7 - 8 IBM mode 7 - 8 P6000-S mode 6 - 1 0 Dimensions B-6
Index- 13
D (Continued)
DLP emulation mode 5-1 control codes 5-4 columns 8/9 4-31, 5-3'7 Printronix-type 4-24, 5-15, 5-28 See also Control codes escape sequences 5-11 character and control code settings 5-28 character set commands 5-24 configuration 1 5-11 configuration 2 5-13 form and vertical tab commands 5-43 graphics-related commands 5-72 horizontal positioning/format commands 5-67 line feed/pitch commands 5-38 miscellaneous commands 5-87 print style/attribute commands 5-18 selection 4-2, 4-4, 5-2 Dot densities B-3 Dot row feeding (CI-DLP)mode 5-42 LQ plot mode feed pitch 4-20 Double density bit image mode 5-73, 6-52, 7-31 CI-DLP mode 5-73, 5-76 reset 5-74 reset after one line 4-36, 5-78 IBM mode 7-31 P6000-P mode 6-55, 6-57 P6000-S mode 6-52, 6-53, 6-55 code reassignment 6-49 Double density/double speed bit image mode 6-53, 7-31 IBM mode 7-31 P6000-S mode 6-53, 6-55 Double-height characters 5-22, 6-18, 7-27 CI-DLP mode 5-22 reset after one line 4-36, 5-23 IBM mode 7-27 P6000-P/S mode 6-18 Double-width characters 5-15, 5-21, 6-18, 7-7, 7-26 CI-DLP mode 5-21, 5-15 reset after one line 4-35, 5-21 set/reset by SO/SI codes 4-30 IBM mode 7-7, 7-8, 7-26, 7-27 resetting 7-8 P6000-P mode 6-18, 6-20 P6000-S mode 6-18, 6-19, 6-20 resetting 6-10 Downloading characters (IBM mode) 7-33, 7-39 DP/NLQ mode 7-33 LQ mode 7-37 fonts into optional RAM module 4-37 set-up data 4-37
D (Continued)
DP font, selecting 4-6 plot mode (CI-DLP mode) 5-72, 5-75 print quality setting 4-11, 5-23, 6-21, 7-21 CI-DLP mode 8-11, 5-23 IBM mode 4-11, 7-21 P6000-P/S mode 4-11, 6-21 DSR RS-232C/423A signal C-3 enable for modem control 4-54 DTR protocol C-6 selection 4-52
Edit mode (using CR code) CI-DLP mode 5-8 P6000-P mode 6-9 Electrical requirements 2-3, B-6 Elite printing 6-17, 6-20, 7-22 IBM mode 7-22 P6000-P/S mode 6-17, 6-20 Emphasized print mode 5-19, 6-15, 6-16, 7-23 CI-DLP mode 5-19 IBM mode 7-23 P6000-P/S mode 6-15, 6-16 Emulation modes 3-2, 4-2, 4-4, B-1 CI-DLP 5-1 selection 4-4, 5-2 graphics emulations 4-4, B-1 CI-GAP4 mode 4-4, 4-56 enabling 4-4 Printronix IGP 4-4 QMS Magnum 4-4 IBM Proprinter II/XL 7-1 selecting 4-4, 7-2 Printronix P6000-P series 6-1 selecting 4-4, 6-2 Printronix P6000-S series 6-1 selecting 4-4, 6-2 End of text control code 5-5, 6-5, 7-5 CI-DLP mode 5-5. 5-76 IBM mode 7-5 P6000-P mode 6-5 P6000-S mode 6-5 End of transmission control code 5-5. 6-6 CI-DLP mode 5-5, 5-15, 5-76 P6000-P mode 6-6, 6-57 ENQ (Enquiry) control code 5-6, 6-6 CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15, 5-75, 5-76 P6000-P mode 6-6, 6-55, 6-57
Index- 15
E (Continued)
Environmental considerations 2-2, B-6 EOT control code 5-5, 6-6 CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-15, 5-76 P6000-P mode 6-6, 6-57 ESC code 5-10, 7-8 CI-DLP mode 5-10 validity 4-23, 4-24, 5-28, 5-33 IBM mode 7-8 P6000-S mode 6 -10. Escape sequences enable storing of settings 4-5 CI-DLP mode 5-11 character and control code settings 5-28 character set commands 5-24 configuration 1 5-11 configuration 2 5-13 enabling 4-23 reset/save 5-88 form and vertical tab commands 5-43 graphics-related commands 5-72 horizontal positioning/format commands 5-67 line feed/pitch commands 5-38 miscellaneous commands 5-87 print style/attribute commands 5-18 IBM Proprinter II/XL emulation mode 7-9 character pitch commands 7-22 character set commands 7-33 graphics commands 7-29 horizontal positioning/activity commands 7-18 line spacing commands 7-15 miscellaneous commands 7-48 print style/attribute commands 7-21 vertical positioning/activity commands 7-12 P6000-P/S emulation mode 6-12 character set commands 6-24 form and vertical tab commands 6-30 graphics commands 6-49 horizontal positioning/format commands 6-46 line feed/pitch commands 6-27 miscellaneous commands 6-66 print style/attribute commands 6-15 ETX code 5-5, 6-5, 7-5 CI-DLP mode 5-5 IBM mode 7-5 P6000-P mode 6-5 P6000-S mode 6-5 ETX/ACK protocol C-5 selection 4-52 Even dot plot CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-76 P6000-P mode 6-6, 6-57
Index- 16
E (Continued)
Even parity 4-52 5-62, 6-34 channel selection 5-65, 6-37 CI-DLP mode 5-65 P6000-P mode 6-37 enabling CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 line count feeding 5-39, 6-39 CI-DLP mode 5-39 P6000-P mode 6-39 loading 5-62, 6-34 CI-DLP mode 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-34 resetting 5-66, 6-38 CI-DLP mode 5-66 P6000-P mode 6-38 Execute message 3 -28
EVFU
FAULT Centronics interface signal at offline 4-49 control 4-48 FFcode 5-7, 6-8, 7-7 CI-DLP mode 5-7 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-8 FG, RS-232C/423A signal C-2 Field mode 3-17, 4-1 copy settings 4-38, 4-39 download settings 4-37' number selection 4-39 FIM patterns (postal bar code) 5CI-DLP mode 5-79, 5-82 P6000-P/S modes 6-58, 6-61 Finnish character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI -GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12
Index- 17
F (Continued)
Font download characters (IBM mode) 7-33, 7-39 DP/NLQ mode 7-33 LQ mode 7-37 download into optional RAM module 4-37 selecting CI-DLP mode 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 5-26 IBM mode 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 7-46 P6000-P/S mode 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 6-26 zero character font selection CI-DLP mode 4-13, 5-24 IBM, P6000-P/S modes 4-13 Foreign character sets A-6, A-16, A-18, A-20, A-22, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 IBM mode A-16, A-18, A-20, A-22 selecting 4-16, 7-47 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Form and vertical tab commands 5-43, 6-30 CI-DLP mode 5-43 P6000-P/S mode 6-30 Form feed code 5-7, 6-8, 7-7 CI-DLP mode 5-7 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-8 FORM FEED key 3-14 enabling for online use 4-41 offline function 3-14 set-up/configuration mode function 3-18 Form feed speed 4-41 Form length setting CI-DLP mode 4-9, 5-44, 5-49, 5-51, 5-58 units 4-33, 5-45 IBM mode 4-9, 7-12 P6000-S mode 4-9. 6-30 Form width 1-1 setting 4-14 CI-DLP mode 4-14, 5-67 IBM mode 4-14 P6000-P/S mode 4-14 Form, top of, setting 2-31 Forms, multipart B-4 adjusting the printing force for 4-44 Forward micro line feed 3-14 enabling for online use 4-41 Frame ground, RS-232C/423A signal C-2 Framing alarm 8-7
Index- 18
F (Continued)
French Canadian character set A-6, A-20, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 IBMmode A-20 selecting 4-16, 7-47 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 French character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Front door 2-10 alarm 8-5 opening 2-22 FUSE Centronics interface signal C - 9 FWD LN FEED key 3-14 enabling for online use 4-41 number mode function 3-16 offline function 3-14 set-up/configuration mode function 3-18
GAP-4 mode 4-4, 4-56, 4-57 configuration 4-56 enabling 4-4 terminate code 4-57 wake-up command character 4-57 German character set CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25
G (Continued)
Graphics (bit image modes) CI-DLP mode 5-72 dot row feed 5-42 pitch 4-20, 5-77 exit print position 4-32, 5-77 high density 5-73 high density Printronix 5-76 enable 4-24, 5-28 normal density 5-72 normal density Printronix 5-75 enable 4-24, 5-28 reset 5-74 reset after one line 4-36, 5--78 IBM mode 7-29 double density 7-31 normal density 7-29 quadruple density 7-32 P6000-P mode 6-55 even dot plot 6-57 odd dot plot 6-55 P6000-S mode 6-49 code reassignment, P6000-S mode 6-49 high density 6-52, 6-53, 6-55 normal density 6-50, 6-55 quadruple density 6-54, 6-55 Graphics emulations 3-2, 4-4, B-1 CI-GAP4 mode 4-4, 4-56 enabling 4-4 Printronix IGP (option) 4-4 QMS Magnum (option) 4-4 Graphics font codes (CI-DLP mode) enabling 4-24 selecting 4-16, 5-26
Hammers, print, impact force 4-44 H.Driv Hot alarm 8-5 Head coil alarm, enable 4-43 Head Hot alarm 8-4 Hex dump mode 4- 37 High density bit image mode CI-DLP mode 5-73, 5-76 Printronix plot mode 5-76 reset 5-74 reset after one line 4-36, 5-78 row feed pitch 5-77 IBM mode 7-31 P6000-P mode 6-57 P6000-S mode 6-52, 6-53, 6-55
H (Continued)
High Impact mode (hammer force) 4-44 High speed draft mode B-1 selecting 4-11, 5-23, 6-21 CI-DLP mode 4-11, 5-23 P6000-P/S mode 4-11, 6-21 selecting the HSD font 4-8 upper/lowercase enable/disable 4-8 Horizontal enlargement 5-15, 5-21, 6-18, 7-7, 7-26 CI-DLP mode 5-21, 5-15 reset after one line 4-35, 5-21 set/reset by SO/SI codes 4-30 IBM mode 7-7, 7-8, 7-26, 7-27 resetting 7-8 P6000-P mode 6-18, 6-20 P6000-S mode 6-18, 6-19, 6-20 resetting 6-10 Horizontal tab code 5-7, 6-7, 7-6 CI-DLP mode 5-7 enable 4-29, 5-69 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P/S mode 6-7 Horizontal tab stops clearing IBM mode 7-19, 7-48 P6000-P/S mode 6-47 defaults CI-DLP mode 4-29, 5-69 IBM mode 7-48 setting CI-DLP mode 5-70 IBM mode 7-19 P6000-P/S mode 6-46 HSD mode B-1 selecting 4-11, 5-23, 6-21 CI-DLP mode 4-11, 5-23 P6000-P/S mode 4-11, 6-21 selecting the HSD font 4-8 upper/lowercase enable/disable 4-8 HT code 5-7, 6-7, 7-6 CI-DLP mode 5-7 enable 4-29, 5-69 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P/S mode 6-7
I/F No Con alarm 8-7 IBM Character Set 1 selection 4-12, 7-45 IBM Character Set 2 selection 4-12, 7-45 IBM Proprinter II/XL emulation mode 7-1 character sets A-8 selecting 4-12, 4-16, 7-45, 7-46, 7-47 code table 7-4 control codes 7-4 See also Control' codes. escape sequences 7-9 character pitch commands 7-22 character set commands 7-33 graphics commands 7-29 horizontal positioning/activity commands 7-18 line spacing commands 7-15 miscellaneous commands 7-48 print style/attribute commands 7-21 verticai positioning/activity commands 7-12 selecting 4-4, 7-2 IGP emulation mode, enabling 4-4 Impact force, print hammers 4-44 Indicator lights 3-10 Initial state 4-49 Initialize tabs command, IBM mode 7-48 Interface cartridge cover 2-10 Interface cover 2-11 Interfaces 2-10, 4-45, B-4, C-1, C-7 Centronics parallel C-7 connector 2-10, C-7 pin assignments C-7 receive buffer enable 4-45 selecting 4-45 signals C-8 ACK C-8 pulse width 4-48 timing 4-47 BUSY C-8 control (CI-DLP mode) 4-34 DATA lines C-8 data latch timing 4-47 invert data lines 4-46 FAULT C-9 at offline 4-49 at paper out 4-48 FUSE C-9 PAPER OUT C-8 PRIME C-9 SELECT C-9 function 4-46 STROBE C-8
-,
I (Continued)
Interfaces (continued) Data products CLEAR signal 4-50 data line 8 4 - 5 1 paper instruction signal 4 - 5 0 , 4-51 P I signal 4 - 5 0 , 4 - 5 1
RS-232/423A 4-45,
C-1
baud rate selection 4 - 5 1 connector 2 - 1 0 , C-1 modem control signals C-2, C-3 enable 4-54 receive buffer C-4, C-6 parity 4-52 pin assignments C-2 protocols 4 - 5 2 , C-4
ACK/NAK
C-5
polling character selection 4-54

DTR/BUSY C-6 ETX/ACK C-5
Restraint/Busy C-6
XON/XOFF C-4 4-53
send multiple XOFFs at buffer full send X N or XOFF when idle 4-52 O selecting 4 - 4 5 signals C-2
CTS C-2
DB C-3 DCD (carrier detect) C-3 enable 4-54 DSR C-3 enable 4-54 DTR C-4
TXD RXD
RTS
" *
C-2 C-2 C-2
--
word length 4 - 5 1 International character sets A-6, A-16, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4 - 1 2 , 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 IBM mode A-16, A-18, A-20, A-22 selecting 4 - 1 6 , 7-47 P6000-P/S mode A-42 selecting 4--12, 6-25 Italian character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4 - 1 2 , 5 - 2 5 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4 - 1 2 , 6-25 Italic printing (CI-DLP mode) 5 - 1 9
Japanese character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25
LCD display 3-9, 3-10 LEDs 3-10 Left margin set CI-DLP mode 5-70 IBM mode 7-18 P6000-S mode 6-47 Left-most position adjustment knob 2-12, 2-29 Letter quality print font, selecting 4-7 plot mode (CI-DLP mode) 5-73, 5-76 print quality setting 4-11, 5-23, 6-21, 7-21 CI-DLP mode 4-11, 5-23 IBM mode 4-11, 7-21 P6000-P/S mode 4-11, 6-21 LF code 5-7, 6-7, 7-6 CI-DLP mode 5-7 IBM mode 7-6 function 4-18 P6000-P 6-7 P6000-S 6-7 function 4-18 Line count feeding CI-DLP mode 5-39 range selection 4-49 P6000-P mode 6-39, 6-45 P6000-S mode 6-45 Line drawing character set (CI-DLP mode) A-2 enabling 4-24, 5-27 mapping into columns 8/9 (CI-DLP only) 4-31 selecting 4-16, 5-26
L (Continued)
Line feed after carriage return CI-DLP mode 4-26, 5 - 3 1 IBM mode 4-26, 7-17 P6000-P/S mode 4-26 control code 5-7, 6-7, 7-6 CI-DLP mode 5-7 IBM mode 7-6 function 4 - 1 8
P6000-P P6000-S 6-7 6-7
"-
function 4 - 1 8 pitch select 4 - 9 , 5-38, 6 - 2 7 , 7 - 1 5 , 7-16, 7-17 CI-DLP mode 4 - 9 , 5 - 3 8 reset after one line 4 - 3 5 , 5 - 3 8 IBM mode 4-9, 7-15, 7-16, 7-17 P6000-P/S mode 4 - 9 , 6-27 speed 4-41 control panel 3-14, 4-41 Line spacing 4 - 9 , 5 - 3 8 , 6 - 2 7 , 7 - 1 5 , 7 - 1 6 , 7-17 CI-DLP mode 4-9, 5-38 reset after one line 4-35, 5-38 IBM mode 4 - 9 , 7-15, 7-16, 7-17 P6000-P/S mode 4 - 9 , 6-27 Loading the paper 2-21 Loading the ribbon 2-17 Locating the printer 2-2 Lower tractor 2-11 Lower tractor cover 2-10 Low Impact mode (hammer force) 4-44
LPI 4-9, 5 - 3 8 , 6-27, 7 - 1 5 , CI-DLP mode 4 - 9 , 5-38 7-16, 7-17
reset after one line 4 - 3 5 , 5-38 IBM mode 4 - 9 , 7 - 1 5 , 7-16, 7-17 P6000-P/S mode 4 - 9 , 6-27 LQ print font, selecting 4-7 plot mode (CI-DLP mode) 5-73, 5-76 print quality setting 4 - 1 1 , 5 - 2 3 , 6-21, 7-21 CI-DLP mode 4 - 1 1 , 5-23 IBM mode 4-11, 7 - 2 1 P6000-P/S mode 4-11, 6 - 2 1
Maintenance 8-8 daily inspection 8-8 weekly inspection and cleaning 8-9 Margins, set 5-70, 6-47, 7-18 CI-DLP mode 5-70 IBM mode 7-18 P6000-S mode 6-47, 6-48 Micro line feed 3-14 enabling for online use 4-41 Mixed print modes (P6000-P/Smode) 6-20 Modem control, signals C-2, C-3 enable 4-54 Multilingual character set (IBM mode) A-16 selecting 4-16, 7-47 Multipart fonns B-4 adjusting the printing force for 4-44
National character sets A-6, A-16, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4--56 IBM mode A-16, A-18, A-20, A-22 selecting 4-16, 7-47 P6000-P/S mode A-42 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Near letter quality print (IBM mode) selecting 4-11, 7-21, 7-24 Netherlands character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 Cl -GAP4 mode selecting 4 -56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12 Newline (IBM mode) 7-17 NLQ print ( IBM mode) selecting 4-11, 7-21, 7-24 Noise output B-6 Normal density plot mode CI-DLP mode 5-72 Printronix-style 5-75 enable 4-24, 5-28 IBM mode 7-29 P6000-P mode 6-55 P6000-S mode 6-50, 6-55
N (Continued)
Norwegian character set A-6, A-22, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 IBM mode A-22 selecting 4-16, 7-47 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12 Number mode 3-15
0 character shape selection 4-13, 5-24
CI-DLP mode 4-13, 5-24 IBM, P6000-P/S modes 4-13 Odd dot plot control code CI-DLP mode 5-6, 5-75 P6000-P mode 6-6, 6-55 Odd parity 4-52 Offline at power-up 4-49 buffer printout when taken offline 4-22 control panel functions 3-13 SELECT signal function 4-46 send FAULT signal 4-49 On/Offline during alann 4-42 Online at power-up 4-49 control panel functions 3-12 indicator 3-10 use of FF/LF keys 4-41 ONLINE key 3-12 number mode function 3-16 offline function 3-14 set-up/configuration function 3-18 Opening the front door 2-22 Opening the upper case 2-14 Options 1-4 Overrun buffer size 4-53 Overrun, alarm 8-6 Overscoring 6-23, 7-28 IBM mode 7-28 P6000-P/S mode 6-23
P6000-P/S emulation mode 6-1 character sets A-27 code table 6-4 control codes 6-4 See also Control codes. control/escape sequences 6-12 character set commands 6-24 form and vertical tab commands 6--30 graphics commands 6-49 horizontal positioning/format commands 6-46 line feed/pitch commands 6-27 miscellaneous commands 6-66 print style/attribute commands 6-15 selecting 4-4, 6-2 Page length setting CI-DLP mode 4-9, 5-44, 5-49, 5-51, 5-58 units 4-33, 5-45 IBM mode 4-9, 7-12 P6000-S mode 4-9, 6-30 Page width 1-1 setting 4-14 CI-DLP mode 4-14, 5-67 IBM mode 4-14 P6000-P/S mode 4-14 Paper empty response 4-42 Paper end sensor 2-11 Paper feed knob 2-11 Paper feed speed B-4 Paper guide wheel 2-11 Paper instruction line count feeding range 4-49 signal 4-50, 4-51 Paper jam alarm 8-5 enable 4-43 Paper length setting, IBM mode 7-12 Paper movement 3-13 keys, enabling for online use 4-41 using the control panel 3-25 Paper near end 4-42 Paper out alarm 8-3 Centronics interface signal C-8 FAULT signal 4-48 Paper slew speed 4-41 Paper tear off function 2-32 enabling 2-32, 4-40 Paper thickness adjustment 2-12, 2-25 Paper, upper guide 2-11 Paper width 1-1 Paper, horizontal position adjustment 2-29
P (Continued)
Paper, loading 2-21 Parallel (Centronics) interface C-7 connector 2-10, C-7 pin assignments C-7 receive buffer enable 4-45 selection 4-45 signals C-8 ACK C-8 pulse width 4-48 timing 4-47 BUSY C-8 control (CI-DLP mode) 4-34 DATA lines C-8 data latch timing 4-47 invert data lines 4-46 FAULT C-9 at offline 4-49 at paper out 4-48 FUSE C-9 PAPER OUT C-8 PRIME C-9 SELECT C-9 function 4-46 STROBE C-8 Parity alarm 8-6 Parity bit 4-52 Perforation skip setting 4-18, 5-46, 6-31, 7-13 CI-DLP mode 4-18, 5-46 IBM mode 4-18, 7-13 P6000-P mode 4-18 P6000-S mode 4-18, 6-31 PFDM Hot alarm 8-5 PI signal 4-50, 4-51 Platen 2-11 Platen Open alarm 8-4 Plot (bit image) modes CI-DLP mode 5-72 dot row feed 5-42 pitch 4-20, 5-77 exit print position 4-32, 5-77 high density 5-73 high density Printronix 5-76 enable 4-24, 5-28 normal density 5-72 normal density Printronix 5-75 enable 4-24, 5-28 reset 5-74 reset after one line 4-36, 5-78 IBM mode 7-29 double density 7-31 normal density 7-29 quadruple density 7-32
P (Continued)
Plot modes (continued) P6000-P mode 6-55 even dot plot 6-57 odd dot plot 6-55 P6000-S mode 6-49 code reassignment, P6000-S mode 6-49 high density 6-52, 6-53, 6-55 normal density 6-50, 6-55 quadruple density 6-54, 6-55 Polling character for ACK/NAK protocol 4-54 Portuguese character set (IBM mode) A-18 selecting 4-16, 7-47 Postal bar codes 5-81, 6-58 CI-DLP mode 5-81 P6000-P/S modes 6-58 Power connector socket 2-11 Power cord, attaching 2-16 Power Hot alarm 8-4 Power indicator 3-10 Power switch 2-11, 2-15 Power-up state 4-49 Preventive maintenance 8-8 daily inspection 8-8 weekly inspection and cleaning 8-9 PRIME Centronics interface signal C-9 Print densities 1-6, B-3 Print direction 4-45, 4-56 CI-DLP mode 4-45 CI-GAP4 mode 4-56 IBM mode 4-45 P6000-P/S mode 4-45 Print hammers, impact force 4-44 Print head 2-11 character adjustment knob 2-12, 2-29 gap adjustment lever 2-12, 2-25, 2-27 life B-1 specifications B-1 Print pitch 4-10 CI-DLP mode 4-10, 5-18 IBM mode 4-10, 7-7, 7-8, 7-22 elite 7-22 P6000-P mode 4-10, 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 condensed 6-20, 6-21 elite 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 P6000-S mode 4-10, 6-16, 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 condensed 6-16, 6-20, 6-21 elite 6-17, 6-20, 6-21 Print position adjustment knob 2-12 Print quality setting 4-11, 5-23, 6-21, 7-21 CI-DLP mode 4-11, 5-23 IBM mode 4-11, 7-21 P6000-P/S mode 4-11. 6-21
P (Continued)
Print speeds 1-1, B-1 Print start condition (CI-DLP only) 4-19, 5-87 position adjustment 2-29 Print width setting 4-14 CI-DLP mode 4-14, 5-67 compressed 4-14, 5-68 IBM mode 4-14 P6000-P/S mode 4-14 Printable columns B-2 Printer attribute values 4-4 changing 3 -27 groups 3-29 listing 3-28 Printer location 2-2 Printer self-test 2-33 Printer weight 2-2, B-6 Printronix 14-channel EXFU 5-62, 6-34 channel selection 5-65, 6-37 CI-DLP mode 5-65 ' P6000-P mode 6-37 enabling CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 loading 5-62, 6-34 CI-DLP mode 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-34 resetting 5-66, 6-38 CI-DLP mode 5-66 P6000-P mode 6-38 Printronix P6000-P/S emulation mode 6-1 character sets A-27 code table 6-4 control codes 6-4 See also Control codee. control/escape sequences 6-12 character set commands 6-24 form and vertical tab commands 6-30 graphics commands 6-49 horizontal positioning/format commands 6-46 line feed/pitch commands 6-27 ~niscellaneouscommands 6-66 print style/attribute commands 6-15 selecting 4-4, 6-2 Proportional spacing mode, IBM mode 7-20
P (Continued)
Proprinter emulation mode 7-1 character sets A-8 code table 7-4 control codes 7-4 See also Control codes. escape sequences 7-9 character pitch commands 7-22 character set commands 7-33 graphics commands 7-29 horizontal positioning/activity commands 7-18 line spacing commands 7-15 miscellaneous commands 7-48 print style/attribute commands 7-21 vertical positioning/activity commands 7-12 selecting 4-4, 7-2 Protocol alarm 8-7 PS Cooling alarm 8-4
QMS emulation mode, enabling 4-4 Quadruple density (240 DPI) bit image mode IBM mode 7-32 P6000-S mode 6-54, 6-55 code reassignment 6-49 Quick set-up 2-1
RAM module, download fonts 4-37 Receive buffer enable 4-45 print out at offline 4-22 size C-4, C-6 Received data, RS-232C/423A signal C-2 Record separator control code CI-DLP mode 5-15, 5-40, 5-41, 5-51, 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-11, 6-34, 6-38, 6-39 Request to send RS-232C/423A signal C-2 Releasing lower tractors 2-23 Releasing upper tractors 2-22 Removing shipping fasteners 2-4 Request to send, RS-232C/423A signal C-2 RESET key number mode function 3-16 offline function 3-14 set-up/configuration mode function 3-18 Reset printer (P6000-P/Smode) 6-66
R (Continued)
Restraint/Busy protocol C-6 selection 4-52 REV LN FEED key enabling for online use 4-41 number mode function 3-16 offline function 3-14 set-up/configuration mode function 3-18 Reverse line feed, control panel 3-14 Reverse micro line feed 3-14 enabling for online use 4-41 Reverse question marks, print if data error 4-53 Ribbon care of 2-20 core 2-12 fault alarm, enable 4-44 jam alarm 8-6 loading 2-17 mask 2-12 running sensor 2-12 specifications B-7 Right margin set 5-70, 6-48, 7-18 CI-DLP mode 5-70 IBM mode 7-18 P6000-S mode 6-48 Row feed pitch for LQ plot mode selecting (CI-DLP mode) 4-20 RS control code CI-DLP mode 5-15, 5-40, 5-41, 5-51, 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-11, 6-34, 6-38, 6-39 RS-232/423A 4-45, C-1 baud rate selection 4-51 connector 2-10, C-1 modem control signals C-2, C-3 enable 4-54 receive buffer C-4, C-6 parity 4-52 pin assignments C-2 protocols 4-52, C-4 ACK/NAK C-5 polling character selection 4-54 DTR/BUSY C-6 ETX/ACK C-5 Restraint /Busy C-6 - XON/XOFF C-4 send multiple XOFFs at buffer full 4-53 send XON or XOFF when idle 4-55 selecting 4-45
R (Continued)
RS-232/423A (continued) signals C-2 CTS C-2 DB C-3 DCD (carrier detect) C-3 enable 4-54 DSR C-3 enable 4-54 DTR C-4 TXD C-2 RXD C-2 RTS C-2 word length 4-51 RTS RS-232C/423A signal C-2
SOH control sequences CI-DLP mode 5-15, 5-28 P6000-P mode 6-12 Select alternate character set command P6000-P mode 6-9, 6-24 P6000-S mode 6-24 Select font CI-DLP mode 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 5-26 IBM mode 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 7-46 P6000-P/S mode 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 6-26 Select printer (IBM mode) 7-8 SELECT Centronics interface signal (2-9 at offline 4-46 Select user number 3-26 CI-DLP mode 5-88 IBM mode 7-48 P6000-P/S mode 6-66 Selecting an emulation mode 4-2, 4-4, 5-2, 6 Self-test on power-up 3-20 sliding pattern 2-33 Send data RS-232C/423A signal C-2
,*-
S (Continued) Serial (RS-232/423A)interface 4-45, C-1 baud rate selection 4-51 connector 2-10, C-1 modern control signals C-2, C-3 enable 4-54 receive buffer C-4, C-6 parity 4-52 pin assignments C-2 protocols 4-52, C-4 ACK/NAK C-5 polling character selection 4-54 DTR/BUSY C-6 ETX/ACK C-5 Restraint/Busy C-6 XON/XOFF C-4 send multiple XOFFs at buffer full 4-53 send XON or XOFF when idle 4-55 selecting 4-45 signals C-2 DB C-3 DCD (carrier detect) C-3 enable 4-54 D . C-3 SR enable 4-54 DTR C-4 TXD C-2 RXD C-2 RTS C-2 CTS C-2 word length 4-51 SET-UP key number mode function 3-16 offline function 3-14 set-up/configurationmode function 3-18 Set-up mode 3-15 always start at Field 000 4-39 download data 4-37 entering 3-15 exiting 3-19 example 3-21 indicator 3-10 listing 3-28 making changes 3-27 parameters, stored 3-19 enable storing 4-5 restoring default settings 4-38 return to last selection 4-39 selecting 3-15 Setting the top of form 2-31 SG RS-232C/423A signal C-3 Shadow printing (P6000-P/Smode) 6-16, 6-20
S (Continued)
Shift in (SI) control code 5-9, 6-9, 7-7 CI-DLP mode 5-9 function 4-28, 4-30, 5-34, 5-29 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-9 Shift out (SO) control code 5-8, 6-9, 7-7 CI-DLP mode 5-8 function 4-28, 4-30, 4-34,5-34, 5-29, 5-35 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-9 Shift out reset (CI-DLPmode) 4-34, 5-35 Shuttle run-on delay 4-41 Signal ground, RS-232C/423A signal C-3 Single density bit image mode CI-DLP mode 5-72 Printronix-style 5-75 enable 4-24, 5-28 IBM mode 7-29 P6000-P mode 6-55 P6000-S mode 6-50, 6-55 code reassignment 6-49 Skip perforation setting 4-18, 5-46, 6-31, 7-13 CI-DLP mode 4-18, 5-46 IBM mode 4-18, 7-13 P6000-P mode 4-18 P6000-S mode 4-18, 6-31 Slanted printing (CI-DLPmode) 5-19 Slashed zero character setting CI-DLP mode 4-13, 5-24 IBM, P6000-P/S modes 4-13 SO code 5-8, 6-9, 7-7 CI-DLP mode 5-8 function 4-28, 4-30, 4-34, 5-34, 5-29, 5-35 IBM mode 7-7 P6000-P/S mode 6-9 SOH code CI-DLP mode 5-5, 5-15 P6000-P mode 6-5 SOH control sequences CI-DLP mode 5-15 P6000-P mode 6-12 Spanish character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4 -12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Specifications B-1 Speed line feed 4-41 print 1-1, B-1
S (Continued) Standard accessories 1-4 Start of Header control code CI-DLP mode 5-5, 5-15 P6000-P mode 6-5 STROBE Centronics interface signal Subscript printing IBM mode 7-25 P6000-P/S mode 6-22 Superscript printing IBM mode 7-25 P6000-P/S mode 6-22 Swedish character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Switch, power 2-11, 2-15
C-8
TEAR FORM key 3-14 key, enable 4-40 number mode function 3-16 offline function 3-14 set-up/configuration mode function 3-18 Tear form position adjustment 4-40 Terminate code, CI-GAP4 4-57 Top Cover alarm 8-3 Top of form setting 2-33, 3-14 CI-DLP mode 5-49, 5-51, 5-58, 5-62 set by form length escape sequence 4-23 IBM mode 7-12 P6000-S mode 6-30, 6-34, 6-40 Tractor drive shaft 2-12 Tractor lock lever 2-12 Tractor shift cable 2-13 Tractors locking 2-25 lower 2-11 cover 2-10 releasing 2-23 upper 2-13 cover 2-10 releasing 2-22 Transparent cover 2-13 Troubleshooting 8-11 TXD RS-232C/423A signal C-2
character set A-6, A-30 CI-DLP mode A-6 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 - P6000-P/S mode A-30 selecting 4-12, 6-25 Undefined codes (CI-DLP mode) character codes 4-23, 5-35 control codes 4-23, 5-36 Underlining 5-20, 6-23, 7-24 CI-DLP mode 5-20 IBM mode 7-24 P6000-P/S mode 6-23 Unidirectional printing 4-45 CI-GAP4 mode 4-56 enable 4-45 Units, form length (CI-DLPmode) 4-33, 5-45 Unit separator control code CI-DLP mode 5-15, 5-40, 5-41, 5-51, 5-60, 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-11, 6-34, 6-38, 6-39 Unpacking 2-4 Upper case 2-13, 2-14 Upper tractor 2-13 cover 2-10 Uppercase only in high speed draft (HSD) mode 4-8 US ASCII character set CI-DLP mode A-2, A-4 selecting 4-12, 5-25 CI-GAP4 mode selecting 4-56 P6000-P/S mode A-28 selecting 4-12, 6-25 US code CI-DLP mode 5-15, 5-40, 5-41, 5-51, 5-60, 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-11, 6-34, 6-38, 6-39 User number 3-3, 3-7, 3-15, 3-17 copy 4-38, 4-39 select 3-26 CI-DLP mode 5-88 IBM mode 7-48 P6000-P/S mode 6-66
UK
Vertical enlargement 5-22, 6-18, 7-27 CI-DLP mode 5-22 reset after one line 4-36, 5-23 IBM mode 7-27 P6000-P/S mode 6-18 Vertical format units 12-channel B-300 DAVFU (CI-DLP mode) 5-58 bottom of form control, selecting 4-20, 5-47 channel selection 5-60 enabling (CI-DLP mode) 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-58 using the PI line 5-59 resetting 5-61 12-channel DAVFU 5-51, 6-40 bottom of form control (CI-DLP mode) 4-20, 5-47 channel selection 5-56, 5-57, 6-44 . CI-DLP mode 5-56 using PI line 5-57 P6000-P/S mode 6-44 enabling CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 loading 5-51, 6-40 CI-DLP mode 5-51 P6000-P/S mode 6-40 resetting 5-57 CI-DLP mode 5-57 P6000-P/S mode 6-44 14-channel EVFU 5-62, 6-34 channel selection 5-65, 6-37 CI-DLP mode 5-65 P6000-P mode 6-37 enabling CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 loading 5-62, 6-34 CI-DLP mode 5-62 P6000-P mode 6-34 resetting 5-66, 6-38 CI-DLP mode 5-66 P6000-P mode 6-38 2-channel VFU (CI-DLPmode) 5-49 bottom of form control, enabling 4-20, 5-47 enabling 4-20, 5-48 loading 5-49 resetting 5-50
,
V (Continued)
Vertical tab code CI-DLP mode 5-7, 4-29, 5-43, 5-48, 5-49, 5-57, 5-60 function 4-29, 5-48 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P mode 6-8, 6-37, 6-44 P6000-S mode 6-8, 6-32, 6-33, 6--44 Vertical tabs clearing CI-DLP mode 5-50, 5-57, 5-61, 5-66 IBM mode 7-14 setting CI-DLP mode 5-49, 5-51, 5-58, 5-62 IBM mode 7-14 P6000-P mode 6-34, 6-40 P6000-S mode 6-32, 6-40
VmT
channel select P6000-S mode 6 -33 loading CI-DLP mode 5-49 P6000-S mode 6-32 resetting CI-DLP mode 5-50 selecting CI-DLP mode 4-20, 5-48 P6000-P mode 4-20 VT code CI-DLP mode 4-29, 5-7, 5-43, 5-48, 5-49, 5-57, 5-60 function 4-29, 5-48 IBM mode 7-6 P6000-P mode 6-8, 6-37, 6-44 P6000-S mode 6-8, 6-32, 6-33, 6-44
Wake-up command character, CI-GAP4 4-57 Weight 2-2, B-6 Width, paper 1-1 Wraparound setting 4 -17
XOFF code 4 - 5 2 , 5-9, 6 - 1 0 , C-4 CI-DLP mode 5-9 enable 4-27, 5-32 P6000-P/S mode 6-10 enable 4-27 use with XON/XOFF protocol 4-52, C-4 X N code 4 - 5 2 , 5 - 9 , 6-10, 7-8, C-4 O CI-DLP mode 5-9 enable 4 - 2 7 , 5-32 IBM mode 7 - 8 P6000-P/S mode 6-10 enable 4-27 use with XON/XOFF protocol 4 - 5 2 , C-4 XON/XOFF protocol C-4 XON/XOFF protocol selection 4 - 5 2 XON/XOFF sent while idle 4-55
Zero character style selection CI-DLP mode 4 - 1 3 , 5-24 IBM, P6000-P/S modes 4 - 1 3

C-ITOH 500e 1000e Users Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

C-ITOH 500e 1000e Users Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CI-5OOe,/Cl-lOOOe

MATRIX Lr'NE PRlN TER

P.N. 093-100 Rev. A June 1995

USER'S MANUAL FOR MODEL CI-500e/CI-1000e MATRIX LINE PRINTER

FCC COMPLIANCE S A E E T F R AMERICAN USERS TTMN O

EM1 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT FOR CANADIAN USERS

ETAT DE CONFORMITE EM1 A L'USAGE DES UTILISATEURS CANADIENS

ATTENTION: Utiliser des cPbles blindts pour la c o ~ e x i o n cet Cquipement A I'ordinateur. de

Safety Marking and EMC

ITOCHU (C-ITOH) SALES NETWORK

Southeast/west Asia, Middle East, Africa, Oceania, South/Central America

is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 3 .USING THE PRINTER

CHAPTER 4 .PRINTER ATTRIBUTES (Continued)

. Vertical Enlargement Reset ..........................................

- Plot Mode Reset .................................................................

CHAPTER 5 .DLP EMULATION MODE

CHAPTER 5 .DLP EMULATION MODE (Continued)

CHAPTER 6 .PRINTRONIX EMULATION MODES

CHAPTER 6 .PRINTRONIX EMULATION MODES (Continued)

CHAPTER 7 .IBM EMULATION MODE

CHAPTER 7 .IBM EMULATION MODE (Continued)

CHAPTER 8 .ALARMS AND MAINTENANCE

8-3 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-11

Figure 1-1. The CI-500e/1000e Printer

Figure 1-2. The CI-500e/1000e Printer: Rear View

CI-500e/1000e MAJOR FEATURES

Standard features of the CI-500e/CI-1000eprinter include:

Power Cord Ribbon Cleaning Brush for print head

Figure 1-3. CI-500e/CI-1000eWith Enclosed Cabinet

BASIC PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

IBM EMULATION CPI DP Mode 10 12 15 17.14 10 12 15

QUICK SET-UP GUIDE

These steps set up the printer for operations:

Pg. 2-4 Pg. 2-4, 7

STEP 3. STEP 4. STEP 5. STEP 6. STEP 7.

Pg. 2-17 Pg. 2-15

Select operating characteristics.

CI-5OOeICI-1000e TIPS ON PRINTER INSTALLATION LOCATION

Figure 2-1. Minimum Installation Distances

(Location considerations continued)

Do not expose the printer to damaging heat (such as

and outward until the fastener comes out.

Figure 2-2. Fastener Removal

REMOVE CARTON Lift and remove carton cover from base.

Figure 2-3. Accessory Box Removal (continued)

LIFT PRINTER FROM PACKING BOX

Figure 2-4. How to Safely Lift Printer (continued)

Figure 2-5. Standard Accessories

Figure 2-6. Loosening the Front Cover Screws

OUICK REFERENCE TO PRINTER PARTS

- Upper Case - Interface Cartridge Cover - Control Panel

- Cover, Lower Tractor

Paper End Sensor Front Cover Switch Front Cover

- Paper Guide Wheel - Ribbon

31 - Power Switch 32 - Power Connector Socket

Figure 2-7. CI-500e/CI-1000eComponents Locations

DESCRIPTIONS OF MAJOR PARTS

COVER, LOWER TRACTOR

COVER, UPPER TRACTOR

Allows access to lower tractors.

INTERFACE CARTRIDGE COVER